JP2019170885A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving games with amusement at a high level.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided in which a pressing order navigation to be displayed in a pressing order display device D270 and in a presentation display device S40 is configured to start being displayed within a predetermined period (e.g., during a period when an operation to a stop button becomes effective, starting from a start lever operation → waiting period → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state) and, furthermore, in which the pressing order navigation displayed in the pressing order display device D270 and in the presentation display device S40 is configured to finish being displayed within a predetermined period (e.g., during a period when paying out based on a winning is completed, starting from a third stop button operation (pressing-down) → the third stop button no-pressing-down → winning determination).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  It relates to gaming machines.

  In a spinning machine (slot machine), one game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. As a result of the rotation of the plurality of rows of reels (reel), the reels are stopped using the rotary stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotation, and the predetermined pattern on the effective line When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as “777”) is lined up, a special gaming state in which a profit state is higher for the player than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small role or the like is higher than in a normal state) ) Is a common type. Here, in the case of a swivel-type game machine, when an image for production to enhance the fun of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation and stop operations of the reel There is a structure to predict and enjoy the outcome of the game while comparing the design displayed on the spinning cylinder with the effect image displayed on the display. There are many things. In many cases, when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, an error may be caused to stop the progress of the game. In addition, as a recent pachinko gaming machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is a pachinko game machine that transitions to the (special game) state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Within the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states.

JP2006-135476A

  It is desired to provide a gaming machine that can realize a highly interesting game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is
A plurality of reels (eg, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53);
A start switch (eg, start lever D50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43);
An instruction display unit capable of displaying information (for example, a push order display device D270);
An internal lottery means for carrying out an internal lottery based on the operation of the start switch;
Game progress standby means for waiting for the start of rotation of the plurality of reels even when the start switch is operated under a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet until a predetermined minimum game time has passed,
A main control board (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, an effect display device S40);
A sub-control board (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the output of information to the information display unit,
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch, an instruction game that displays information that can identify the advantageous operation mode on an instruction display unit,
A first section in which the instruction game is not executed;
A second section that can execute the instruction game, and in the instruction game, an operation mode suggestion image that suggests an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the information display unit,
In the game in which the specific combination is determined by the internal lottery means in the second section, the instruction game can be executed.
In the designated game in which the start switch is operated and the specific combination is determined after the predetermined minimum game time has elapsed and the specified number of game media have been betted in the second section. It is configured to start displaying the operation mode suggestion image on the information display unit after starting to display information that can identify the advantageous operation mode on the instruction display unit,
In the instruction game in which the start switch is operated and the specific combination is determined in a situation where the specified number of game media are bet before the predetermined minimum game time elapses in the second section, After starting to display the operation mode suggestion image on the information display unit, the instruction display unit is configured to start displaying information that can identify the advantageous operation mode,
When the final stop operation of the stop switch in the instruction game in which the specific combination is determined is performed in the second section, the display of information that can specify the advantageous operation mode on the instruction display unit is ended. Thereafter, the gaming machine is configured to end the display of the operation mode suggestion image in the information display unit.

  According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize a highly interesting game.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a state in which the door of the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications in the swivel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 shows a list 3 of symbol combinations in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus appearance rate in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotation drive control process on the main control board side in the rotation type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the rotation drive control process on the main control board side in the rotation type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram relating to the rotating operation of the reel in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a push order display image diagram in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of sub-side power-off processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the effect determination processing at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution feasibility determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of an AT effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the restoration possibility determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of processing during AT at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special warning process when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the specialization process when the start lever is operated on the side of the sub-control board in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the internal BB advantageous processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the process at the time of the first cylinder stop acceptance on the sub-control board side in the cylinder-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the process at the time of accepting the second torso stop on the sub-control board side in the torso type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the third related-related effect determination process at the time of stopping on the sub control board in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the process at the time of the third cylinder stop acceptance on the sub-control board side in the rotary game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 60 is an operation diagram in a winning game of replay applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 61 is an operation diagram in a re-winning game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 62 is an operation diagram in a winning game of replay applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 63 is an operation diagram in a winning game of replay applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a sectional side view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the structure inside a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows arrangement | positioning with the medal auxiliary tank HS and the full detection electrode DE. It is the schematic which shows the magnitude | size and position of a full detection electrode and screw BS. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel belt | band | zone. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel belt | band | zone. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the rotation start freezing execution determination process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the freeze execution determination process at the time of stop on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the rotary gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is a lamp unit lighting configuration image that can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode that can be applied to the rotating game machine according to the present example. FIG. 79 is an example of a configuration relating to payout that can be applied to the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp that can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of a lighting mode of a max bet lamp that can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of a lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of the lighting mode of the Max bet lamp, which can be applied to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of an operation at the time of adjusting a checkout button, which can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of the action at the time of the adjustment button operation, which can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of the action at the time of the adjustment button operation, which can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of the action at the time of the adjustment button operation, which can be applied to the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first mode of timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88 (b) shows a second timing of power-supply of the gaming machine and power-off. It is a timing chart which shows the aspect of. FIG. 89 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89 (b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between an electric power feeding state and a condition. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process for adding the number of credits, a process for paying out game medals, and a process for outputting a game medium giving sound. FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on main control board M. FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of an AT state transition control process on the main control board side, which can be applied to the spinning cylinder game machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push-sequence navigation when there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 95 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push-sequence navigation in the case where there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 96 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push-sequence navigation in the case where there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 97 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push-sequence navigation in the case where there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push-sequence navigation when there is a weight in the AT state that can be applied to the spinning-reel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of the start timing of push-sequence navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of the start timing of push-sequence navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of the start timing of push-sequence navigation including voice when there is no weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of the start timing of push-sequence navigation including voice when there is a weight in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation applicable to the spinning-reel game machine according to the present example when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state. FIG. 105 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push-order navigation when the push-order bell combination is won in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third push-order navigation when the push-order bell combination is won in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order re-playing game combination is won in the AT state, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation applicable to the spinning-reel game machine according to the present example when the push order re-playing game combination is won in the AT state. FIG. 109 is an image diagram showing a change in display mode of reel stop control and push order navigation in the AT state, which can be applied to the spinning-reel game machine according to the present example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode of the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor, which can be applied to the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the game progress control process on the main control board side, which can be applied to the rotating type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of medal insertion error processing on the main control board side, which can be applied to the rotating game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between the detection of game medals on the main control board side and the game addition medal on the main control board side and the credit addition process, which can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the third embodiment. is there. FIG. 114 is an image view of error detection by a chute sensor on the main control board side, which can be applied to the spinning cylinder game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing game medal detection modes of the first insertion sensor, the second insertion sensor, and the chute sensor that can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal return member that can be applied to the rotating type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member that can be applied to the rotating type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals flowing down a medal return member, which can be applied to the rotating game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out to a medal receiving slot, which can be applied to the spinning-reel game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing a game medal detection mode of the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which can be applied to the rotating type game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of the disk rotation mode from the start of hopper motor drive to the stop of hopper motor drive, applicable to the rotating type game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a main control board that can be applied to the swivel type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during the settlement process. It is the 1st pattern figure which showed the audio | voice output process by the side of a sub control board | substrate based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 123 is a main control board that can be applied to the spinning machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during the settlement process. It is the 2nd pattern figure which showed the audio | voice output process by the side of a sub control board | substrate based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 124 shows a main control board that can be applied to the swivel type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during the wait period. It is the pattern figure which showed the audio | voice output process by the side of the sub control board | substrate based on the control command transmitted from the side. FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during the medal payout process from the hopper, which can be applied to the spinning-reel game machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is the 1st pattern figure which showed the audio | voice output process by the side of a sub control board based on the control command transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 126 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during the medal payout process from the hopper, which can be applied to the spinning-reel game machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is the 2nd pattern figure which showed the audio | voice output process by the side of the sub control board | substrate based on the control command transmitted from the main control board side. FIG. 127 is a table relating to numeric values applicable to this example.

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer, sometimes referred to as a lottery) to determine some game content in a revolving game machine. It also includes pseudo random numbers (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and soft random numbers as pseudo random numbers). For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the outcome of the game, specifically, a “winning random number” related to a special role or a winning combination (small role, replaying role) for shifting to a special game, etc. Can be mentioned. “CPU” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, or the like. “Power interruption (power interruption)” means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level regardless of whether the power switch provided on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes shutting down the power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as unit damage or power outages. “ROM” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and physically retains information (for example, “1” for a device configuration that conducts when a current for reading data is applied, It will be “0” if the device configuration is not.) RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and electrically holds information (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, “1” is stored if it is stored, and it is not stored. It is generally “0.” In general, backup power is supplied to some or all of the data stored in the RAM when the power is interrupted). The “game state” is, for example, a special game state in which a game medal can be easily acquired and advantageous to the player (so-called jackpot game, such as a bonus game, a type 1 BB, a type 2 BB, or the like) ), The re-game probability variation game state (RT state) in which the re-game player win rate is higher (or lower) than the normal game state in which the re-game player win rate is a predetermined value, and the winning role Order of the reels for winning a prize, an AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, and the like. Also in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, AT state, ART state is different, high probability normal gaming state, low probability normal gaming state, etc. (in this example, referred to as lottery state) ). Also, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {in addition, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery transition to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side}. In this example, the state related to the AT and the RT state are individually described. The RT state is referred to as “RT1” and the state related to the AT is referred to as “normal game state”. As a state relating to ART, the state relating to ART may be referred to as “normal gaming state” or the like. The “winning role” is the type (or condition device number) of the condition device won by internal lottery (sometimes referred to as an internal lottery). The “notification state” is a state related to an AT capable of executing push order navigation described later, and even if a game is won by a condition device that does not execute push order navigation because the winning combination is not different depending on the reel stop order. If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation can be performed, the “notification state” is set. The “counter value” is also referred to as “notification game executable number”, and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when “the number of notification games that can be executed” is 1 or more (the game that has become “0” may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the “notification game executable number”, the number of game media obtained based on the winning of the small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number obtained by subtracting the inserted number from the paid-out number) The number of wins for the order bell may be adopted. In addition, the “special notification state” is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and is referred to as “addition special state” in this example. The “specific condition” is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted. For example, the specific condition is that, for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, push order bell combination) is won. “Type 1 special character” is a character that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winnings per prescribed number or increases the probability that the conditional device related to winnings per prescribed number will operate. The operation can be continued until a game result is obtained that does not exceed 12 times, and is sometimes referred to as RB (regular bonus). "Type 1 special combination continuous operation device" is a device that can operate the first type special combination continuously, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed. The operation is terminated and may be referred to as a BB (Big Bonus) or a first type BB. “Type 2 special combination” is a combination that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the combination lottery. The combination is activated when a predetermined game result is obtained. In such a case, the operation is terminated and may be referred to as CB (challenge bonus). "Type 2 special feature continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate type 2 special features, and is activated when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. The operation ends and is sometimes referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. The “ordinary accessory” is an accessory that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate. It operates when a combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as SB (single bonus). The “all JACIN type” is a configuration in which, when the first type BB combination wins, it is regarded as having been JACIN and is always in the RB during the execution of the first type BB. The “JACIN lottery type” is a configuration that repeatedly executes non-RB and RB during execution of the first type BB. In addition, the “non-control reel” is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after performing the stop operation is not executed, and is stopped at the nearest reel position where the stop operation can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel. The “all CB type” is a configuration that is always in the CB when the second type BB is executed. The “CB transfer lottery type” is a configuration that repeatedly executes non-CB and CB during execution of the second type BB.

  Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the feature (outline) of the spinning-rotor type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereafter, each element is explained in full detail, referring drawings.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), the basic structure of the front side of the rotary gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The rotating type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet and a base body), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, a main control. A substrate M (a substrate on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub control substrate S (a substrate on which the sub control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted) are configured. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for enabling visual recognition of a gaming state, a mechanism for enabling input of game media, a mechanism for operating a reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, the reel window D160, the insertion number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-gaming lamp D290, the insertion possible lamp D300, the special gaming state display device D250, the number of credits, as a mechanism for making the gaming state visible. A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section indicator YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and inputting the number of bets (the number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170, a bet button D220, and a mechanism for enabling payout of the inserted game media are settled. Button D60 is attached. As a mechanism for operating the reel, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. Note that the spinning-reel game machine in this embodiment is a player to which a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, and the like are attached. It has a console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism to make game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible is described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured such that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be seen through the reel window D160. Also, the insertion number indicator lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (to insert a game medal necessary to start one game) are lit. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the insertion number display lamp D210 is constituted by three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. 1 bet lamp D211: lit, 2 bet lamp D212: unlit, 3 bet lamp D213: unlit, and when there are two game medals bet, 1 bet lamp D211: lit, 2 bet lamp D212 : ON, 3 bet lamp D213: OFF, and when there are 3 betting game medals, 1 bet lamp D211: ON, 2 bet lamp D212: ON, 3 bet lamp D213: ON (re-game) However, this is not the case in the next game that is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). Further, the start lamp D180 is configured by an LED and is lit when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (no operation is accepted). It is configured to turn off in some cases. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is configured by an LED, and is lit up when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and is turned off when the next game where the re-game is stopped is completed. The insertion possible lamp D300 is lit (may be blinked) when the insertion of a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is effective, or when the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the insertion of a game medal is possible. It is configured to turn off when it is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. The special game state display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. The special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts in the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display unit) to be described later. By displaying so that the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained. The credit amount display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit number) stored in the gaming machine as medals held by the player. The payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured by a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button) The condition device (the so-called push order (sometimes referred to as a role with a push order), which may differ depending on the winning combination depending on the stop order of D43). Is a reel that is most advantageous to the player in a game in which a profit rate (the number of payouts, the subsequent RT state, etc., which can be different) is generally established. The stop order can be notified (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). Thus, the payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays of the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays games according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player to be guaranteed when progressing (in this example, it is also referred to as a push order navigation state or a notification game and will be described in detail later). It is configured as follows. Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player can be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games in which the state related to the advantageous AT is guaranteed and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

  Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is constituted by an LED, and is configured to turn on when it is an “advantageous section” and to be turned off when it is not an “advantageous section” (for lighting and extinguishing timings). Will be described later). Here, in the case of the spinning type gaming machine according to the present example, a special gaming state (so-called big hit game, which is a bonus game, in which a game medal can be easily obtained and advantageous to the player, as in the conventional spinning type gaming machine. Or the first type BB, the second type BB, etc.), and the winning rate of the re-gamer is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-gamer is a predetermined value. The re-play probability variation game state (RT state), the reel stop order for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, the RT state and the AT state Combined ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these “game state”, one of three “game sections” of “normal section”, “standby section” and “advantage section” Can be set Going on. In this example, the “standby section” is not set, and any one of the “normal section” and the “advantage section” is set. Among these, the “advantageous section” is positioned as being relatively advantageous to the player over the other “game sections”. For example, the “gaming state” is an AT state or an ART state. “Advantageous section” is associated. That is, when the “gaming state” is in the AT state or ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, but as will be described later, the setting control for the “game section” is also the setting control for the “gaming state”. Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the game progress, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous for the player by the lighting / extinction status of the advantageous section indicator YH, It can be communicated to players without lies. As will be described later, if the “advantageous section” continues until a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the “normal section” is forcibly set. Since the state related to the AT is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set “game section” also affects the transition of the “game state” As a result, it is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a “game state” such as an AT state or an ART state with a relatively high degree of design freedom. It is. As described above, when the “advantageous section” continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the “normal section” is forcibly set, that is, the “advantageous section” ends. However, the termination condition of the “advantageous section” is not limited to this. The end condition of the “advantageous section” in the spinning-reel game machine according to this example is “the push that can acquire the small combination with the largest number of payouts among the small combinations that make up the push combination (the combination with push order)” One execution of sequential navigation (for example, when there are seven, three, and one small combination as a small combination constituting a push forward combination, the push navigation in which the largest number of payouts can be acquired is seven. If there is a push order that can be acquired 7 or 1 by the push order, and a push order that can be obtained 3 by the push order, the push order navigation that can be obtained by 3 is referred to here. Does not apply to push order navigation) or “Wins any of BB, RB, MB” and satisfies “arbitrary end condition (40G1 set loop lottery not selected (AT), fixed 32G Elapsed (gaseous signs, etc.) ”or“ Advantageous zone 1500G ”is the end condition To have. In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (eg, a specification in which there is a replay push order for transitioning to the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the number of payouts varies depending on the push order), The condition for ending the advantageous section of “one push order navigation that can acquire the small combination with the largest number of payouts” is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, since the small combination constituting the push combination is composed of the small combination corresponding to the 11-sheet combination and the small combination corresponding to the 1-sheet combination, “the number of payouts is the largest. The “execution of one push order navigation capable of acquiring a small combination” refers to notifying the push order in which eleven medals can be acquired (eleven winning combinations can be won).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling input of game media will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for game medals, and the game medal inserted into the slot is guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a situation where medals can be received. Also, an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided in the gaming machine as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and are guided into the gaming machine. When it is determined that a game medal has been normally inserted, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet. Further, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and by operation, the stored medal (credit medal) and / or the bet medal can be paid back to the player. Yes. Note that the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the reel operation by the operation. The stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and the operation of the reels can be stopped sequentially by operating the respective stop buttons. Has been.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main part of the other mechanism provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating game machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect as a mechanism for enhancing the fun of the game, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be turned on in various lighting modes. Middle panel (medium decorative panel) which is a member formed by a signal relay door substrate D, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a synthetic resin, and the like. An upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back side of the front door DU so that a display unit that displays the effect or the like can be visually recognized through a perspective region formed on the upper panel. In addition, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have light emission sources that emit light according to the progress of the game of the rotating game machine P. The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have decorative lamps on the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, respectively. Unit D150 is provided, and LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right side and the left side across upper panel D130 (decorative lamp unit D150 and LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as a lamp unit. ). In addition, a door substrate D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU. Input signals from the stop button D40, the start lever D50, the checkout button D60, etc. described above are attached to the door substrate D. Is input, and has a function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to a main control board M described later. Further, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided in the vicinity of the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, and the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 is detected and simplified. It has a function of performing authenticity, guiding an appropriate medal to a hopper H40 described later, and returning an inappropriate medal to a medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door substrate D. The middle panel is the upper part of the console, the lower part of the upper panel D130, and the panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the above-described console D190 are an operation on a menu screen to be described later or a button repeated striking effect on the side of the sub control board S (operating the sub input button SB repeatedly. This is a member used for the progress of a bonus game or a mini game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the “AT state”). The front door DU of the swivel type gaming machine P can detect the open / close state of the medal tray D230 and the front door DU that receive a game medal (or may be simply referred to as a medal) discharged from the discharge port D240. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a key hole D260, and a key (door key) that matches the shape of the key hole D260 is inserted into the key hole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)} The front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 {and in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)} so that an error state (door opening error or the like) can be canceled. Yes. Further, a bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220. The bet button lamp S50 is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is lit (or flashes). ), The player can perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided in the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43), and the stop button lamp S60. Is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player confirms that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective depending on whether or not the stop button lamp S60 is lit (or blinking) and / or the lighting color. Can be perceived. It should be noted that since it is configured that only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is lit in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, and the right stop is stopped. Like the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 can be different from each other. Further, by changing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (may be different such as lighting / flashing, or may be different such as low-speed flashing / high-speed flashing), push order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button to be stopped at present, for example, all reels are rotating and the order of pushing “left → middle → right” is correct ( When the push order bell that is the maximum payout number) is selected, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button flashes in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button When the button lamp is lit blue and the player then operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the player presses the middle stop button. Blink white stop button lamp may be configured so as to light the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button blue.

  Next, a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to the approximate center of the back box so that a part of the back box is visible through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. The reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of a synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band MO). And based on operation of each stop button in start lever D50 and stop button D40, it is constituted so that rotation operation and stop operation of each reel part are enabled. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LEDs are lit, the outer periphery of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel portion is lit by the light transmitted through. In addition, above the reel M50, a later-described spinning substrate K for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

  Further, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game is stored above the reel M50. On the left side of the reel M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, that controls various effects performed using the above-described information is stored. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 that is used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset that can execute setting value change and error cancellation. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M (ie, the front door DU is opened). Otherwise, it may be in a location where human access is difficult).

  Below the reel M50, there are provided a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire revolving game machine P E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating game machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (also referred to as a power supply unit E). The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the spinning cylinder type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion acceptance sensor D10s serving as a path for game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 in the vicinity of the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, the game medals are discharged to the outlet D240. For example, a coin shooter D90 is provided. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly on the basis of dimensions, and accepting only game medals conforming to the standard dimensions. The selected medal (or other foreign matter) is returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. When a player inserts a game medal before operating the start lever D50 (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only those satisfying the standard are selected. A medal that does not satisfy the standard and is inserted into the hopper H40 is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), regardless of whether the standard is satisfied or not, Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. In addition, a sensor relating to medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (the back of the flow path), and when a game medal that has been received satisfying the dimensional standard passes, the first insertion sensor D20s. The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s and the signal is supplied to the main control board M to be described later.

  Next, a sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. A game medal inserted into the medal slot D170 first passes through the slot acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it turns on when the two protruding mechanisms are pressed, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. . Also, with such a configuration, when a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not satisfy the standard, for example, a diameter that is smaller than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are depressed. Not. Such medals cannot be maintained in the standing state, and thus cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down), and are paid back to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that there is an error even when the on-time continues for a predetermined time or longer (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off). .

  When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s pass immediately after passing. The throwing sensors (first throwing sensor D20s and second throwing sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off-state (the order of transition of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. The medal payout device H is operated with the checkout button in the state where credits (game medals stored electronically inside the gaming machine) or bets (medals inserted to start the game) exist. It will be activated when a game medal is paid out by winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H are displaced from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240 by displacing the discharge urging means H70. The payout sensors (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) are composed of two sensors, and the ON / OFF state of each sensor (the ON / OFF state of the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s). By monitoring the order of transition of the combination of off, etc.) and the time of on / off, various errors can be detected. More specifically, for example, when the game medal outlet H60 normally passes, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off from the state of the first payout sensor H10s = off due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout Sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off, so that when a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected It is possible to exemplify the configuration of an error.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The spinning-reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a prescribed number (the maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 The effective line for which a winning determination is made is one line of “upper left reel M51, middle middle M52, lower right M53”. The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the order of priority winning (in order of drawing-in priority) is “re-playing role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. For example, when the re-playing role and bonus are established at the same time The symbol combination which becomes the re-game player is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when the bell and watermelon are established, if a stop button is pressed at a position where both can be retracted (positions within 4 frames to the winning stop position), priority is given to a small part with a large number of payouts. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, 5 lines of 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to a line and changed to one line of the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53). In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small role that gives different profits to the player depending on the push order is won, a small role with a large number of payouts is operated when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is given priority (number priority control), and can be displayed in a stop position (within 4 frames from the stop operation) when operated in an incorrect answer push order different from the correct answer push order. Among the symbols arranged), control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning (the number of winning combinations among the plurality of winning symbol combinations is the highest).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “black seven”, “white seven”, “ There are 10 types: “Sheep”, “Blank”, “Bell”, “Replay A”, “Replay B”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Cherry”. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like the other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination including “blank” As a combination, for example, “watermelon B / replay A / blank” is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIG. 7 to FIG. 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. As will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, This one symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (the one line described above). In addition, even if the same type of symbols is not available on the active line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on the lines other than the active line when viewed from the player. It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned on one line on the reel, such as aligned on a horizontal line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols that will be a first type BB combination (a so-called first type special combination, which is hereinafter referred to simply as a BB combination), 1 type BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A and finished with payout exceeding 264 sheets) and 1 type BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B, 132 sheets) "Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven" and "Type 7 BB-C (Continuous operation of RB-B, finished with more than 132 payouts)" It has three symbol combinations with “White Seven”. In the present embodiment, when the first type BB combination wins and the BB is executed (the combination is activated), one BB is executed in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. Refers to the lottery table, and is configured to draw a winning combination (small role, replaying combination) other than the winning combination (a method that does not switch the table referred to in the case of lottery during one BB execution) Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB combination is not limited to this, and the table to be referred to in the combination lottery may be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is “RT1”, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 14 to No. 16 corresponding to the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state) Will be described later). Note that “RT0” is more disadvantageous to the player than “RT1”, and therefore transition from “RT1” to “RT0” may be referred to as falling. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 17 which is replay 05 is stopped and displayed, “Black Seven” can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. When the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, “white seven” can be stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is a condition device of “winning-A1” to “winning-A6”, which will be described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the order of pushing most advantageous to the player, and the 21st to 27th When the combination of symbols “Wind 01” to “Win 03” corresponding to is stopped and 11 game medals are paid out, the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order most advantageous to the player. , The symbol combinations corresponding to “No. 08” to “No. 11” corresponding to No. 39 to No. 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, “-” indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, “bell-bell” corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the present embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In the present embodiment, re-playing roles are provided from re-playing-A to re-playing-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and in the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Correspondingly, the replaying combination to be stopped and displayed can be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in the item “Conditioning device” in the rightmost column, a plurality of numbers are selected according to the stop order and stop positions of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. The condition devices of the type can be stopped and displayed, and among the plurality of types of condition devices, the condition devices having the same winning number are gathered, and “condition device (name)” is the third column from the right. It is shown in the item of. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” that is a condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, “re-game” is selected according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three kinds of condition devices “01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” can be stopped and displayed. The “condition device (name)” may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a condition device related to replay such as “replay 01” may be referred to as a re-playing role, and a condition device where a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as “winning 01” may be referred to as a small role. A conditional device that starts a BB when it is stopped and displayed such as “1 type BB-A” may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role will be won, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the selected small role will stop. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are operated at the displayable position, the symbol corresponding to the BB role is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small role is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small role does not stop and is displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case where “1 type BB-B + winning-C” which is the condition device of the winning number 21 is won, the cherry that is “winning 12” or “winning 13” and “1 type BB” -B "can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) the symbol numbers 0 to 4 on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the reel is positioned), the symbol number 4 corresponding to “winning 12” stops on the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52 Regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, “winning 12” is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, the “winning 13” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and “winning 13” is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “1” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to the seed BB-B stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the species BB-B is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located in the lower stage of the right reel M53 in the third stop. In this case, symbol number 17 corresponding to “1 type BB-B” is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the “species BB-B” cannot be stopped, and neither of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the “role” item shows what role the “condition device (name)” is, and “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 indicates the order of pressing the stop button. Regardless of the replaying game in which the re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, the “reverse pressed white 7-match replay” corresponding to the winning number 2 is the RT This is a condition device related to replay in which a re-game player whose state does not change is stopped and displayed. However, the reverse reel (stop the reel in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51) and the right reel M53. Stops at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are located at the lower stage of each reel. Operate the buttons And by, the right reel M53, "white Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the center reel M52 and left reel M51, white Seven has been configured to appear to be aligned in the lower part when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that was won by Re-Game-B and won the AT extra lottery, the player was elected to the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim at “White Seven” by pressing it in reverse. It is configured to notify the player of the effect. “Forward-pressed black 7-match replay” corresponding to the winning number 3 is a conditional device related to replay in which a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped regardless of the press order of the stop button. The reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the pattern numbers 13 to 17 of M53 are located at the lower stage of each reel, “Black Seven” is displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is displayed in a stopped state, and when viewed from the player, the black sevens appear to be aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that was won by Re-Game-C and won the AT extra lottery, the player won the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) to instruct to aim at “Black Seven” by pushing forward. It is configured to notify the player of the effect.

  In addition, “RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 4 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). )), The re-game player whose stop display is different may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the re-game 01, the re-game 02 or the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift. Is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 5 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, the replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6 determines which of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 the first stop reel (operates which stop button is operated). If the first reel is the right reel M53, the replay 01 or the replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. If the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, “push order bell 123” to “push order bell 321” corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are condition devices in which the winning combination depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected may be different. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”, and in the case of “123”, “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53” is stopped in the pressing order. For example, in the case of “winning A-1” (winning number 7), “123” = “Left → Middle → Right” is stopped in order (correct answer in the push order), which is the maximum number obtained. The symbol combination of “winning 01” from which eleven game medals can be acquired is stopped and displayed. Note that “123” in the “push order bell 123” indicates the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of sheets obtained in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of acquired sheets can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pressing order, one sheet is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as “AT in progress state”, the push order of the re-game player and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and “the normal game state It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit margins of the player not navigating the pushing order to the states relating to AT. The state related to AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winnings, even if any of winning prizes 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a condition device that can be acquired and is sometimes referred to as a push order unquestioned bell. In addition, “Watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. No. 14 has three watermelons A in the middle of each reel. In addition, “Watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in an oblique line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. In the case of No. 16, three watermelons are aligned obliquely downward, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, “BB medium and weak rare role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that can align three bells on the active line, which will be described later, but won during BB. This is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed. Also, “BB medium-rare small role (V-shaped bells)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a conditional device that can stop and display the bell on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. As will be described in detail later, this is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed by winning during BB.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, a numerical value from 0 to 3 is assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes 1 type BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) (19) Bonus winning information of 1, winning type number (20-23) including 1 type BB-B, 2 winning winning information including 1 type BB-C, winning information (24-27) including 1 type BB-C It is said. By storing the bonus winning information by the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB is established and which BB combination is won. Details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “winning / replay winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, winning numbers that do not include re-playing roles and small roles (winning number 0 corresponding to losing and winning numbers 19/20/24 corresponding to bonuses) are set to 0 for winning / replaying winning information. The 1-18 winning / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for the winning numbers including the replaying role or the small role. By storing the winning / replay winning information by the main control board M, it is possible to store information related to which replaying combination or small combination has been won. Details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. Details of the production group number will be described later.

  Next, in the item “departure group number”, a numerical value from 0 to 13 is assigned to each winning number. The main control board M stores the outgoing ball group number, and the stored outgoing ball group number is used when executing a lottery related to AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery), and executes a lottery process related to AT. Program and data capacity can be reduced. Note that even if a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT extra lottery are not executed. On the other hand, when a conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT extra lottery can be executed. The details of the outgoing ball group number will be described later. In addition, even when a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT-added lottery may be executed. In such a case, the payout group number is It is preferable that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning) when the condition device that becomes 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT lottery is executed.

  Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which a winning number (condition device number, also referred to as a winning combination) and bonus (also referred to as a winning combination BB) and a bonus (respectively referred to as a winning combination) are determined by a combination lottery means in the present embodiment. It is a list which shows (it is also called a win rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0”, “RT1” and “RT2” when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (especially the replaying combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the “replaying combination” (the total appearance of all replaying combinations) In the case of “RT1”, the appearance rate is higher than in other RT states. In addition, “re-game 04” (a so-called falling re-game player, “RT1” and a bonus corresponding to the re-game player in a situation where a bonus is not won can be displayed with winning numbers 4-6. When the combination is displayed in a stopped state, “RT0” will be elected mainly at “RT1” and hardly appear at “RT0”. In “RT2”, “re-game 04” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but the RT state does not shift even if “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. If “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed in “RT1”, the transition to “RT0”, that is, the fall effect (eg, the effect display device S40) that informs that the RT state has fallen. If “replay 04” is stopped and displayed at “RT0”, the fall effect may not be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that BB has been won because the fall effect has not been executed even though “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. Can increase the sex. In such a configuration, the sound effect output when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed, and a re-game player other than “re-game 04” (for example, “re-game” in which the RT state does not shift) 01 ”) may be configured to differ from the sound effect that is output due to the stop display, and by doing so, the player recognizes that“ re-game 04 ”is stopped and displayed. It can be configured easily. In addition, a state related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, “normal gaming state”, sometimes referred to as non-AT gaming state) and a state related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, “ “RT1” may be stayed in both cases of “AT state” and sometimes referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when a winning number that may shift (fall) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in a non-AT gaming state is generated. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. Thereby, in the non-AT gaming state, it is possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to “RT0”. On the other hand, in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game player who does not fall the RT state is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). Thus, the player can take care that the RT state does not fall, and can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified. In addition, “RT1” is mainly used for “RE GAME 05” that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (RE GAME who can be notified that the lottery has been won by adding the AT when stopped in the AT state). It appears at almost no other RT state. In addition, the transition of the state regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-gamer will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can execute push order navigation that notifies the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player. . It should be noted that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured to be able to overlap with the small role, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which bonuses and small roles overlap.

  Also, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB is won and the BB is not activated, the BB role of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single that does not overlap with the small role) In the case of winning a BB combination, which may be referred to as a single BB combination or a single BB), a new winning combination for the BB combination is invalid and only a small combination is effective. Specifically, for example, in the case of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), if winning 1 type BB-C is won The one-type BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 0 “losing” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be in the winning state. Further, in the situation of “RT2”, since BB is won and BB is not activated, the small combination of winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB combination are If the overlapping condition device is won, the new winning combination of BB is invalid and only winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), winning number 21 “1 type BB-B + winning-C” was won. In this case, Type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 14 “winning-C” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be in the winning state. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the re-playing combination. For example, a part of the re-game combination with the winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, the bonus is won even when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying player who can transition to the RT state). There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so that the player can be expected. In such a configuration, control is performed so that the RT state does not shift even when the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (transition to a RT state with a relatively low replay probability), but the replay probability has not become low (frequently replayed), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the fun related to the game, such that the possibility of winning the bonus is high.

  Next, the lottery probability in “1 type BB-A, B, C” at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, during the BB operation, the “common bell” with the winning number 13, the “BB medium-rare rare combination (diagonal bell alignment)” with the winning number 17 and the “BB medium strong rare combination” with the winning number 18 (V-shaped bell set) ”can be elected, and during operation of the BB elected in“ AT state ”,“ BB medium and weak rare role (slanted bell set) ” Alternatively, when “BB medium and strong rare small role (V-shaped bell set)” is won, an AT addition lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  Moreover, in the upper part of the figure, a small role appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the number in the setting 1 is 3204, the number in the setting 2 is 3404, the number in the setting 3 is 3604, the number in the setting 4 is 3904, the number in the setting 5 is 4204, and the number in the setting 6 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. By configuring in this way, for example, when a player progresses a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning number) of the common bell, it is related to the gaming machine that is being played by frequently winning the common bell. The game can proceed while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. Although the appearance rate of the common bell is different depending on the set value, the AT lottery, the AT extra lottery, and the high probability state transition lottery described later are not executed depending on the winning of the common bell. It is configured so as not to affect the state transition lottery (also referred to as AT lottery).

  The middle part of the figure shows a list of expected values when there is a push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as “AT state”, the reels are stopped according to the navigation. Average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals to be paid out by the winning small role, also referred to as the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and expected increase / decrease value of medals per game ( The ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the number of inserted medals when a game is played with 3 bets. If it is greater than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase. The value will be negative and medals will decrease). In addition, the average number of payouts per game is “total number of re-games (total of numbers for winning numbers 1 to 6) × number of pay-outs in re-games (3) + small role (11” Sum of the number of positions (small part appearance rate) (total number of places for winning numbers 7 to 16) × the number of payouts (11 sheets) for the small part (11 sheets) / sum of all the numbers (65536) ) ". Also, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as “average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)”. The number of medals inserted per game (the number of inserted game media when playing one game) is 3, and when the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, expected to increase or decrease medals per game The value is configured to be larger than 1. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, “RT1” has the largest medal increase / decrease expectation value per game. The numbers in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. In other words, when the game progresses in a situation where the push order navigation occurs (when operated in the optimum operation mode, also referred to as the advantageous operation mode), medals increase in “RT1”. Although “RT0” and “RT2” are not shown, the expected increase / decrease value per game is a value smaller than 1 in a situation where no push order navigation occurs. Will decrease. In the present embodiment, the expected increase / decrease value per game is greater than 1 when there is push order navigation even in “RT0” or “RT2”, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”Or“ RT2 ”may be configured such that the expected medal increase / decrease value per game when there is a push order navigation is smaller than 1. Note that when the combination of symbols to be replayed is stopped and displayed, the bet number (three) in the previous game is actually automatically bet. However, in calculating the expected medal increase / decrease value in this embodiment, The calculation is based on the assumption that three sheets are paid out. One game may be referred to as one game.

  In each RT state, the average number of payouts per game is 3.511129504 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 4.737915039 when the RT state is “RT1”. When “RT2” is set to “RT2”, the value is 3.671337146. Further, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 1.579305013 when the RT state is “RT1”. When “RT2” is “1.22790487”, when there is push order navigation, the RT state “RT1” is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is a value in the case of setting 1. Note that the winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities relating to the above small role and re-playing role are merely examples. For example, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in “RT2” in which BB is internally established (when there is push order navigation) The expected medal increase / decrease value) may be less than 1. With such a configuration, when a push order navigation occurs and when it is “RT2” (when BB is currently established), when a bonus can not be aligned in a game where the bonus can be aligned However, if the number of held medals gradually decreases and push navigation is generated and “RT2” (when BB is currently established), it is intentional in a game in which bonuses can be aligned. By not arranging the bonuses, it is possible to prevent a strategy of increasing the number of medals. Specifically, it is preferable to design such that the probability of losing in “RT2” is higher than the winning probabilities of all small roles (winning-A1 to winning-I) winning in “RT2”. It is preferable that the winning probability of the re-gamer is determined so that the winning probability of the re-gamer will be low. It is preferable to design so that it does not become too much). In addition, in “RT2” in this example, the winning probability of adding all the small roles is 18784/65536, the winning probability of adding all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of being lost is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the winning probability of adding all the small roles.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-A is assigned 40, which is the same number for all of the settings 1 to 6. The appearance rate of 1 type BB-C is assigned 160, which is the same number for all of settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, with respect to the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B, 160 is assigned to setting 1, 180 is assigned to setting 2, 200 is assigned to setting 3, and 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-B is different in the assigned numbers depending on the set value. In this way, type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C have no setting difference (type 1 BB-A, type 1 BB-C may be referred to as no setting difference BB, or no setting difference bonus). The type 1 BB-B functions as a BB having a setting difference (the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a setting difference BB or a setting difference bonus). In addition, the appearance rate is uniform for all of the 1 type BB-A, 1 type BB-B, and 1 type BB-C regardless of the RT state (“RT0” and “RT1”). Note that the appearance rates of the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-C (summation) are the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-B (summation) differs depending on the set value. The appearance rate added up as the appearance rate of 1 type BB-B is the same even if the setting value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be different depending on the setting value. Even in the case of the configuration, one type BB-B may be referred to as BB with a setting difference.

  Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, an electrical schematic configuration of the rotating type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the spinning-type game machine according to the present embodiment, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power board E, a relay board IN, centering on a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, A setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected to be able to exchange data. The solid line portion in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line portion in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

  The main control board (may be referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, and main game unit) M is a board that governs the progress of the entire game performed in the revolving game machine P. A main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and the main control chip C is connected to the CPUC 100 (also referred to as CPUMC), the built-in ROMC 110, the built-in RAMC 120, and the like so as to exchange data with each other via a bus. Has been installed. The main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub-control board S, the door board D, and the rotating board. The operation of these various substrates is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K etc. {For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information toward the sub-control substrate S) The sub-control board S can execute push-push navigation on the effect display device S40}.

  Also, the sub control chip SC is mounted on the sub control board (sometimes referred to as sub control means, sub board, sub control means, sub board, sub game unit) S, as with the above-described main control board M. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC 100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is connected to be exchanged with each other via a bus. The sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the spinning backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control command received from the main control board M, and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotary backlight S30, etc. The production of. In the case of the spinning-reel game machine according to this example, the player has nine ranges of the upper, middle, lower, upper middle, upper, middle, lower, upper right, upper, middle, and lower reels of the left reel. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the rotating backlight S30 so that they can be individually identified. As an example, when the LED corresponding to the upper stage of the left reel is turned on and all other LEDs are turned off, the player can identify that the upper stage of the left reel is turned on. In addition, the spinning type gaming machine according to the present example indicates that when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the player is informed that the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by changing the lighting mode of the rotating back light S30. The back lamp effect (sometimes referred to as a backlight effect) suggested to the above is executed.

  On the door substrate D, the above-described insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. The lever D50, the stored game medals (credits) and the inserted game medals are paid out, the checkout button D60 for ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the game state (not shown, The insertion number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the replay lamp D290, the insertion possible lamp D300, the special gaming state display device D250, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270, the credit number display device D200, and the advantageous section Display device assembly such as display YH}, front door opening / closing judgment, error cancellation, and setting value Door switch for performing further D80, is determined to be incompatible after being turned a medal (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and are connected. Further, the door substrate D is connected so as to exchange data with the main control substrate M described above. For this reason, when a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M through the door board D.

  In addition, a spinning motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a spinning sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the spinning board K. The rotating substrate K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the rotating motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the rotating sensor K20. Yes. Further, in the rotating type gaming machine of the present embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used as the rotating motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps that the reel M50 makes one rotation. Each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. 24 steps (= 480/20) are set. There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not a medal has been paid out normally and measuring the number of game medals paid out, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  These various control boards and the electric power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board for controlling the presence / absence of power supply by the power switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a dashed arrow. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotor board K, relay board IN) Electric power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this electric power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

  In addition, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset that can execute setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. Button M30 is connected. In addition, the main control board M has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel M50 (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an “AT state” which is a state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing AT transition lottery for shifting to AT, and AT extra lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the “AT state” And AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). ing. Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the rotating game machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, after turning on the power of the revolving game machine P in step 1000, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of timer interrupt in step 1002 (here, timer interrupt is started). Instead, only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, a flowchart related to processing at the time of timer interrupt described later is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery) To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held), and generates power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). Whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer stored in the process at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completion flag and returns to the processing at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

  If NO in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step The check result at 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets the RAM initialization range to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the setting values (setting value data) in the RAM ( For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1034. The range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area that stores the set value (set value data), but the total cumulative number of “advantageous sections” and the total cumulative number of game sections (advantageous sections + As a result of calculating the number of games, the number of games, the staying rate of the “advantageous section”, and the like are also not included in the RAM initialization range. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “favorable section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). Further, the advantageous section ratio calculation process is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → characteristic ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous character ratio → cumulative character ratio”. Is displayed. The continuous character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB is in operation / the total number of payouts”, and the character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is in operation”. / Total number of payouts ”. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM as a specific range including a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area), and go to Step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not a value at which a special game is executed. (In order to prevent a special game from being erroneously executed when a process for determining whether or not to execute a special game is executed due to noise or fraud immediately after the program processing is started). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the byte storing information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure to store only the information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise etc. (To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed from 1 to 6, initialization of the RAM is executed, and when the set value becomes “0”, it is necessary to return to “1”. Therefore, in this example, the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) is managed as 0 to 5, thereby correcting the setting value (setting value data) after executing the initialization of the RAM (step 1106 and The processing in step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = a value that is most disadvantageous for the player) in the setting value (setting value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payout display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, “88” for lighting all the segments). Then, a setting value is displayed on a setting display LED (not shown) (the display relating to the setting value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and Step 1112 Migrate to As described above, the number-of-payout display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure occurs in a part of a 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), an incorrect information can be notified when the push order is notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, it is possible to confirm whether or not 7 segments have failed by causing the payout number display device D270 to turn on all the “7” segments during operation of the setting change device. Providing profits can be prevented. Further, as a configuration relating to the display of the set value (set value data), a RAM for setting value display that stores data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display the set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1110, processing for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode is executed to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (when the added set value (set value data) exceeds 5) In this case, the set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the result of Step 1112 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processing in steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has ended, and the setting display LED (not shown) The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process in step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating the end of the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing relating to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in another flowchart). First, in step 1302, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits interruption (hereinafter, a flowchart relating to timer interruption processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process Is repeated, and the reset signal is input when the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since an infinite loop is entered, any operation that prompts a return is not accepted). In the case of No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information regarding the error, game progress status at the time of the error, etc. are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the upper limit of bets, the effective line for winning, etc.). In step 1203, data for clearing the data used in the previous game {eg, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). (Data) is also included in the RAM. In addition, you may make it comprise so that the number selected when the next game was performed may be overwritten, without clearing a condition apparatus number, production group number, instruction information, etc. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 in FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the RT state set in step 1204 (command to the sub side). Note that the processing for setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 in FIG. In step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a state relating to AT in the game (for example, “AT state”) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22). Step 1439, Step 1443, the state relating to the AT determined in Step 1444-3 and Step 1444-4 in FIG. 23 are set). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the state set in step 1206 (command to the sub side). Further, the process for setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in step 1416, step 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. In addition, when the state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the state, and the state related to the AT may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantageous section”, etc.) in the game (the game section determined in step 3510, step 3516, and step 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the medal auxiliary tank HS. Is determined based on current conduction / non-conduction (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined that the current is full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error with a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, the currents by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS are non-conductive and the setting / It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 is pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), The process proceeds to 1218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M permits the medal insertion acceptance (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-gamer), and the next process (step 1220). The process proceeds to (1). Here, in step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process formed by the medal flow path). Specifically, when a re-game player is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the ON process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the ON process of the blocker D100 is uniformly executed. With this configuration, even when a re-game player is established, if the number of stored credits does not reach a predetermined value, a game medal can be inserted, such as “RT1”. When you are staying in an RT state (for example, “RT1”) with a higher probability of winning a re-gamer than in the RT state, or re-playing role that is difficult to understand as a re-playing player Even if the bell-bell-bell on the invalid line or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without a sense of incongruity).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal is not betted or saved (no credit exists). In the case of Yes in Step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display conditions in Step 1221 (for example, the conditions are satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M is set to a setting display LED (not shown, but may be a payout number display device D 270, a credit number display device D 200, or an insertion number display light D 210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. It should be noted that when the transition condition for the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating the start of the setting change mode to the sub-control board S side, and the setting change mode when the setting change mode end condition is satisfied. A process for transmitting a command indicating that the process is to be terminated is executed. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to game medal insertion and settlement. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the medal is inserted). There are two insertion sensors for detection, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state where no medal flow path is formed). If the answer is No in Step 1230, the process in Step 1230 is repeated. If No in Step 1226 or Step 1227, the process proceeds to Step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are remaining credits or bet gaming medals. In the case of Yes in Step 1233, in Step 1234, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper driving flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and the game The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, only the remaining number of credits is to be settled when the previous game was a re-game player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing of step 1234). . Specifically, whether or not a situation in which it is determined that a medal has not been paid out has continued for a predetermined time despite transmission of a hopper drive signal to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). The process proceeds to 1247. On the other hand, if No at step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If step 1241 or step 1247 is No, the process proceeds to step 1236.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1232 or step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has a valid start lever D50 in step 1251 (for example, a prescribed number of game medals for starting a game have been inserted). ) And whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M performs processing for obtaining random numbers and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the answer is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state in which the AT can be added and lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery are “AT in-progress state”, “Additional special state”, “Specialization precursor state”, “Advantageous BB state”, In the “advantageous BB inside game”, the AT counter value can be greater than 0, but the AT is added and the lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from making it difficult for the player not to make the symbol combination of the BB intentional in the “advantageous BB inside game”. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a lottery by adding AT in “advantageous BB inside game”. In such a case, the AT addition lottery is won in “advantageous BB inside game”. Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately but to notify that the BT is completed and that the AT is added and the lottery is won, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games is added.

  In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not vary depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). It is preferable to execute a lottery. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a conditional device number management process, which will be described later.

  Here, states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The “low probability state” is a state in which an AT has not been won (a right to shift to an “AT state” has not been acquired) and a bonus combination has not been won. Note that the “low probability state” is a so-called “normal state” and may be referred to as a “normal state”. (2) “Normal BB inside game” is a state where the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, the BB combination is not won, and the AT lottery is not selected. (3) “Normal BB state” means that when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the situation where the BB role is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, Or it is a state executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside game”. (4) The “high probability state” is a state where the AT lottery is not won (the right to move to the “AT state” is not acquired) and the bonus combination is not won. In this state, it is easier to win the AT than the “low probability state” described above. As will be described later, when the state is newly shifted to the “high probability state”, the state is configured such that the state does not shift to the “low probability state” until the number of highly secured games has elapsed (5) “AT state” "Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of AT remaining games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the winning lottery described later is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the “AT in-progress state” continues (6) “specialized sign state” Is a state in which the right to shift to the “additional special state”, which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added, is acquired rather than the “AT state”. (7) “Additional special state” is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily increased compared to the “AT state”. (8) “Advantageous BB inside game” means winning in the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specializing sign state” or “additional special state”, and the BB role You have not won a prize. (9) “Standby BB inside game” is a state in which the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. . (10) The “advantageous BB state” is a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role that is won by the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “addition special state”. When the display is stopped, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “advantageous BB inside game”, or the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, and When the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the “standby BB inside game” It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) “Restorable / prohibiting effect state” is a state related to AT that shifts when the AT counter value is 0 and the continuous lottery described later is not won. In the “Restorability Produce State”, a resurrection lottery described later is executed, and when the resurrection lottery is won, the state shifts to “AT state” (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the resurrection lottery is not performed. If you win, you will move to a “low probability state”.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point (required to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order). And the other reels are appropriately requested according to the stop position of the other reels). In the case of Yes in Step 1261-1, in Step 1262, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to Step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the “BB inside game”, in the game winning the push order bell, the stop button was not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1) Even when the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the wrong answer), there are 11 symbol combinations to be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal (if it does not coincide with the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined). Whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal in step 1269 is determined by determining whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been normally completed. When the stop button is operated in an operation mode in which the winning combination can be won in the game being played, the actually stopped reel position was not normal (the winning determined by the internal lottery becomes possible) Even if the winning combination does not appear to be stopped by the player), if the reel stop control is normally executed by processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning combination of the winning combination The payout is configured to be executed. If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out game medals {the game medals earned by winning the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, game medals are paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and pays out one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display with a 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in Step 1282, in Step 1283, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal for which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning that became Yes in step 1275) has been completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. In the case of No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277, in the case of No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400, and in the case of No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, a game state transition process, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (step 1202 process).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a numerical value for comparison with the obtained random number, and the like are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. The winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are both won, or a bonus and a re-playing role are won, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same appearance group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the winning group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the same number is set for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push-order re-game players. Since the above-mentioned number is the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the push order bell combination, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay game combination is 3, and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when winning numbers 4-6, which are push order re-games, and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7-12, which are push order bells, are acquired as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery is won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the subsequent internal lottery table address is not determined (lottery) and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1259). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processing of step 3610 to step 3618 is repeatedly executed until there is no remaining number of repetitions or the internal lottery is won. If NO in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address relating to the next payout group number), moves to step 3604, and proceeds to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of Step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state”, or “additional special state”. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the game group number related to the game is an additional role during AT (a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games in the “AT state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is a payout group number (1, 3 in this example) regarding replay-B, replay-C, and winning-D. If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. In the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state relating to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M indicates that the game group number relating to the game is an additional role in the BB (“ In the “favorable BB state”, it is a winning number that can be added to the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether or not it is a winning group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I) Determine. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. In the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT is the “additional special state”. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M can add the number of AT games remaining in the special role group number for the game (in the “specialized state”). In “AT state”, it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, winning-A1 to A6). It is determined whether or not (2, 13 in this example). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. In the case of No in step 1506 or step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and determines the AT extra game number based on the game group number related to the game (for example, in the margin) In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random number value falls within the range). Note that determining the number of AT extra games is also referred to as executing an AT extra lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined AT added game number to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the added AT counter value in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined AT added game number (a command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S receives the command, It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. It should be noted that a lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT extra lottery) can also be executed in the case of a payout group number 7-11, which is a payout group number related to a win number (winning numbers 19-27) including a bonus .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and in this embodiment, a part of the state related to AT in which push order navigation is executed (in this example, “ In the case of the winning combination in the winning state in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB state”), based on the appearance group number related to the game, As the number of AT added games, “0” to “300” are determined by lottery, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. When “0” is determined, the number of remaining AT games does not increase (when “0” is determined, the AT addition lottery may be referred to as non-winning).

  Further, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT added games when winning the winning combination at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In this case, {place number (600) × AT additional game number (0) + placement number (100) × AT additional game number (10) + placement number (300) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number ( 24) × AT added game number (100)} / total number of numbers (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {place number (500) × AT extra game number (0) + place number (200) × AT extra game number (50) + Number (300) × AT added game number (100) + Number (24) × AT added game number (300)} / Total number of numbers (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

  Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1-D3, winnings-A1-A6, {number (300) × AT extra game number (10) + number (600) × The number of AT extra games (30) + the number of places (124) × the number of AT extra games (50)} / the total number of places (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1-D3, winnings-A1-A6, the number of AT games is added only when the status related to AT is "addition specialization state" It has become.

  Next, when the winning combination is a BB medium-rare rare role, {place number (800) × AT additional game number (0) + placement number (100) × AT additional game number (10) + placement number (100 ) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (100)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (300) × AT added game number (0) + number (300) × AT added game number (30) + number (400) ) × AT additional game number (50) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In the present embodiment, when the AT extra lottery is executed, the average value of the AT extra game number may be different depending on the type of the winning combination, but depending on the set value, the AT extra game number may be different. The average value is configured not to be different. Here, in the case where the AT addition lottery is executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same processing is executed as the AT extra lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. However, as shown in the present embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured by performing the AT lottery based on the appearance group number as in the present embodiment. When the same process is executed as an AT extra lottery, the process related to the AT extra lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2 or not. Will be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may make a determination based on a winning number (or winning / replaying winning information, a winning group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not it is a winning number related to re-game-B (reverse-play white 7 replay which is a re-game in which white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-press). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games due to replay-B, in other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning of replay-B is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by reverse pressing instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse pressing ("right → middle → left")). To perform the effect of instructing to align white seven), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”) which is a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect that prevents white seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to step 1526. In the case of No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the winning number related to the game (or may be determined by winning / replaying winning information, or a payout group number, etc.) as replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a forward-pressed black 7 replay, which is a re-game where the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by forward-pressing. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games by replay-C, in other words, the number of additional games AT by winning replay -C is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by a forward press instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and forward press ("left → middle → right")). To perform the effect of instructing to align the black seven), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the forward press avoidance command (command to the sub control board S side, forward press (“left → middle → right”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect to prevent the black seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Even in the case of No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1400). In this embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoid command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoid command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands, thereby Although it is configured to be able to execute effects related to push order navigation on the control board S side, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning an AT extra lottery, the fact that the AT extra lottery is won and the number of AT extra games is affected. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the processing in step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, push-sequence navigation on the sub-control board S side You may comprise so that the execution timing and production aspect of production may be determined. As an example, the replay-B is a game that has been won, and an effect mode in which reverse pressing is instructed in a game that has received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games) is selected. In the game that receives the command on the side of the sub-control board S, an effect that instructs reverse pressing is not executed, and a predetermined condition (for example, a specific re-game player (for example, replay) You may comprise so that the effect which instruct | indicates the pushing order in which 7 alignment can be performed in an invalid line in the game which satisfied game-B or C) was won may be performed. Or, in the game where the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (game with an additional number of AT games), the effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, (For example, display on the effect display device S40) in a game satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed simultaneously, in this case, the final game of the continuous effect). (For example, “+ 30G” is displayed.) In this example, the number of AT remaining games is also displayed in the effect display device S40. Such a display can be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different from each other. B won In a game where the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games), an effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, and a game satisfying a predetermined condition thereafter As an example of the case where the AT game number addition effect is executed, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) is given on the sub-control board S side to win a bonus (replay game inside the bonus- Since the winning probability of B is low (including 0%), the sub-control board S side will be special, for example, if a player is notified of the push order in which 7 matches are possible, the bonus will not be won) Information that the sub-control board S side determines that the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery and the AT remaining game number is added, is as follows. (1) AT remaining game The information on the number is added to the AT and sent after the lottery from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board S side sends the information on the number of AT remaining games sent last time and the AT remaining game sent this time. The difference with the number information is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (2) The command related to the number of AT added games obtained as a result of the AT added lottery on the main control board M side is added. In addition, when the AT extra lottery is not won, a command indicating that the AT extra lottery is not won is sent to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side When receiving a command, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine an effect mode of an effect related to push order navigation, for example, a game in which Re-Game-B is won. Then, in the game that received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (the game in which the number of AT games was not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order to avoid the seven matches) You may comprise so that the production | generation aspect which instruct | indicates may be selected and performed. In addition, although the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, as information for the sub control board S side to determine that the AT remaining game number was not added, (1) information on the AT remaining game number After the AT addition lottery, the data is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Thereafter, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasps the number of AT additional games won in the AT addition lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) the main control board As a result of the M-side AT extra lottery, a command related to the fact that the number of AT extra games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state relating to the AT capable of performing AT lottery. In the present embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the “high probability state”. By winning the BB in the “high probability state”, the “advantageous BB internal game” Then, when the BB combination wins, it shifts to the “advantageous BB state”, and when the executed BB is finished, it shifts to the “AT state” and the AT counter displays the initial number of AT games. The value 50 times will be set. In addition, even if BB is won in the “low probability state”, the game shifts to “normal BB inside game”, and then does not shift to “AT state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won in the “normal game state”, the AT lottery may be won by using the BB combination as a trigger. In such a configuration, when BB is won in the “normal game state”, if the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to “advantageous BB inside game” and then BB By aligning, it shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. In addition, in a state in which the BB is won in the “normal game state” and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be an “advantageous section” or a “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB combination with no setting difference) It is determined whether or not the seed BB-C). In the present embodiment, the winning number of the BB with no setting difference (winning numbers 19, 24) and the winning number with the same setting number as the BB with no setting difference (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27). Both are AT lotteries. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “advantageous BB inside game”, and proceeds to step 1410. Also in the case of No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate related to AT lottery (whether or not it can be won or not) is different when the state related to AT is different, but when the state related to AT is the same. Even if the set values are different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same (if the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT is always won regardless of the set value = It shifts to “AT state”).

  Next, in step 1410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state related to the AT after the next game has not been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion role (by winning, a small state that can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”). Whether or not it is a cherry) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is ½ and there is no problem if it is changed if it is not different depending on the set value). Execute a high probability state transfer lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

  In the case of No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the high securement fault counter KHc to the 10th game after the counter value of the high securement fault counter KHc is 1 (the high securement fault final game is “high probability state”). ). In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”, the push order is The “advantageous section” is configured not to end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500 games) “advantageous section” is not satisfied. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the “high-probability state” is configured not to end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because, for example, the push order navigation has not been executed more than once. ). If the BB role is elected during the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” can be selected at any timing even if the push order navigation is not executed once in the “advantageous section”. You may be comprised so that it may complete | finish. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to AT after the next game as “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied when the push order navigation is executed once. In addition, as a push order (a winning number where the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the player's profit rate is different), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a combination with a maximum payout number of 11 is provided. In such a case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation with the maximum payout number of 11 having the maximum payout number is executed once. Note that the process proceeds to step 1430 even when the result of step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428 is No. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new transition is made to the “high probability state”, 10 games that are highly secured obstacle games are set in the highly secured obstacle counter KHc, and the counter value becomes zero. Is configured not to enter the “low probability state”. Note that such a lottery method is merely an example. For example, after shifting to the “high probability state”, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games (staying in the “high probability state” is guaranteed). ), A lottery that shifts from a “high probability state” to a “low probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the 10 games have elapsed may be executed. It should be noted that the AT lottery (low-accuracy AT lottery, high-accuracy AT lottery) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is “AT state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state relating to AT is “AT state”, the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, the watermelon B In the case where the right to transition to the “specialized state of specialization” can be acquired with a probability of ½ when winning, and the state related to the AT is “in-AT state” When the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if winning the watermelon B, a lottery (specializing) (Which may also be referred to as state transition lottery), and is not configured to shift to the “specialization sign state” and “additional special state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to transfer to the “additional special state” (also referred to as a special state transfer lottery) May be configured so that the watermelon B is won in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less and the right to transition to the “additional specialization state” is granted. When winning the lottery to be won, it may be configured so that the next game winning the lottery can be (specialized sign state) or “additional special state” (can move to), or the AT counter value It may be configured to be able to enter (or move to) a “specialized sign state” or “additional special state” when the game becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or a game won in the lottery After the execution of a predetermined number of games, Place may be configured as capable of becoming a specialized state "(which can migrate to). In addition, it is not always necessary to go through the “specialization sign state” when shifting to the “additional special state”. For example, the configuration is such that it can directly shift from the “AT special state” to the “additional special state” May be. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a lottery that acquires the right to transfer to the special transition role ("addition special state") for the condition device related to the game. It is determined whether it is a watermelon B) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as “specialized sign state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in Step 1431, in Step 1436, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (when the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is set). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “AT in-process state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1 (the AT state transition enable condition is In order to satisfy, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as the “restoration effect state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1444-1 also in the case of No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game and the continuous lottery is won, 50 games as initial values are set again in the AT counter M60. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the gameability is such that 50 games of AT per set continue to loop at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the AT final game. For example, after the initial value is set in the first game of the AT (the first game that is newly in “AT state” or the AT counter M60). A continuous lottery may be executed in the first game). With such a configuration, it is already determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) is executed (whether or not the AT continues) in the “AT state”. The effect during the AT can be made different between the case where the continuous lottery is won and the case where the continuous lottery is not won. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 However, it is possible to change the BGM (songs are played, etc.) in a situation of 1 or more (while the AT is running) or to perform an effect that makes it definite that the player has won the continuous lottery.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state for reproducibility effect. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 144444, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game is selected in the next game by winning in the reviving role ("Restorability Prompt State"). It is determined whether or not it is a role that can shift to the “AT state”, in other words, a role that can return the AT. Here, in the present embodiment, the reviving combination includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and bonus combination (only setting BB combination with no setting difference and excluding setting BB combination). In the case where the condition device relating to the game becomes a revival role, it is said that the revival lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “AT in-process state”, and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transition enabling condition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1445. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1445 also in the case of No in step 1441-1. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the game is an AT final game and the continuous lottery is not won, the state transitions to the “Restorability Prompt State” and is revived in the “Restorability Prompt State”. If a lottery can be won, the game is shifted to the “AT state” from the next game. Note that the “Restorability Produce State” is “Advantageous Section”, but the lottery related to the AT in the “AT During State” (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the resurrection lottery can be executed In the “AT state” and “Restorability effect state”, the lottery execution mode regarding the AT is different.

  Next, in step 1445, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state related to the AT after the next game has not been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state transition condition regarding the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. Satisfies when 10 games, which are the number of precursor games, are consumed in the “state”). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If the number of precursor games is exhausted in the “precursor state”, it will be determined as “specialized state”. Note that if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M guarantees a high reservation fault counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub-side, in other words, the current high reservation fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. The command relating to the number of remaining games) is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game is determined as “advantageous BB internal game”. In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high securing fault counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1450). Even in the case of No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1450).

  In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate is different depending on the lottery status. When the BB role (BB setting without setting difference) is won in the “low probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won. No (after that, it does not shift to the “AT state”) On the other hand, if the BB role (BB role without setting difference) is won in the “high probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won (then it is changed to the “AT state”) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery role, and “high probability state A” and “high probability” are states related to the AT that is an “advantageous section”. When the condition device A is won in the “high probability state A”, the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device in the “high probability state B”. If you win A, you will be placed in the AT transfer lottery by 1/2. It may be configured so as to be selected. If the AT transfer lottery is won, the state relating to AT shifts to “AT ready state” which is a preparation state until the state shifts to “AT in-progress state”, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT ready state”). It may be configured to transition to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replaying winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replaying winning related to the game) Set commands related to information. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has a condition device related to the game in a pushing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pushing order, for example, winning-A1 etc.). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the order of pressing, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that the instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. In the case of executing the pushing order hitting game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pushing order hitting game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). (See Figure 34 for image). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels that is most profitable to the player in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as push order navigation, push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the push order display device D270. In both of the push order bell and the push order replay, “= 1” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and in the game related to the push order replay game, “ You may comprise so that it may become a display mode different from the case where the push order navigation of "left-> middle-> right" is displayed on the push order display apparatus D270. That is, the number of types of display of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

  If NO in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a mask process on the winning / replaying winning information of the game, and the masked information is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM. To remember. Here, when the winning / replaying winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replaying winning information is recognized by an illegal act, the high profit related to the game is increased. That is, the pushing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after executing the mask process {the process for concealing the winning / replay winning information (especially the information relating to the pressing order)) to the winning / replaying winning information related to the game. It is configured so that a highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As a mask processing method in this embodiment, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information (winning / replaying winning information having the same role is preferable. For example, the RT state shifts depending on the pressing order. A plurality of winning / replaying winning information that can be stopped and displayed for a combination of symbols that will be replayed as a single effect group number (for example, winning / replaying winning information 4 to 6 is set as a directing group 4) The group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, after the winning / replay winning information provided (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replaying after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information among the existing winning / replaying winning information like the production group number is used as a single winning / replaying winning information for winning / replaying after masking. It is desirable to provide game winning information (for example, winning / replaying winning information 4 to 6 is changed to winning / replaying winning information 19 which is winning / replaying winning information after mask processing)・ Replay winning information)). If it is determined that the game is a game for notifying operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to the AT on the main control board M, the winning / replaying winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the production group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets in the register area). 1472 is entered. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus has been won can be recognized on the sub side) (for example, Set in the register area) and proceed to the next process (the process of step 1550). In this embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number. The derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of the display of the push order navigation include: (1) When a fall re-playing role is included → Push where a fall re-playing role is not stopped and displayed In the case of navigation in order, (2) in the case of a bell (1 sheet combination / 11 sheet combination) → the navigation order in which the number of payouts becomes the largest is navigated. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the pushing order most advantageous for the player) In the case where the game section is a “normal section”, the sub control board S is configured to transmit the instruction number (the number that can specify the pushing order most advantageous for the player). The production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying winning information related to the game including the winning / replaying winning information in which the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the pushing order is directly used as the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying information for the game is not transmitted, and the winning / replaying in which the result of the game and the player's profit differ depending on the pressing order. In the case of winning information, the production group number in which the information related to the order is concealed is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

  When the game section is not an “advantageous section”, the effect group number is determined by executing the mask process when the winning / replay winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number refers to winning / replaying winning information, winning / replaying winning information related to a winning role having a similar role (for example, a replaying role including a falling replaying role, push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and assigned numbers. The mask process {the process for concealing the winning / replay winning information (especially information relating to the pressing order)} is performed on the winning / replaying winning information related to the game, and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the winning / replaying winning information is recognized due to an illegal act and the pushing order (reel stop order) related to the game is recognized.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is zero. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer that measures. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears information related to the reel stop order related to the finished game and information related to the press order. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request at the start of reel rotation related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, a command for indicating that the reel starts to rotate can be transmitted to the sub-control board S by the processing of Step 1562 and Step 1564.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and the situation of the game that is advantageous to the player such as when the state related to the AT is the “AT state” It is a game section that is easy to set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 (which is a decrement counter and 1500 which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the “favorable section” is initial. 1 is subtracted from the counter value which is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the period of “advantageous section”.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is the “AT in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by 1. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high securing fault counter KHc, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1700). It should be noted that if the result is No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the “AT state”, the game AT counter value is subtracted, but the “advantageous BB state”, “ In the case of “advantageous BB inside game”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remain) and the state shifts from the “AT in-progress state” to the “specialized precursor state”, the AT counter value is maintained and the “AT in-progress state” is maintained. It is configured to be able to transition (transition) from “state” → “specialized sign state” → “addition special state”. Even if the state relating to AT is “AT state”, it is possible not to decrement the AT counter value by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. You may control. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “30” and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “30”, the AT counter value is “30”. Or “30 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT addition lottery relating to the game, is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. “29” may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or “29 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT extra lottery (note that “α” obtained by the extra lottery is , In a specific game after the game (a game satisfying a predetermined condition at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the bonus game ends) without notifying the game. And “α” may be notified.) Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is also subtracted by 1 for each game even in the “advantageous BB inside game”, and an effect (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) suggesting the bonus confirmation is output. The number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, when a bonus is won in a state in which push order navigation such as “AT state” can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games can be executed using the effect display device S40 or the like to inquire whether or not the bonus has been won, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is ended is "30" or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of adding and adding the result of the AT extra lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “1” and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1”, the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is “0”, but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is performed to determine whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is “1”. The winning number (or winning / replay winning information, or the winning group number) where the game is executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1” and the AT addition lottery can be executed. Is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “0”. Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing a continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of AT remaining games is large.

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transition enable conditions are RAM clear execution (RAM initialization), replay stop display (in this example, replay 04 stop display), BB win / start・ It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enabling condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1750). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1750). In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT1”, the transition timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning to the RT state (stores the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of “RT0” to “RT2” and “1 type BB-A, B, C”, and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. Will be transferred. As a specific transition example of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT1”, RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the state transitions to “RT0”. The replay 04 is a stop display, specifically, when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the “replay-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT1”. The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if “Re-Game-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT 1”, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-play 04 is stopped and displayed. The RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”.

  In addition, when the RT state is “RT0” or “RT1”, the BB combination is won and the BB combination is not won in the selected game (the condition device relating to type 1 BB-A, B, C is activated). ) And the RT state shifts to “RT2”. Further, when the BB combination is won at “RT2” (1 type BB-A, B, C operates), the process shifts to “1 type BB-A, B, C”. In addition, when “BB is finished in“ 1 type BB-A, B, C ”(operation of 1 type BB-A, B, C is finished), the process shifts to“ RT1 ”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state”, the BB is won, and when the BB is ended, the RT state shifts to “RT1” which is highly profitable for the player. The state is a state in which no push order navigation occurs, so when “Replay-D1 to D3” is won, the wrong answer push order (the first stop is three choices: left button, middle button, right button, 1 of 3 choices is correct push order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and 2 of 3 choices are incorrect push order and replay 04 is stopped)) By stopping, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is shifted to “RT0”. In addition, when the state related to AT is “high probability state”, “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, BB is won, and when BB ends, RT state Will shift to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to the AT is a state where push navigation occurs, and even when “Regame-D1 to D3” is won, Since it navigates the order of pressing correct answers that are not stopped, “RT1” can be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Note that the AT state transition enable conditions are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference that was won in the “high probability state” is finished, (2) when winning the continuous lottery, and (3) winning the reviving lottery. Satisfies if In the case of Yes in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M in step 1754 triggers the new transition to the “AT precursor state”, and the number of AT initial games (in this example, 50, The number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the “state” is set in the AT counter M60, and the flow proceeds to step 1756. In the case of No in step 1752, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high secure fault games (10 in this example) to the high secure fault counter and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500). Transition. Note that if the answer is No in step 1756 or 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the “high probability state” and moving to “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB is awarded to shift to the “advantageous BB state”, and in the “advantageous BB state”, the AT game When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and shifts from the “advantageous BB state” to the “AT state”. Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 games in the “advantageous BB state” and then shifts to the “AT state”, 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, if an effect is given to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”, at the start of the “AT state”, the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, the initial value is set at the start of the “AT state” without performing the effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is notified that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the “AT state” or the state where the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect may also be considered. By doing this, the player cannot clearly know how many games have been added or how many games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. It is possible to enhance the interest in the extra effect that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754. However, the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial game number is not limited to this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the above-described AT state transition control process in Step 1400. Further, the number of games (AT initial number of games) set in the AT counter M60 is configured to be subtracted from when the game after the BB is finished (the state relating to AT is “AT state”). (No subtraction starts during BB). Further, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized precursor state”, “addition special state” ”,“ Advantageous BB Inside Game ”,“ Advantageous BB State ”, and“ Restorability Produce State ”, there are 10 AT-related states. The state will transition. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special state transition lottery in which the player wins 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the “specialized sign state”. In addition, when 10 games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization sign state”, the transition is made to the “additional special state”. In addition, as a game section, three states relating to ATs of “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, and “normal BB state” are set as “normal section”, “high probability state”, “AT in progress” The states related to the seven ATs of “state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB inside game”, “advantageous BB state”, and “revival effect state” are “advantageous sections” Is set. In other words, even if the states related to the seven ATs that are “advantageous sections” have been transitioned (transitioned), if 1500 games have elapsed without being set as “normal sections”, the “advantageous sections” are forcibly terminated. Set to “Normal section”. Also, when the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, which is a notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed, However, the gaming state is maintained.

  As described above, when the “AT state” is set, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0, and when the continuous lottery is not selected, the “recovery / prohibition effect state” is set. When the revival lottery is won in the “Restorability Produce State”, it is possible to return to the “AT state” again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the “Restorability Produce State”, the state shifts to the “Low Probability State” and changes from “Advantaged Section” to “Normal Section”.

  When the BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won in the “high probability state” and the BB without setting difference is activated and the “advantageous BB state” ends, ”. In addition, when “no setting difference BB” (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won in the “AT state”, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends. Transition to “AT state”. In the “Restorability Prompt State”, when BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won, BB without setting difference is activated, and “Advantageous BB State” ends. Also shifts to the “AT state” (to win the resurrection lottery). In addition, when the BB with the setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won in the “Restorability Producing State”, the BB with the setting difference is activated and the “Advantageous BB State” is finished, the BB with the setting difference is independent. If the winning number related to the BB role (winning number 20) is “low probability state” after the end of the BB (because there is a setting difference BB won't win the revival lottery), there is a setting difference BB is rare If the winning number overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), it becomes “AT state” after the end of the BB (in order to win the revival lottery with a rare role).

  In addition, when it is “advantageous section” and “high probability state”, BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won, BB with setting difference is activated, and “advantageous BB state” ends. Transition to “high probability state”.

  In addition, the state related to the AT that is shifted after the “advantageous BB state” is ended is the state after the end of the BB that has been elected during the AT (“AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “addition special state”). (Both with BB and no setting difference BB) shift to a state related to AT at the time of BB winning among “AT state”, “specialized sign state” or “addition special state” and non-AT state ( After the BB with no setting difference won in the “high probability state”), the state shifts to the “AT state”. In addition, when there is a setting difference that is won during non-AT (“high probability state”) and the BB ends, the state shifts to “high probability state”.

  It should be noted that the state related to the AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or “high probability state”, and the AT lottery. May be configured to shift to the “predictor state” by winning and then to “AT state” after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device may be If the AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “gasse sign state”, and after 16 to 32 games, the state shifts to the “low probability state” or “high probability state” You may comprise so that it may do. In addition, a “standby section” that is different from the “advantage section” and the “normal section” may be provided as a game section. For example, in the case of a game where AT lottery is executed by winning “Cherry”, BB If “BB + Cherry” with a duplicate of cherry and cherries is won, and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until “BB” of “BB + Cherry” wins is set as “standby section”. May be. In this way, by providing a “standby section”, when the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, the BB is won in the “low probability state”, and the AT In the period when the lottery is won and until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Whether or not the player is present can be told to the player. Further, when the BB is elected in the “additional special state”, the “additional special state” may be resumed after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, Execute the AT addition lottery that is different from the BB won in the “AT state” as the BB won in the “specialized state” (for example, win the AT extra lottery over the BB won in the “AT state”) The number of AT games may be increased and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, when the BB is elected in the “specialization sign state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional special state” after the end of the BB. In such a configuration, during the BB, It may be configured such that the AT extra lottery is executed in the same manner as the BB won in the “extra specialization state”.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game. As the game section, a “normal section” that is relatively low in profit for the player and a relatively high section for the player. It has two game sections, “advantageous section” which is a profitable section. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 being zero. In other words, it is determined whether or not the “favorable section” has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (therefore, the AT counter value becomes 0 and the number of staying games in the “specialized sign state”). Things are also 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an “advantageous section” end condition other than when the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. Or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If NO in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the routine proceeds to step 3515. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the “advantageous section” ends and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to AT (number of AT continuing games, number of AT remaining games, etc.) All the information relating to (3) is cleared, so that the conditions for becoming an “advantageous section” again in the subsequent “normal section” are not relaxed. Note that information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating a gaming state, and the like. The information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. However, depending on the clearing of the RAM when the setting is changed, the “condition device related to the continuous accessory actuating device (BB)” or the “RT state” is used. In addition, the information related to “number of stored items” is also cleared, but depending on the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), “condition device related to the continuous accessory operating device (BB)” or “RT state” , Information related to “stored number” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting is different from the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, when the process of step 3515 is executed). In addition, you may comprise so that "condition apparatus which concerns on an accessory continuous action | operation apparatus (BB)" and "RT state" may be hold | maintained by RAM clear at the time of a setting change. The addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the top address to be cleared in the clear process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” ends, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as information indicating that it was an “advantageous section” and how many games the “AT state” was executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of setting change is executed, game history such as information on the “advantageous section” on the side of the sub-control board S and information on how many games “AT state” is executed Will also be deleted.

  When the “favorable section” is ended because the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0, (1) when the current AT state is the “high probability state”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state” in the next game, and (2) the state related to the current AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the state related to the AT in the next game is “ (3) If the current AT state is “Advantageous BB state”, the AT state will be “Normal BB state” in the next game. (4) Current If the AT state is “AT in progress state”, “specialization sign state”, “addition special state” or “restoration effect state”, the AT state in the next game is “low probability” State "(AT For relevant information is cleared).

  Next, in step 3516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game as the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “favorable section” has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned off when the “advantageous section” ends and is set to the “normal section”. However, the detailed turn-off timing is not limited to the timing of this embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal related to a game that becomes the “normal section” after the “advantage section” ends. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 capable of starting the next game is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

  Next, in step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has decided to newly set an “advantageous section” in the next game (decided to set an “advantageous section” from the “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) that is common to all setting values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1293). Even in the case of No in step 3528, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534. However, the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. The timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the “advantageous section” (game in the “regular section”) to the timing when the game medal can be inserted in the game that becomes the “advantageous section” (newly “ If the game before the “advantageous section” is a game related to replaying, it is set as appropriate during the period of time until the operation of the start lever in the new “advantageous section” becomes effective) Also good.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interruption processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of Step 1040 or Step 1104, and thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. To be periodically executed.

  First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of interruption (for example, saving of data held in a register in the CPUC100, input port check of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power-off detection signal, the input acceptance sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of an operation on these operation members and the sensor detection state are sampled at an interrupt interval T). )

  Next, in step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. (For example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously ON over a plurality of samplings, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a process related to the rotation driving control process (control of driving of the reel M50) of all reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). Is executed later). Next, in step 1612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If YES in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the AT remaining game number (AT game number) on the AT counter value display device D 280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1612, the process proceeds to Step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing in step 1612 and step 1613 is not necessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, It is determined whether or not all flags relating to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, and a door switch flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, register Set in the area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command that an error is detected) (for example, Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). The information setting process may not be executed (the step 1618 may not be provided). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from the state where a first error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal retention error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control command). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) A command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) Sent immediately after operation), sent immediately after all reels stop), commands related to stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button as a display symbol stop), winning / replaying Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after the start lever is operated (limited to advantageous sections)), bonus winning Commands related to information (sent immediately after the start lever operation), commands related to the RT state (transmitted after all reels stop until the next game starts), commands related to the state related to AT (Sent from the time all reels stop until the next game is started), high fault counter value command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (all Commands from the time the reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever is operated), commands related to the game section (from when all reels stop until the next game starts Sent between), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the revolving game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, information relating to an error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. The insertion acceptance sensor retention error is when the insertion acceptance sensor detects the retention of a game medal. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LEDs (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among a plurality of 7-segment LED units). Output a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 may not be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as an update process of a random value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has a region where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the interrupt termination process, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the non-recoverable error process described above.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the rotating drum drive control process according to the subroutine of Step 6100 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. In addition, in this process, although the process about one reel is illustrated, it supplements performing the process corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the processing of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If YES in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106.

  Next, in step 6106, the CPU MC of the main control board M starts the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the execution of the reel acceleration process starts. For example, in step 1260 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the reel starts to be rotated by this process. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the process proceeds to step 6112.

  Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M has executed all the interrupt processing for the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, “interrupt execution count” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later). It is determined whether or not (timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintaining process, and proceeds to step 6120. In addition, also when it is No at step 6112 or step 6114, it transfers to step 6120.

  Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel constant speed state. If YES in step 6120, the CPU MC of the main control board M is in the reel constant speed state in step 6122 (after executing the processing in step 6116), and the reel sensor is in correspondence with the reel (processing in this subroutine). It is determined whether an index provided on the reel to be detected is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel, and is used when detecting whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, or the like. Each index is detected by a reel sensor. The reel sensor signal is electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (cuts) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the reel rotation speed has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPU MC of the main control board M has passed a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. Determine whether or not. In the case of No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become a constant speed, and the process proceeds to step 6130. As described above, in this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, thereby making it possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times (configured to be able to rotate 400 steps by the interrupt processing 400 times), and when the reel rotation speed is constant. The time is longer than the time for which the reel makes one revolution (one revolution) (for example, the time for one revolution of the reel is 336 steps and the interrupt processing is executed 336 times). With this configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor at the timing when the reel driving state becomes the constant speed state (the distance from when the reel rotates and the index is detected by the reel sensor) is far apart. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. Configured to be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, in step 6126, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel reacceleration processing, and proceeds to processing in step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. The reel driving state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. Note that if the answer is No in Step 6120, the process moves to Step 6130. Note that the reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above. The reel re-acceleration process and the reel acceleration process are used to interrupt the combination of phases excited by the stepping motor and the interrupt process for each combination of phases to be excited. The number of executions may be different.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of Step 6200 of FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing when the stop button is operated. It is determined whether or not it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration standby state, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the process proceeds to step 6134.

  Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing for starting the reel deceleration processing) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts reel deceleration (reel deceleration processing). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the processing of step 6142. Note that if the answer is No in Step 6134 or Step 6136, the process proceeds to Step 6142.

  Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end the reel deceleration process) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel stop state, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1612). In addition, also when it is No in step 6142 or step 6144, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1612).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. The rotating type gaming machine according to this example starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained (reel) When the driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, but the rotational speed may not actually reach the constant speed). When any one of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed for the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem even if it is not a four-phase stepping motor). Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, the stepping motor can be rotated in the positive direction by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited). In the figure, among the Φ0 to Φ3, the one indicating which phase is to be excited is shown in the “Excited Phase” column (details will be described later).

  Also, as shown in the “reel rotation speed image” in the upper part of the figure, the driving state from the start of rotation of the stepping motor to the stop is divided into six, and the stepping motor is set according to the driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the driving state includes “reel stop state”, “reel rotation start standby state”, “reel acceleration state”, “reel constant speed state”, “reel deceleration standby state”, and “reel deceleration state”. In the “reel rotation speed image”, the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed and the speed increases upward, the horizontal axis is the time and the time passes in the right direction. Yes. In addition, the example shown in the figure illustrates a case in which a rotation failure of the reel does not occur, and this is the case when a rotation failure of the reel occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or causing a step-out. (If a reel rotation failure occurs, it will be described later).

  The “reel stop state” indicates a state where the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the “reel stop state”, the reel is in a stationary state, and all phases of the stepping motor are in phase. Is not excited.

  Next, in the situation of “reel stop state”, the reel drive state is updated to “reel rotation start standby state” based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the figure. . Here, the “reel rotation start standby state” indicates a state of waiting until the acceleration process (reel acceleration process) of the stepping motor is started after the start lever D50 is operated. This standby period is a period until the reel drive state shifts from the “reel stop state” to the “reel acceleration state”. For example, the time from the time when the reel driving state became “reel acceleration state” in the previous game is counted, and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If it is, the “reel rotation start standby state” is entered.

  Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”. Here, the “reel acceleration state” is a state in which the reel is accelerated in order to reach a constant speed from a state where the reel is stationary. In this example, when the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state at the lower left in the figure), the acceleration state ends (reel driving state is “reel constant speed”). Update to "status"). Next, the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed at the timing (3) in the drawing, in other words, at the timing when the “reel acceleration state” is completed by executing another timer interrupt process. At this timing, the reel drive state remains “reel acceleration state”. Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”, and then the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times. The state is updated to “reel constant speed state”. As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel driving state remains in the “reel acceleration state” for one timer interruption process, in other words, the final in the “reel acceleration state”. “Φ3, φ0”, which is a combination of phases to be excited, is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, similar to “reel constant speed state” in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of phases to be excited. (When no reel rotation abnormality has occurred). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration process until the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. In the figure, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is “reel constant speed state” are illustrated. First, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of FIG. Note that “excited phase” is a combination of phases to be excited, and “interrupt execution count” indicates the number of times interrupt processing that is excited by the combination of phases to be excited is executed. In this example, when executing the reel acceleration process, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to be excited for 220 times of the timer interrupt process, and the interrupt process is performed 100 times at (KA) “φ0” → ( KB) Interrupt processing 60 times at “φ0, φ1” → Interrupt processing 30 times at (KC) “φ1” → Interrupt processing 15 times at (KD) “φ1, φ2” → (KE) “φ2 ”Interrupt processing 8 times → (KF)“ φ2, φ3 ”interrupt processing 4 times → (KG)“ φ3 ”interrupt processing 2 times → (KH)“ φ3, φ0 ”interrupt It is configured to excite the step motor (stepping motor) by executing the interrupt process once as in the process (the number of executions of the interrupt process is merely an example and there is no problem even if it is changed). As described above, in this example, at the time of executing the reel acceleration process, the number of times of executing the interrupt process is gradually reduced with a combination of one exciting phase.

  Next, a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of FIG. In this example, when the reel is in the constant speed state (when the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed), interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) “φ0” → (TB) at “φ0, φ1”. Interrupt processing once → (TC) “φ1” interrupt processing once → (TD) “φ1, φ2” interrupt processing once → (TE) “φ2” interrupt processing once → (TF) Interrupt processing once at “φ2, φ3” → Interrupt processing once at (TG) “φ3” → Interrupt processing once at (TH) “φ3, φ0” → (TA) “ Interrupt processing once at “φ0” → (TB) Interrupt processing once at “φ0, φ1” →... (TA) to (TG) are repeatedly executed once every interrupt processing. The step motor (stepping motor) is excited. Thus, in this example, at the time of executing the reel constant speed maintaining process, the number of times of executing the interrupt process with one combination of exciting phases is configured to be one.

  Next, in a situation where the reel driving state is “reel constant speed state”, the stop button corresponding to any of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the figure, and the reel driving state is set to “reel deceleration standby state”. Is updated. Here, the “reel constant speed state” is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is a constant speed (a state in which the combination of phases to be excited is switched for each interrupt process). "" Indicates a state from when the stop button is operated by the player until the stop control is started (in the reel deceleration standby state, a slip of the reel corresponding to the number of slip frames has occurred). . This drive state period is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

  Next, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel deceleration standby state” to the “reel deceleration state”, and the reel deceleration is started. When the reel driving state is updated from the “reel deceleration standby state” to the “reel deceleration state”, a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel. Perform 4-phase excitation to excite all. When excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the “reel deceleration state” to the “reel stop state” at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel is stopped.

  As described above, in the spinning machine according to this example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated again to the reel acceleration state, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. When the reel driving state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed during the reel acceleration process. Whether the reel has been normally accelerated, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether a defective rotation of the reel has occurred) is determined in step 6124 (reel driving state is changed to the reel constant speed state). (It is determined after a predetermined time has elapsed since the update). However, in the process of step 6124, the reel sensor does not detect the index, so the reel is not at a constant speed (reel rotation failure is detected). If it is determined that the reel has occurred), the reel re-acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. As described above, the reel acceleration process is performed so that it is not determined whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally performed. Even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the reel acceleration process, If the reel rotation speed has reached the constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation processing is completed and the reel rotation processing is completed, the reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. When the reel sensor detects the index until a predetermined time elapses after the update, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed without executing the reacceleration process. By executing the reel reacceleration process, the player However, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to proceed with the game (cannot operate the stop button). In addition, during the execution of the reel acceleration process, by configuring so as not to execute the process for determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally executed, the amount of data required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. In addition, since it is comprised in this way, when a reel rotation defect generate | occur | produces in the middle of the reel type game machine which concerns on this example performing the reel acceleration process, it acts as follows. It becomes.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel acceleration process is finished → Reel drive state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance process is executed → Reel constant A reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintaining process → reel rotation failure detection → reel reacceleration process is executed.
Reel rotation failure refers to the acceleration of the reel due to the rotation of the reel being hindered by a member provided in the vicinity of the reel such as the reel window D160 (reel rubbing against the reel window D160), the occurrence of a step-out, etc. Refers to the case where is not executed normally. As described above, even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration process → Reel acceleration process is continuously executed → Reel acceleration process is completed → Update the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintenance process → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel reacceleration process. As described above, even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel re-acceleration process is executed when the reel rotation failure is detected thereafter, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Will be able to. In addition, as described above, even if a rotating rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the same interruption as in the case where the rotating reel rotation process is continued and the rotating rotation failure does not occur When the reel acceleration process is executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated. With this configuration, the reel rotation speed can easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration process when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of the reel acceleration process. it can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration process is executed → Release acceleration process is executed during power off → Return from power off → Reel acceleration process continues (unprocessed) Reel acceleration process is executed) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration process → Reel acceleration process is continued (unprocessed reel acceleration process is executed) → Reel acceleration process is finished → Reel driving state Is updated to the reel constant speed state → the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed → the reel rotation failure is detected → the reel reacceleration process is executed. In this way, even if the power is cut off during the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. If the reel sensor does not detect the index, the reel reacceleration process is executed, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Also, if the power interruption occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is executed continuously after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is updated within a predetermined time after the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel re-acceleration process when the index is detected, and this configuration prevents the player from proceeding with the reel re-acceleration process (the stop button cannot be operated). It can be made difficult to occur.

<< Action after final stop button operation >>
In the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example, after the operation of the final stop button (third stop button), the final reel (which is a reel that has been rotated to the end, also referred to as the third reel) is stopped, and the winning combination The game medal payout can be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. However, the operation relating to the game medal payout may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Updates reel drive state to constant speed → Performs constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts stop button → First stop as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Operate the third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (third stop button → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Power failure occurs → The third reel moves (rotates) to the stop display position → Detects power failure → Executes power failure processing → Power recovery → Reel In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be configured to perform the processing related to the stop display → game medal payout as described above. With this configuration, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted in a game that is won by a small role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button such as the common bell described above. Even if a power failure occurs due to a power failure at a game arcade immediately after that, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding frames is maximum), The movement (rotation) to the planned stop position can be completed. In addition, when the symbol combination (for example, common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the game medals can be paid out normally, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button → Stop first as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Operate the third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (third stop button → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Wins the reels as seen from the player Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 (the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is correct). For example, in the game in which the bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role that is the winning role is not displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the game) → The processing relating to the game medal payout is performed as described above You may comprise so that it may do. With this configuration, even when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped on the reel as viewed from the player, In the internal processing of the gaming machine, winning the winning combination and accepting the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medal can be paid out and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example, and the reel rotation failure occurs during the period from when the second reel is stopped and displayed until the processing related to the game medal payout is executed. All the cases where the reel corresponding to the 3 stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position can be applied (can also be applied to the action related to the reel rotation failure exemplified below). Note that, in the above-described action 2, the action in the game won for the winning combination is illustrated. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (the same operation is performed when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur in other operations). Is good).
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button → Stop first as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Operate the third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (third stop button → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player In step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. → Processing for paying out game medals is executed. It may be a winning combination (for example, a common bell) that can be won regardless of the stop button operation timing in the played game, and may or may not win according to the stop button operation timing in the winning game. It is good also as a combination (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry). In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power interruption does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( In a case where a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as an effect of blinking (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined gaming state is set. Even if a reel rotation failure occurs in the game won for the predetermined winning combination and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. You may comprise so that a lamp production may be performed. In this operation, the reel corresponding to the third stop has been illustrated as being unable to stop at the planned stop position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to defective reel rotation. It may be applied when the reel cannot be stopped at the position, or may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position due to the reel rotation failure (the same applies to other actions). Applicable).

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Perform constant speed state maintenance process → Accept stop button → Stop first as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button)-> update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state-> detect power-off-> execute power-off processing-> third reel is player The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. (In this case, it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the bell that wins the reel as viewed from the player) Although the symbol combination corresponding to the role did not stop display, the stop control for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role was normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. Case) → Execute processing relating to payout of game medals. It may be configured to operate as described above. It should be noted that the timing for detecting the power interruption, the timing for stopping the power supply to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the timing for determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing in step 1269, and the timing for returning the power supply However, the timing is not limited to the above timing, and the timing for detecting power-off and the power to the gaming machine when the power-off occurs during the period from when the second reel is stopped and displayed until the processing related to the game medal payout is executed. The timing corresponding to the third stop button when the power is cut off is sufficient as long as there is a timing for stopping the supply of power, a timing for determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing in step 1269, and a timing for returning to power. Can be applied to all cases where the vehicle could not stop at the planned stop position The way is). With this configuration, a power interruption occurred immediately before (or immediately after) the stop operation of the third stop button was received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination could not be stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. In this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing at which the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medals are paid out after the power is restored (the hopper drive is used for the game medals to be paid out). In addition to paying out from the discharge outlet by the player, it is possible to execute display of the credit number display device (including the increase in the number of credits). Can benefit constitutes such that less likely to occur. Note that the timing at which the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power interruption may be referred to as the timing at which the power interruption occurs. In addition, in a game where a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, when the reel rotation failure or power interruption does not occur and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is stopped and displayed, the reel backlight ( When the back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is executed as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp) (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined game state is set. The back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination even when the power is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped in the game winning the predetermined winning combination. You may comprise so that a production may be performed. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is stopped due to the power interruption. This may be applied to the case where the reels corresponding to the second stop cannot be stopped at the planned stop position due to the power-off (other operations can be applied in the same manner). Is).

<Action 4>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second reel is stopped as the second reel is operated → The second reel is stopped → The third reel is stopped (the third stop button is operated) → Reel driving state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player → The reel is awarded a winning position when viewed from the player Although the corresponding symbol combination is stopped, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process in step 1269 (reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normal). For example, in a game that is lost, a symbol combination corresponding to the loss is not displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but a game corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button (When stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the internal processing) → The game medal payout may not be executed. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels will receive a winning combination as seen from the player Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the game medal The game machine can be configured so as not to be executed, and can be a fair game machine. It can be a machine. The above action 4 is not limited to losing only. For example, in a game that is not won by the bell (a game that is won by the re-playing player, a game that is won by the watermelon, etc.) It is supplemented that the present invention can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the symbol combination that is displayed in a stopped state as viewed from the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to a rotation failure. Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The 1st reel is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → The 2nd reel is stopped → The power is cut off and the supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button) → Reel driving state is updated to a reel deceleration state → Power-off is detected → Power-off processing is executed → The third reel is received from the player Cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 Judgment (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been normally completed. For example, in a game that is lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. Although there was no normal stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → power return → game medal payout You may comprise so that it may act as mentioned above which is not performed. By configuring in this way, in a game that has been lost as a result of the role lottery, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reels are awarded a winning combination as viewed from the player Even when the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the game medal The game machine can be configured not to execute the payout of the game machine, can be a fair game machine, and does not cause an unintended disadvantage in the game hall It can be. Note that the above action 5 is not limited only to lose, but for example, in a game that is not won by the bell (a game that is won by the re-playing role, a game that is won by the watermelon, etc.) It is supplemented that the present invention can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the symbol combination that is displayed in a stopped state as viewed from the player is a symbol combination that is not consistent with the internal lottery result due to a rotation failure. Since the symbol combination is determined to be normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Operation 6>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped. → The second reel is operated as the second reel. → The second reel is stopped. → The third reel is operated as the third reel. → Reel driving state is updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player → Bonus combination to the reel when viewed from the player ( For example, although the symbol combination corresponding to BB role is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing in step 1269 (reset based on the operation of the stop button). For example, a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination on the reel when viewed from the player in a game that has not been won for the bonus combination and has been lost. Is stopped, but when the stop control is normally executed to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → the bonus does not start, In addition, it may be configured to operate as described above in which the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the bonus combination as seen from the player. Even if the symbol combination to be stopped is displayed, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is supported at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, the bonus is not received even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It can be configured not to start, it can be a fair game machine, and it does not cause unintended disadvantages in the playground It can be a machine. Note that the above action 6 is not limited to losing only, for example, a game in which a bonus combination is not won (not in the bonus) and a bonus combination is not won (a re-playing combination is won). It is supplemented that in a game, a game selected as a watermelon, etc., it can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Note that the above action 6 illustrates an action in a game that was not won as a bonus combination. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (applicable when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the reel as seen from the player. In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. The operation is such that the bonus is not started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, in the case where the reel rotation failure has not occurred in the game won in the bonus combination or inside the bonus, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the planned stop position when viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player. It can be exemplified that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus has been illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (the type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. Depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won, whether or not the freeze is performed may be varied.

<Operation 7>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The 1st reel is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → The 2nd reel is stopped → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power-off is detected → power-off processing is executed → the third reel is received from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is not displayed in the determination process in step 1269. The match is determined to be normal (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been normally completed. For example, in a game where the bonus combination is not won and the game is lost. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player. When the control is executed normally) → Power return → Bonus is not started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel plays a bonus role as seen from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed, Can be configured not to start medal bonus, can be a fair gaming machine, and cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall It was not can be a game machine. Note that the above action 6 is not limited to losing only, for example, a game in which a bonus combination is not won (not in the bonus) and a bonus combination is not won (a re-playing combination is won). It is supplemented that in a game, a game selected as a watermelon, etc., it can also be applied when a reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Note that the above action 6 illustrates an action in a game that was not won as a bonus combination. That is, when the power interruption does not occur, the following operation is performed (applicable when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the reel as seen from the player. In the determination process, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal. The operation is such that the bonus is not started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, when the reel power supply is not cut off in the game won in the bonus combination or inside the bonus, the following effects are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the planned stop position when viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player. It can be exemplified that the symbol combination is determined to be normal → the bonus is started and the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus has been illustrated, but depending on the type of bonus (the type of bonus combination), there may be a bonus where the freeze is executed and a bonus where the freeze is not executed. Depending on the gaming state in which the bonus combination is won, whether or not the freeze is performed may be varied.

<Action 8>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game won for the bonus combination → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves (rotates) to the planned stop position as seen by the player Cannot → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player. Align starts determination → bonus to be normal, and may be configured to act as described above to freeze Bonus start is executed. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus is won or a game won in a bonus role, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving a stop operation of the third stop button, Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as viewed from the player, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) can be displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. Can also be configured to start a bonus and perform a freeze that is performed at the start of the bonus. It can be configured so as not to cause a significant disadvantage for the player that the bonus will not be started due to the reel rotation failure in the situation to be done, and the bonus is the same as when the reel rotation failure did not occur By performing the freeze at the start, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable.

<Action 9>
Reel rotation starts as a game executed inside the bonus or as a game won for the bonus combination → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → Operating the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operating the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → The second reel stop display → Power failure occurs and the game Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power failure is detected → Power failure Execute time processing-> The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player-> The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) stops on the reel as viewed from the player Although not shown, in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, the power is restored, the bonus is started, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is performed as described above. Good. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where the bonus is won or a game won in the bonus combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. Each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the reel as viewed from the player When the stop button operation corresponding to the bonus combination is received and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed. However, you can configure the bonus to start and the freeze that is executed when the bonus starts, and the bonus starts It can be configured so as not to cause a significant disadvantage for the player that the bonus will not be started due to power interruption in the situation that should be done, and at the start of the bonus as well as when the reel rotation failure does not occur By executing the freeze, the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable.

<Operation 10>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped. → The second reel is operated as the second reel. → The second reel is stopped. → The third reel is operated as the third reel. (Receiving operation) → Reel reel drive state updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurred → 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Replay to the reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, but it is determined in step 1269 that the symbol combination is normal (reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button is normal). For example, in a game that has been lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-playing role is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player, but the game corresponding to the operation of the player's stop button When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the internal processing) → The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the re-gamer is not performed, and the re-play lamp D290 is newly added. You may comprise so that it may act as mentioned above which does not light. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a re-playing role as viewed from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped, it is lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the corresponding stop button operation is accepted and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is executed normally, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed An automatic bet is not made and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer whose RT state is to be shifted when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and viewed from the player, the gaming machine The combination of symbols that correspond to a loss is received by the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed by internal processing. When the stop control for displaying the stop is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination to which the RT state other than the re-game combination will be displayed is stopped. The same applies to the case). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall. Note that the above action 10 is not limited to losing only, and is applied to, for example, a case where a reel combination failure occurs and a symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed in a game that is not won as a re-gamer. I will add that I can do it. That is, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operation is performed (applicable when rotation failure and power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player. It is determined that the combination is normal. The automatic bet is not performed and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit.
Note that the automatic bet is a bet button (max bet button) when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game medals bet in the game won for the re-playing role is stopped and displayed by the re-playing role. Even if there is no operation and no game medal is inserted from the medal slot, the bet is automatically made.
On the other hand, when the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game won as the re-gamer, the following effects are obtained.
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. In this case, the symbol combination is determined to be normal. → An automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay player is elected in the previous game, the replay is replayed. Lamp D290 will continue to light up)
The following actions can be illustrated.

<Operation 11>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The 1st reel is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated as the 2nd reel stop operation → The 2nd reel is stopped → The power supply is cut off and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → 3rd reel The third stop button is operated as a stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button) → the reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → power-off is detected → power-off processing is executed → the third reel is received from the player It is impossible to move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (If it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been normally completed, for example, in a game that has been lost, the reel has a symbol combination corresponding to the re-playing role as viewed from the player. Stopped display, but when the stop control is normally executed to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the loss by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button of the player) → power return → re-game The automatic bet corresponding to the stop display is not performed, and the replay lamp D290 may be configured to operate as described above so that it is not newly lit. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is lost, immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, the power-off process is executed, and the player is replayed on the reel as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be lost at the internal processing of the gaming machine, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the loss is successfully executed, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed. However, the automatic bet is not made, and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. In addition, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer whose RT state is to be shifted when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is stopped and viewed from the player, the gaming machine The combination of symbols that correspond to a loss is received by the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed by internal processing. When the stop control for displaying the stop is executed normally, the RT state will not shift (the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination to which the RT state other than the re-game combination will be displayed is stopped. The same applies to the case). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game hall. Note that the above action 11 is not limited to losing only. For example, in a game that has not been won as a re-playing role, it is applied when a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-playing role is stopped and displayed. I will supplement what I can do. That is, when the power interruption does not occur, the following operation is performed (applicable when the rotation failure and the power interruption do not occur in other operations).
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the scheduled stop position when viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed on the reel when viewed from the player. It is determined that the combination is normal. The automatic bet is not performed and the replay lamp D290 is not newly lit. On the other hand, when the power is not cut off in the game won as the re-gamer, the following operation is performed.
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintaining process is executed → Stop button reception is enabled → First reel stop button is operated as first reel stop operation → First reel → Stop display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel The driving state is updated to the reel deceleration state. The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed on the reel as seen from the player. In this case, the symbol combination is determined to be normal. → An automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit (if the replay player is elected in the previous game, the replay is replayed. Lamp D290 will continue to light up)
The following actions can be illustrated.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game selected for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First stop as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Operate the third stop button as the stop operation of the third reel (third stop button → Reel driving state updated to reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurred → Third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Replayed to the reel as seen from the player The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process in step 1269. It is, and replay lamp D290 may be configured to act as described above to be newly turned. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is replaying, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replaying role is played on the reel as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped, each reel (the left reel) is selected at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed. , Middle reel, right reel) are accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is executed normally, it corresponds to the re-game player Even if the combination of symbols to be stopped is not displayed, automatic betting is performed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player can be obtained, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer can be stopped and displayed, so that replaying can be performed even when the reel is viewed. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been made, it is possible to make it difficult to misrecognize the game situation by visually confirming whether or not automatic betting has been performed and lighting of the re-playing lamp D290. In addition, in the action 12, when the re-game player whose RT state will shift when the stop display is performed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player is stopped and displayed. Even if not, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

<Operation 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game selected for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First stop as first reel stop operation Operate the button → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button)-> update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state-> detect power-off-> execute power-off processing-> third reel is player Cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position from the viewpoint of the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing of step 1269. There a decision → power supply recovery → automatic bet corresponding to the stop display of the replay combination has been made, and replay lamp D290 may be configured to act as described above to light anew. By configuring in this way, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is replaying, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the game is replayed on the reel as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not stopped, each reel (left) is selected at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-playing combination can be stopped and displayed. (Reel, middle reel, right reel) are accepted, and if the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is executed normally, Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped, an automatic bet is placed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player can be obtained, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer can be stopped and displayed, so that replaying can be performed even when the reel is viewed. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not a winning combination has been made, it is possible to make it difficult to misrecognize the game situation by visually confirming whether or not automatic betting has been performed and lighting of the re-playing lamp D290. Also, in the action 13, when the re-game player whose RT state is to be shifted when the stop display is performed in the current RT state, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player is stopped and displayed. Even if not, the RT state shifts. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause problems in the progress of the game, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

<Operation 14>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game for a role that RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as RT transition combination) → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance Enabled → Operate the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → The third reel Operate the third stop button as a stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure → The third reel moves to the planned stop position as seen from the player (Rotation) is not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped from the viewpoint of the player, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination processing in step 1269 → R State transitions may be configured to act as described above. With this configuration, in the game won for the RT transition combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination on the reel as viewed from the player. Even if the combination is not stopped, each reel (left reel, middle reel) is selected at the timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed in the internal processing of the gaming machine. If the stop control for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is executed normally, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is received. Even if is not stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts. By configuring in this way, it can be a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has. Administrators can also operate gaming machines with peace of mind. The RT transition combination is a combination in which a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed in a predetermined RT state to shift to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state. It can be different whether or not. That is, in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition combination, but in RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be an RT transition combination. In RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition combination. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won.

<Operation 15>
Reel rotation starts as a winning game for a role that RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as RT transition combination) → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance Enabled → Operate the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as the stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → Power failure occurs As a result, the power supply to the gaming machine stops. The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted). The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → Execute processing when power is cut off → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role as seen from the player is not stopped, but step 1 Symbol combination in determination processing 69 and the determination → RT state transitions is normal (to RT conditions may shift after power restoration, may shift the RT state before power restoration)
You may comprise so that it may act as mentioned above. With this configuration, in the game won for the RT transition combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination is not stopped, each reel (left reel, middle) is selected at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed in the internal processing of the gaming machine. When the stop button corresponding to the RT transition combination is received and the stop control for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the RT transition combination is executed normally, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is received. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT state shifts. By configuring in this way, it can be a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and the game can be advanced along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has. Administrators can also operate gaming machines with peace of mind.

<Operation 16>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not been won for the role that the RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as the RT transition combination) → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is performed → Stop button Acceptance becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped display → Third Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → occurrence of reel rotation failure → the third reel is scheduled to stop when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination as viewed from the player is stopped and displayed, but it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. It may be configured to act as described above for RT state is not migrated. With this configuration, in a game that has not won the RT transition combination, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, so that the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination as viewed from the player. Even when the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed in order to prevent the player from shifting to the disadvantageous RT state in the AT state, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, the RT state does not shift even if a symbol combination that is shifted (falls down) due to a reel rotation failure is visually stopped, and the RT state does not shift, which is not intended for the player. It is possible to make a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, so that the manager of the game hall can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Operation 17>
Reel rotation starts as a game that has not been won for the role that the RT state transitions (sometimes referred to as the RT transition combination) → The reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → The constant speed state maintenance process is performed → Stop button Acceptance becomes valid → The first stop button is operated as the first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is stopped display → Power is cut off Occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted). → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state. → Execute the process when the power is cut off → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the scheduled stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is stopped and displayed from the player, Step In the determination process in 1269 may be configured to act as the symbol combination is that no shift determination → RT state to be normal. With this configuration, in a game that is not won for the RT transition combination, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes the RT transition combination as viewed from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when a push order navigation is executed in order to prevent the player from shifting to the disadvantageous RT state in the AT state, the player operates the stop button according to the push order navigation. Nevertheless, the RT state does not shift even if a symbol combination that is shifted (falls down) due to a reel rotation failure is visually stopped, and the RT state does not shift, which is not intended for the player. It is possible to make a gaming machine that does not generate profits, and to advance the game along the transition of the gaming state that the gaming machine originally has, so that the manager of the game hall can operate the gaming machine with peace of mind.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the effective line in the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user.
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → Reel rotation failure occurs → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Game The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user (if the second reel has moved to the planned stop position, the first reel and the second reel The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line in a stopped manner) → Temperature sound may be output from the speaker. In addition, as an effect when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the active line in the second reel is stopped and displayed.
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the effective line in the second reel. → Tempai sound may not be output from the speaker.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop. When the bonus symbol is tempered, the bonus symbol is not output when the bonus symbol is scheduled not to be tempered even when the bonus symbol is tempered. Thus, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second symbol combination. If the bonus symbol did not stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, if the bonus symbol was scheduled to temper if it stopped at the planned stop position in this example, a tempering sound was output Thus, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker.

<Operation 19>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel stops display → Power supply stops and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operates the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detects power cut → Process when power is cut off Execution-> The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player-> The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line of the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player-> Power Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel stops display → Power supply stops and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operates the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detects power cut → Process when power is cut off Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active lines of the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the player. When the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line of the first reel and the second reel in a stopped manner) → Power recovery → Speaker May be configured to act as described above to Luo Tenpai sound is output. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the active line in the second reel is stopped and displayed.
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the effective line in the second reel. → Tempai sound may not be output from the speaker. Note that the timing of outputting the tempering sound from the speaker may be before the end of execution of the power-off process, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first symbol combination. Stopped as stop and second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered when it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a tempered sound is output Thus, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred due to the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the lottery is lost, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second symbol combination. If the bonus symbol does not stop as a stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol does not temper, if the bonus symbol is scheduled to temper if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a tempering sound is output. Thus, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly detect that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop has not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop has not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is executed). It may be the case that a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after.

<Operation 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The reel rotation failure occurs. The second reel is viewed from the player until the stop position is reached. Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the active line on the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player is stopped. → The bonus confirmation tempo sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won the bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Enables the first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The reel rotation failure occurs. The second reel is viewed from the player until the stop position is reached. Cannot move (rotate) → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop display on the active line on the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player (if the second reel moves to the planned stop position, The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line of the reel 1 and the reel 2). It may be configured to act as described above. In addition, as an effect when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won the bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Enables the first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the player. The combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the active line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user. A bonus confirmation tempo sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active lines of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user. The bonus confirmation tempo sound may not be output from the speaker. Note that the bonus confirmation tempo sound is a tempo that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the active line (tempered) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the result of the lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol constituting the bonus symbol When the combination stops as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled for tempering when it stops at the planned stop position in this example The bonus confirmation tempo sound is not output, and even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a reel rotation failure, the player quickly detects that the reel rotation failure has occurred due to the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a bonus combination or a game executed inside the bonus, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting a stop operation of the second stop button, and a bonus symbol is formed. The symbol combination to be stopped did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbol did not temper, the bonus symbol will be tempered if it stops at the planned stop position in this example If this is the case, a bonus confirmation tempo sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player will cause reel rotation failure due to the output from the speaker. It can be detected quickly. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop has not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop has not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is executed). It may be the case that a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after.

<Operation 21>
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel stops display → Power supply stops and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operates the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detects power cut → Process when power is cut off Execution-> The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player-> The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line of the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player-> Power Return → Tempai sound is not output from the speaker
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel stops display → Power supply stops and the power supply to the gaming machine stops → Operates the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Detects power cut → Process when power is cut off Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player. → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active lines of the first reel and the second reel when viewed from the player. When the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line of the first reel and the second reel in a stopped manner) → Power recovery → Speaker May be configured to act as described above to Luo Tenpai sound is output. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the active line in the second reel is stopped and displayed.
Reel rotation starts as lost game → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Reception of stop button is valid → First stop button as first reel stop operation → The first reel is stopped display → The second stop button is operated as the second reel stop operation → The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The first reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped on the effective line in the second reel. → Tempai sound may not be output from the speaker. Note that the timing of outputting the tempering sound from the speaker may be before the end of execution of the power-off process, or after the power is restored after the power-off occurs.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the role lottery is lost, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first symbol combination. Stopped as stop and second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, if the bonus symbol is not scheduled to be tempered when it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a tempered sound is output Even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power interruption, the player can quickly detect that the abnormality has occurred on the reel due to the occurrence of the power interruption by the output from the speaker. Can do. Similarly, in the game in which the result of the lottery is lost, immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is accepted, the power interruption occurs, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbol is the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbol does not temper, if the bonus symbol is scheduled to temper if it stops at the planned stop position in this example, a temper sound is output. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power interruption, the player can quickly detect that an abnormality has occurred on the reel due to the occurrence of power interruption by the output from the speaker. it can. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop has not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop has not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is executed). It may be the case where the power-off process is executed immediately after.

<Operation 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First reel Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Power supply is interrupted and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Power off Detection → Execute processing when power is cut off → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player Symbol combination is not displayed → Bonus confirmation template sound is not output from the speaker
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won the bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Enables the first reel Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Power supply is interrupted and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Power off Detection → Execute processing when power is cut off → The second reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → Corresponds to the bonus combination on the effective line on the first reel and the second reel as seen from the player The symbol combination does not stop display (when the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination stops on the effective line of the first reel and the second reel. Shimesuru) → may be configured to act as described above bonus determined Tenpai sound is output from the speaker. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game that is inside the bonus or won the bonus → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Enables the first reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the player. The combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the active line of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user. A bonus confirmation tempo sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not inside the bonus and is lost → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is valid → First reel The first stop button is operated as a stop operation. The first reel is stopped. The second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel. The second reel is moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as viewed from the player. The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the active lines of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the user. The bonus confirmation tempo sound may not be output from the speaker. Note that the bonus confirmation tempo sound is a tempo that can be output from the speaker when the symbols constituting the predetermined bonus symbol are stopped and displayed on the active line (tempered) and the predetermined bonus symbol can be stopped and displayed. It is a sound.
By configuring in this way, in a game where the result of the lottery is lost and the bonus is not inside, the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is configured. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol is tempered, if the bonus symbol is not tempered when stopped at the planned stop position in this example, Will not output the bonus confirmation tempering sound, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power interruption, the player will have an abnormality on the reel due to power interruption due to the output from the speaker Can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the role lottery becomes a bonus role or a game executed during the bonus, a power-off process occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus symbol is displayed. The combination of symbols that were configured did not stop as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even when the bonus symbol was not tempered, the bonus symbol was tempered when stopped at the planned stop position in this example. If it is scheduled, a bonus confirmation tempering sound will be output, and even if the apparent stop position on the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of a power interruption, the player will be abnormal due to the power interruption due to the power interruption Can be detected quickly. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop has not stopped at the planned stop position is illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop has not stopped at the planned stop position (the first stop operation is executed). It may be the case where the power-off process is executed immediately after.

<Operation 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel starts as a game won by a predetermined re-playing player → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is performed → Stop button acceptance is valid → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves (rotates) to the planned stop position as seen by the player Cannot → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-playing role does not stop display → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game that has 1 or more credits and is not elected as a re-gamer → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel moves (rotates) to the planned stop position as seen by the player Not possible → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-playing combination may be configured to operate as described above in which the stop display → the Max bet lamp is lit. In addition, as an effect when reel rotation failure does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel starts as a game won by a predetermined re-playing player → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is performed → Stop button acceptance is valid → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game that has 1 or more credits and is not elected as a re-gamer → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. The maximum bet lamp may be lit.
With this configuration, in a game won for replay, when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to replay is not stopped and displayed. However, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the max bet lamp is not turned on, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is not effective. In addition, in a game that is not won for replay, if a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed. As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped, the maximum bet lamp is lit, so that the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the maximum bet button is effective.

<Operation 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel starts as a game won by a predetermined re-playing player → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is performed → Stop button acceptance is valid → Operating the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operating the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → The second reel stop display → Power failure occurs and the game Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power failure is detected → Power failure Execute time processing → The 3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the planned stop position when viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gamer does not stop display → Max bet lamp does not light It was,
Reel rotation starts as a game that has 1 or more credits and is not elected as a re-gamer → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Operating the first stop button as the first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operating the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → The second reel stop display → Power failure occurs and the game Power supply to the machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated as the third reel stop operation (the operation of the third stop button is accepted) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power failure is detected → Power failure Execute time processing → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined re-gamer is stopped display → The Max bet lamp is lit above It may be configured to act on. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reel starts as a game won by a predetermined re-playing player → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is performed → Stop button acceptance is valid → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is stopped → Max bet lamp does not light
Reel rotation starts as a game that has 1 or more credits and is not elected as a re-gamer → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Performs a constant speed state maintenance process → Accepts a stop button → Operate the first stop button as a first reel stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operate the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Stop display of the second reel → As a stop operation of the third reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed. The maximum bet lamp may be lit.
By configuring in this way, in a game won for re-game, when the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed In addition, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is not effective by not lighting the max bet lamp. Also, in a game that has not been won for replaying, if the power off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to replaying is stopped and displayed, As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game is not stopped and displayed, the player can quickly recognize that the operation of the max bet button is effective by turning on the max bet lamp.

<Operation 25>
As a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is awarded to the player, the game will satisfy the bonus termination condition. Rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → First reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped Display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel driving state → Reel decelerates → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped Do not show → bonus is completed, may be configured to act as described above that bonus at the end of the freeze is executed. In addition, as an effect when reel rotation failure does not occur,
As a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is awarded to the player, the game will satisfy the bonus termination condition. Rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → First reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped Display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel driving state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped display → The bonus ends, It may be configured to act as described above to scan end freeze is performed.
With this configuration, a winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving a stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop display. In the event that the bonus combination ends and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the player can promptly confirm that the bonus has ended normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be sensed and does not give a sense of incongruity to the progress of the game.

<Operation 26>
As a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is awarded to the player, the game will satisfy the bonus termination condition. Rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to a constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Acceptance of a stop button is enabled → First stop button is operated as a first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped Display → Operation of the second stop button as the second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Power supply is cut off and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Third reel stop operation as the third reel stop operation (Receiving the operation of the 3rd stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power-off → Execute the process at power-off → Move the 3rd reel to the planned stop position as seen from the player Rotation) can not → symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed → bonus is completed, may be configured to act as described above to the end of the bonus freezes is executed. In addition, as an action when the power cut does not occur,
As a game in which a bonus is being executed and a winning combination has been won, and a game medal corresponding to the winning combination of the winning combination is awarded to the player, the game will satisfy the bonus termination condition. Rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance process is executed → Stop button acceptance is enabled → First reel stop operation as first reel stop operation → First reel is stopped Display → Operate second stop button as second reel stop operation → Second reel stop display → Operate third stop button as third reel stop operation (accept operation of third stop button) → Reel driving state Is updated to the reel deceleration state → The third reel moves (rotates) to the planned stop position as seen from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped display → The bonus ends, It may be configured to act as described above to scan end freeze is performed.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, the power-off process is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in a stopped manner. Even if not, the bonus is completed and the freezing at the end of the bonus is executed, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, so that the player can confirm that the bonus has been completed normally. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be detected quickly and does not give a sense of incongruity to the progress of the game.

In addition, from the configuration relating to the reel acceleration processing in the above-described spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to this example,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = A
Reel acceleration process execution period until a rotation failure occurs when a rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = B
Reel acceleration process execution period after occurrence of rotation failure when the rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = C
If
A = B + C
It is comprised so that.
Also,
Number of executions of interrupt processing for reel acceleration processing when no rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = D
Number of executions of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing until rotation failure occurs when rotation rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = E
Number of executions of interrupt processing of reel acceleration processing after occurrence of rotation failure of reel when rotation rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = F
If
D = E + F
It is comprised so that.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off process completed flag (for example, updates the power-off process completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the immediately preceding address of the checksum area, and information for error detection based on the calculated checksum (for example, the calculation) In the checksum area, the lower 1 byte in the checksum or the complement thereof) is set. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information relating to the push order. In this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility. For example, the instruction number when notifying “middle → right → left” as the pressing order indicates “A5”. Next, on the left side of the figure, when the push order is “left → middle → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A1”), the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display device YH, and the effect display device S40. An image displayed on the screen is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display method, and also serves as a payout number display device. When the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, it is determined whether the display on the push order display device D270 is the number of medals to be paid out. It becomes difficult to determine whether the navigation display is displayed. For this reason, the push order display device D270 displays “=” in the left digit as “= 1” so as to distinguish between the number of medals paid out and the push order navigation display. By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit value, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out. As the display of the push order display device D270, the left side is “=” and the right side is a number. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that it is a push order navigation display, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Furthermore, in the advantageous section indicator YH provided at the lower right portion of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the “favorable section” is lit. At the same time, a display of “40 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” (or “AT state”) is displayed on the effect display device S40. Also, the right side of the figure illustrates an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A3”). Yes. In addition, since the current game section is an “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit and a display of “25 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that a combination with a pushing order (a condition device with a medal payout out of condition devices that are displayed differently depending on a reel stopping order, for example, a bell), and a re-playing combination with a pushing order (depending on the reel stopping order) The condition display of the instruction number of the condition device having a different combination of stopped display may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. For example, an instruction may be made by turning on a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number using an LED display. In addition, it is good also as a structure provided with the advantageous area display YH in the lower right part of the credit amount display apparatus D200. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, the player confirms whether or not there are any medals by visually checking the credit number display device D200. If there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that can be prevented from accidentally quitting a game even though it is an “advantageous section” from the next game by lighting until the settlement button D60 becomes valid. be able to.

  In addition, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and the same section display as the advantageous section display YH is provided on the lower right of both of the two seven segments (the section display is provided with the section display). It is also possible to have a configuration with two). In such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, the fact that the current game section is “normal section” is notified, while the right section When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Furthermore, “normal section” and “advantageous section” are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, “green” in “normal section” and “red” in “advantageous section”). Or “lighting in the“ normal section ”and“ flashing ”in the“ favorable section ”). Furthermore, the display mode of the section indicator is changed according to “in-AT BB internal game”, “AT-in-BB state”, “AT precursor state”, “AT-in-state”, etc. in the “advantageous section”. May be. Furthermore, it may be configured to recognize that the current game section is the “standby section” separately from the “normal section” and the “advantage section”. However, the distinction between “normal section” and “advantageous section” is made easy to distinguish, for example, by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether the current game section is “advantageous section” or not. It is preferable to make it easy.

  Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section”, for example, in the “AT precursor state” or “AT in preparation”, the remaining number of games in the “advantageous section” is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted (a disadvantage to the player that the remaining number of games in the “advantageous section” is subtracted in a relatively low profit state for the player is not notified). However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the section indicator is lit to notify the player that the “advantageous section” is in progress. At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section indicator is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57, a control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described.

<Sub program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, and checksum calculation.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, in the determination process of step 2008, if it is determined that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one command process described later. It is determined whether or not it is a state that has returned from a state in which a power interruption has occurred, that is, whether or not it has completely recovered.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that the recovery is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits an interrupt and is executed when a power interruption occurs. Return processing to one command processing.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the above-described determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. It should be noted that after the processing of step 2014 is executed, or in the case of No in step 2010, the processing is shifted to the sub main loop processing.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one command processing which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed. If it is determined that it has not elapsed, the process returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If YES in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of instantaneous interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer, and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one command processing called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the start lever operation effect related determination process described later. To do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a start lever operation process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop reception timing. . In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the third reel stop reception timing. . In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls a subroutine for the third related to the cylinder stop effect-related determination process described later. And execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a third cylinder stop acceptance process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop reception timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stop display symbol time process (not shown). Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately moves to step 7100.

  Next, in step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a menu screen display control process to be described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a standby screen display control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation effect related determination process called and executed in the process of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the high-secure fault counter value command received from the main control board M side, How many games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of battle effect execution availability determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is determined that a battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the state relating to the AT of the game, the state relating to the AT of the next game, and the current number of highly secured games. Based on the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), a stay stage shift lottery (lottery of whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Even in the case of No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to AT of the game is the “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Referring to (see), the stay stage shift lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is “AT state”. In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a sub-routine of an effect determination process during AT which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is the “recovery / prohibiting effect state”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for determining whether or not to allow restoration, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). The stay stage is an effect mainly based on the background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and any stay stage is always set. In addition, if stay stages differ, the tendency of various effects, such as a background effect and a notice effect, will differ.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution availability determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of highly secured obstacle games is four or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to execute a battle effect execution lottery (battle effect (win)) to win with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). ). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution availability lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and proceeds to the next process (process in step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games and wins the battle effect, that is, the battle effect (win) is executed, so that the BB role is won and the AT lottery is performed. It is structured so that winning is definitive. Note that the structure related to the battle effect is not limited to this, and if the BB role is won even if the AT lottery is not won (the state shifts to the “low probability state” or the “high probability state” after the BB ends). ) May be configured to execute a battle effect (win).

  Further, in the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare role. Here, in this example, the rare roles are winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning-E (watermelon B). It has become. That is, if the player is expected to be simultaneously elected with the BB role by displaying the rare role stopped, the answer is YES in step 3064, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in step 3066. A lottery for determining whether or not to execute a gasse battle effect execution lottery (battle effect (defeat)) with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the lottery that can be executed in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (defeat), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). If NO in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executed even in the “normal section”.

  As described above, when the number of highly secure obstacle games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, for example, when the number of highly secure obstacle games is four or more, a continuous effect such as a battle effect can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of highly secure obstacle games is predetermined. If it is less than the number, for example, if it is less than 4, it is configured not to execute a continuous effect such as a battle effect. Can be prevented from being extinguished by the transition of ("normal section" is set), and only when the advantageous section indicator YH can be kept on until the battle presentation ends, the battle effect is displayed. By executing the game machine, a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained without impairing the player's expectation for winning the BB.

  Also, when the rare role is won, it is configured to be able to execute continuous effects such as battle effects (defeats), so the execution frequency of battle effects can be guaranteed and the game will always proceed with expectation. Can do.

  Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is a partial excerpt. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the “low probability state” and when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. The table includes three types: a table used when the game is in a “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacle games is 3 or less.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “low probability state”, the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the current game, and the corresponding set number It is prescribed. In the case of “low probability state”, the current stay stage consists of two stage stages, a desert stage and a city stage, and the transition stage includes a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states relating to the AT of the next game: a “low probability state”, a “normal BB internal game”, and a “high probability state”.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 0-979 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, the number of places is 980 to 980 when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. 999 is assigned.

  Furthermore, when the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state” or “ordinary BB inside game”, 0 to a number when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the desert stage. 19 is assigned. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 20 to 999 is assigned as a number when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 500 to 749 is assigned as a number when the game shifts from the desert stage to the conference room stage. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 is assigned as a number when the game shifts from the desert stage to the cave stage.

  When the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when the game stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state”, 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 500 to 749 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts to the conference room stage. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 750 to 999 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts to the cave stage in the game.

  The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacles is 4 or more defines the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the current game, and the number of places. Has been. As the current stay stage and the transition stage, there are four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the numbers when the game moves from the desert stage to the conference room stage. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game moves from the desert stage to the cave stage, 960 to 999 is assigned.

  The current stay stage is a city stage, and 0 to 879 are assigned as numbers when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the desert stage. 880 to 929 are assigned as the numbers when the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game. The current stay stage is a city stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the numbers when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the conference room stage. The current stay stage is a city stage, and 960 to 999 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the cave stage.

  The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 is assigned. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 is assigned as a number when the conference room stage is shifted to the cave stage in the game.

  The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when the cave stage is shifted to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 50 to 99 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is changed to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is changed to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in a “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacles is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the current game, The relationship with the numeric value is specified. As the current stay stage and the transition stage, there are four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: “high probability state”, “advantageous BB inside game”, and “low probability state”.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0-979 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. When the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 980-999 is set as a number when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. Assigned.

  When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 19 is set as a number when shifting from the city stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 20 to 999 is assigned as a number when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage is 0 29 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage is 30 to 59 is assigned. When the current stay stage is a conference room stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 60 to 999 are set as numbers when the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Assigned.

  When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 29 is set as a number when moving from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 30 to 59 are set as numbers when the game moves from the cave stage to the city stage. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game moves from the cave stage to the conference room stage is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 100 to 999 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the game is shifted from the desert stage to the city stage.

  When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state”, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when the game stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state”, 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state”, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state”, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage.

  When the current stay stage is a cave stage and a transition is made to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the cave stage is shifted to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and a transition is made to a low probability state in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers for transition from the cave stage to the city stage in the game.

  Thus, when the state is the “low probability state”, two stages of the desert stage or the city stage can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is the “high probability state”, four stages of a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, in the case of an “advantageous section”, four stay stages can be selected, while in the “normal section”, two stay stages can be selected and can be selected in the “normal section”. Two stay stages can also be selected in the “favorable section”. By configuring in this way, even in a “normal section” that cannot be expected to win the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in an “advantageous section”, even in the “normal section” without getting bored The gaming machine can be advanced. In addition, when shifting from the “high probability state” to the “low probability state”, that is, when changing from the “favorable section” to the “normal section”, the “normal section” is selected at the “advantage section” stage. By selecting the production stage, it is difficult for the player to discriminate from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section”, and the game can be continued with expectation.

  A part of the stage selected in the “normal section” overlaps the stage selected in the “favorable section” (the stage that can be selected in the “normal section” but not selected in the “advantage section”). It may be made to have.

  In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is 3 or less, so that the number of highly secured obstacle games is When there is less (3 games or less), do not move to a stay stage with a higher expectation that is an “advantageous section” than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage) By configuring, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by becoming a “normal section” with a small number of games, despite the transition to the stay stage with higher expectation. The stay stages are in the order of “desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage” from those with low expectation of “advantageous sections” (which are difficult to select in “advantageous sections”).

  In addition, the composition of the stay stage is not limited to the one in this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is selected as an “advantageous section” expectation degree, an expectation degree won in the AT lottery, and a BB. It may be configured to suggest a certain degree of expectation. As an example, it is configured so that the stay stage can shift in the game won for the BB role or the rare role (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role or when the AT lottery is not executed by winning the single rare role) And the expected stage of winning the AT lottery is different depending on the stage of the stay, and the order is "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" Or, it may be configured so that the expected degree of winning the BB role is different depending on the stay stage moved, and in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in order of low expectation Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery is won).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing the AT effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is three games or less. If YES in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is an AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the effect related to the game to the AT continuing effect (success) (the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60. Then, it is definitive that the initial value is set in the AT counter M60 by continuing the AT (the effect of notifying that the state relating to the AT of the next game is “AT state”) or the AT continuous turning effect (failure). Otherwise, the state relating to the AT of the next game is determined to be “in-AT state” or “restoration effect state”), and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous production effect (success) vs. the AT continuous production effect (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4: 1. In other words, in the present embodiment, even when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous production effect (failure) may be executed. In such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game, the rebirth production (success) will be executed, and the player feels as if the player has won the rebirth lottery (actually, the continuous lottery has been won and the main control board M As for the control on the side, it is the same as the case where the AT continuous production effect (success) is executed). By configuring in this way, it is rare to win a revival lottery in “Restorability Produce State”, but {win a 2320/65536 lottery (in the case of setting 1) in one game} and win a continuation effect. In this case, it is possible to increase the rate at which the resurrection effect (success) is executed when the resurrection effect is executed, and the player expects the resurrection effect. A feeling can be heightened.

  If NO in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the effect related to the game is an AT continuation effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. If NO in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as the AT end effect, and proceeds to step 3126. If NO in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game is the next game in which the AT continuous production effect (failure) has been executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs an effect relating to the game as a resurrection effect (success) (similar to a resurrection effect (success) executed in the “recovery effect state”). In this process, it is determined that the “state during AT” has been continued), and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3114, the process proceeds to step 3126.

  Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an effect related to the game (the effect of notifying that the number of AT remaining games has been added, for example, “+50 GET”) ) And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect during the AT (an effect executed during the AT such as “AT state”), and performs the following process ( The process proceeds to step 2300.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection / prohibition effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a resurrection lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S creates an effect relating to the game as a revival effect (success) (the effect mode is similar to the effect executed in step 3116 described above, This is an effect of notifying that the revival lottery has been won in the “Restorability Produce Effect State”, and in the next game, the “AT state is entered” and an initial value is set in the AT counter M60). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S did not win the revival lottery in the revival effect (failure) (“restoration effect state”). This is an effect to notify the effect, and it is determined that the transition to the “low probability state” will be made in the next game), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  As described above, the “Restorability Produce State” is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the “in-AT state” final game) that is the “favorable section”. Even if there is not, since the “advantageous section” is extended in the “revival availability state” as the next game, the player checks whether the advantageous area indicator YH is lit. It is difficult to determine whether or not the resurrection effect is successful only by doing, and attention is paid to the result of the resurrection effect. Further, as described above, the lottery execution mode regarding the AT is different between the “AT state” and the “Restorability effect state”. In other words, the execution mode of the lottery regarding the AT is different between the next game won in the continuous lottery in which the revival effect (success) is executed and the game won in the revival lottery in which the revival effect (success) is executed. .

In the present embodiment, the game is shifted to the “restoration effect state” of one game in the next game after the AT state is finished, and the resurrection lottery is executed in the “resusability state state”. By doing so, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are set to be “advantageous sections”, that is, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on, Although it has been prevented that it can be determined whether or not the AT ends without confirming the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) Even in one game for executing the resurrection lottery, the state relating to AT is set to “AT state”, the resurrection flag is turned on in one game for executing the resurrection lottery, and the game before the game for executing the resurrection lottery is revived. By turning off the flag, a different lottery aspect regarding AT is set.
(2) It is configured not to execute the resurrection lottery, and is configured to determine whether or not the “AT state” is ended depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won in the control on the main control board M side, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is assumed to be a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game in the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the production, “the game before the AT final game: AT continuation production (success) → AT final game: production that the next set of ATs will start”, “game before the AT final game: AT continuation production” Production (continuation to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation production (success) ”,“ Game before AT final game: AT continuation production production (failure) → AT final game: Resurrection production (success) ”,“ AT The game before the final game: AT continuous hitting production (failure) → AT final game: revival production (failure) ”may be executed. That is, on the main control board M side, it is determined whether or not the “AT state” continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. Thus, it may be configured to execute the AT continuous hitting effect and the resurrection effect.
(3) In a game in which a rebirth effect (success) is executed, the rendition is performed in the same manner as the rebirth effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the rebirth effect (success) is obtained from the predetermined timing. May be configured to notify the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, as the predetermined timing,
(1) It is a bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to a game in which a rebirth effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when a continuous lottery is won.
(2) The start lever operation timing related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect that is the same effect mode as the revival effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) The timing at which the stop button that is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the first stop is turned on),
(4) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the first stop is turned on → off),
(5) The timing at which the stop button to be the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the second stop is turned on),
(6) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the second stop is turned on and then off),
(7) The timing at which the stop button that is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the third stop is turned on),
(8) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the third stop is turned on → off),
And so on.
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the next game of the game in which the revival presentation (success) is executed,
(10) Start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival presentation (success) is executed,
Etc. In addition, when it is configured to determine by lottery which timing among the various timings (1) to (10) above, after the timing when the stop button to be the first stop is pressed. Even if neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit, so the player presses the stop button that becomes the third stop and then stops the stop button. It is possible to play a game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing at which the game is released or until the start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation process that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is an in-AT state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is an in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads and executes the in-AT processing at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the in-AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a special sign state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads a special sign process at the time of start lever operation described later. And execute the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “specialization sign state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “additional special state”. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state relating to the AT is “additional special state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation described later. Read and execute, and shift to the next process (process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “addition specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “inside advantageous BB. It is determined whether or not it is “game”. In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to AT is “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advantageous BB internal internal processing subroutine when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed to shift to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is “RT1”. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has no push order navigation in the state related to AT (the push order navigation is not It is a state relating to an AT that does not occur and is determined to be “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, or the like. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state relating to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. In addition, as described above, the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoid command, the forward press instruction command, and the forward press avoid command. When the AT extra lottery is won, the main control board M side sends a command related to the AT extra lottery and the number of AT extra games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution timing and effect aspect of an effect regarding push order navigation may be determined by the sub control board | substrate S side.

  In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numeric display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of games has elapsed from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state has shifted to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In this case (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse-pressed white 7-match replay or the forward-pressed black 7-match replay is won, the number of AT games will not increase, so white 7 or black 7 The push order that does not line up is navigated. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, when “RT1” and “low probability state” are entered, the “advantageous section” is still In the game won in the push order bell, the push order navigation can be generated, but in the game won in the push order replay, the push order navigation may not be generated.

  If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in Step 2308, if No in Step 2310, if No in Step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image in Step 2316 based on the state related to AT. (Step 2110).

<Processing during AT at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT at the time of start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in step 2352, confirms winning / replay winning information relating to the game in step 2354, and indicates the instruction number in step 2356. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state relating to AT in which push order navigation can be performed, such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in a state relating to an AT in which push order navigation is not executed, such as “probability state” (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display at the time of the push order bell execution and the push order navigation display of the push order replay are the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers and the display colors related to the numbers are the same) It can be applied to the case where it is configured to be displayed in (). Moreover, when comprised in that way, it is comprised so that the display image (for example, character image) different from a push order navigation display may be displayed at the time of execution of a push order navigation in the production | presentation display apparatus S40, You may comprise so that the image for production | generation different at the time of execution of the push order navigation which concerns and the time of execution of the push order navigation which concerns on a push order replay may be displayed.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize-A1, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “left → middle → right” which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is enclosed in a circle. Display in display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, if the result of step 2366 is No, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370 after executing the processing of step 2360, 2364 or 2368 described above.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is three games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT remaining game number in the display mode B (display mode described later). A display mode that is less conspicuous than A) is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, if a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as the push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376 or if the processing in step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, in the case where a reverse pressing instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as the push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  The CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110) when the result of step 2380 is No or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

  In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in the display mode A (the display mode described above). (Display mode conspicuous than B) is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, when it is 4 games or more, it is displayed in the display mode A, and when it is 3 games or less, it is displayed in the display mode B.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40.

  If No in step 2386 or if the process of step 2388 has been executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2390 whether a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, in the case of receiving a reverse push instruction command, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40.

  The CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110) when the result of step 2390 is No or when the process of step 2392 is executed. As described above, when the AT remaining game number is small, in other words, when the display of the AT remaining game number is displayed in the display mode B that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, an effect that displays “Aim 7!” Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the push order in which the white seven and the black seven do not stop display on the invalid line is displayed as the first stop reel. It is configured to execute push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode for informing the player that the number of AT remaining games is small in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, a continuous effect (for example, whether or not the “AT state” (a state related to an AT in which push order navigation can be performed) continues in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small (for example, Even if it is configured to execute (battle effect), it is configured so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered by configuring so that an arrow image or “Aim 7” is not displayed during the execution of the battle effect. be able to. In addition, with this configuration, even when the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is 0 and a message indicating that the “AT state” is ended by defeating the battle effect is displayed, When a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message indicating that the “AT state is completed” is displayed. Informs the number of AT extra games based on the instruction command (based on winning of forward black 7 replay or reverse white 7 replay), that is, informing that the number of AT games has been added in the game elected in the AT extra lottery. However, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

<Special indication processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation specialization precursor process that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device related to the game in Step 2402, confirms the winning / replaying winning information related to the game in Step 2404, and in Step 2406, indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state relating to AT in which push order navigation can be performed, such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in a state relating to an AT in which push order navigation is not executed, such as “probability state” (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order in the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A2, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “left → right → middle” which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is the replay game in the push order in step 2412. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case where the number is “1”, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side from the center. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the forward push instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse press instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in Step 2424, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in Step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, 2426, or when No in step 2424, it displays the AT background image in step 2428. In step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

<Specialization process for starting lever operation>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the specialization process for adding the start lever when called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game. In step 2454, the winning / replay winning information relating to the game is confirmed. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state relating to AT in which push order navigation can be performed, such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in a state relating to an AT in which push order navigation is not executed, such as “probability state” (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6, winning-B.

  In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A4, a number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “right → left → middle”, which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number, is enclosed in stars. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the game condition device is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case where the number is “1”, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side from the center. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is not a push order replay game, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a forward push instruction command. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the push order is the forward push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 in order, from left to right. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the reverse press instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse press instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the right stop button D43, the middle stop button D42, and the left stop button D41 in order, from right to left. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, in the case where the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, if an avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups. Here, the avoidance command is a generic name for both the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether a forward press avoidance command is received or a reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward press avoidance command is received, in order to avoid forward press “left → middle → right”, the number “1” is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40, and the first Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

  Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of the above-described steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476, or if 2474 is No, the AT background image is displayed in step 2480. Displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

<Advantageous processing inside the BB during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing a process inside the BB advantageous during start lever operation, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in Step 2702, confirms the winning / replaying winning information relating to the game in Step 2704, and in Step 2706, indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state relating to AT in which push order navigation can be performed, such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in a state relating to an AT in which push order navigation is not executed, such as “probability state” (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), it is not necessary to transmit a command related to the instruction number. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S It is determined whether the condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6, winning-B.

  In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A4, a number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “right → left → middle”, which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number, is enclosed in stars. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case where the number is “1”, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side from the center. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received a command relating to 7 replays. It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, the reverse press instruction command, the forward press avoid command, and the reverse press avoid command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image to avoid establishment as the first order numerical display as the push order navigation display. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described steps 2712, 2716, and 2720, or if No in step 2718, in step 2722, the AT background image is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when the predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the effect display device S40. In this case, it is notified that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of first torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. It is determined whether or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the push order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, in the case where there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs forward pressing navigation or reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replays are a generic term for forward-pressed 7 black replays and reverse-pressed white 7 replays. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S darkly displays the push order navigation (the dark display is continued during the game) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Transition.

  In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and fails in the push order. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of 2nd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing a second cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display relating to the stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. Erasing, pushing order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Third torso stop effect related decision process>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing a third torso stop effect related determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

  Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won a prize. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role wins, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is elected during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not the role is BB. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of a BB combination won during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table, and Based on the state and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, with the BB role elected during the AT (“AT state”, “Additional specialization state”, “Specialization preparation state” or “Restoration effect state”) If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the during-AT BB start effect determination table, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT state and the BB role of the game, The process is shifted to the process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect executed in the game, The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the BB start time in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combination: BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). There are two types of AT-related states: “normal BB inside game” and “advantageous BB inside game”. There are three types of BB start effects: normal effects, high expectation effects, and premier effects. It should be noted that, in the BB elected during the non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the “AT state” after the end of the BB differs depending on the type of the BB start effect. → Highly expected production → Premier production.

  When the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB internal game, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256. . When the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77 / 256. When the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premier effect is 0/256 It is.

  If the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state relating to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256 It is. If the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77 / 256. If the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premier effect is 0/256 It is.

  When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is the normal effect The probability is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect The probability of being 77/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premier effect The probability is 0/256.

  When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect Is 157/256. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premier effect The probability is 32/256.

  When it is “normal section”, even if you won BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) or BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) Is not selected, and it is determined that the possibility of selecting the normal effect is higher than the high expectation effect.

  Even if it is an advantageous section, if a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won, the premier effect will not be selected, and the normal effect may be selected rather than the high expectation effect It is set to be high.

  If it is an “advantageous section” and BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) is won, there is a possibility that a premier effect will be selected. By having constituted in this way, it is decided that it will shift to "AT state" after BB without setting difference is completed by having won BB without setting difference by selecting the premier effect. Can be shown to the player. In addition, when it is an “advantageous section” and BB with no setting difference (1-type BB-A and 1-type BB-C) is won, there is a higher possibility that a high-expected stage will be selected than the normal stage. (The possibility of selecting a normal performance is reduced). By doing in this way, the player can estimate whether or not the AT is started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation in winning the AT. It should be noted that there is a setting difference between BB (1 type BB-B) with a setting difference won in “Normal BB inside game” and no setting difference BB (win in “Normal BB inside game”). The distribution of the BB start effects according to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is the same. In addition, it is not limited to this, there is a setting difference won in the “normal BB inside game” and the distribution of the BB start effect related to the BB (1 type BB-B) and the “normal BB inside game” The distribution of the BB start effect relating to the BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) may be different, and by configuring as such, the BB start with respect to the BB with setting difference The distribution can be different depending on whether it is a production or a BB start production for a BB with no setting difference.

  The AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB during AT. The AT BB start effect determination table is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state relating to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combination: BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). The state relating to AT is one kind of “advantageous BB inside game”. There are two types of BB start effects: an effect that can be added and an effect that cannot be added. The addition possible effect is an effect that suggests that the AT extra lottery can be executed during the execution of BB, and the non-addition effect is an effect that suggests that the AT extra lottery is not executed during the execution of BB. The BB won during the AT does not have an element as to whether or not the AT lottery is won, and depending on the type of the BB, whether or not the AT lottery is executed may differ. In addition, during AT, there is a setting difference that the AT extra lottery is not executed. Even in the BB, the BB to be executed becomes the AT extra lottery because the game medal can be obtained and the AT is advantageous to the player after the BB ends. Is configured to clearly notify whether or not is executed. Specific examples will be described in detail below.

  If the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0 / 256, and an effect that can be added is not executed. If the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect will not be added is 256 / 256, and an effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect can be added Is 256/256, and an effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability of becoming 0/256 is that no extra effect is executed.

<Process at the time of 3rd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing a third cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2600 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is a stop button operation based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces the pressing order success effect. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays “GET” ! "Is not displayed.

  In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or in steps 2608 or 2610 When the process is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT added games (command set in step 1517) is received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates a difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. Thus, it may be configured to determine whether or not the AT game number addition is executed and the AT additional game number and display the AT additional game number.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses the AT display game in the effect display device S 40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, if the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds AT on the effect display device S40. Without displaying the number of games, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). In addition, as a method for reporting the number of added games at AT, (1) all of the added games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the added games is notified by the game, and the remaining number of games is recorded after the game. (3) In the game, the number of additional games is not notified, and the games after the game (for example, at the time of winning 7 replays, at the time of winning the common bell (at the time of winning a role that is not added), After executing the game (continuous production), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 for the game in which the number of remaining games on the production display device S40 becomes “0”, or the game after the game that has become “0” ).

  In addition, when the common bell is won in the “additional special state”, the display regarding the number of games added to the AT is not displayed even in the case of stopping according to the push order navigation (in the common bell, the AT additional lottery is drawn). Absent).

  By configuring as described above, according to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on in the “favorable section”, the period that is advantageous to the player Can be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing a “restoration effect state”, when the continuation effect is won and then the resurrection effect (success) is executed, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in “AT state”. On the other hand, even if the continuation effect is not won and the revival effect (failure) is subsequently executed, the revival effect (failure) is executed. When the state relating to the AT of the game to be played is set as the “restorability effect state” and the state relating to the AT is set as the “favorable zone”, the advantageous zone indicator YH is turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the player so that it is difficult to recognize whether the resurrection effect is successful or unsuccessful by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game that executes the resurrection effect. It is possible to secure a highly entertaining gaming machine in a gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the user.

  In this example, when the BB role is won in the “high probability state”, the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, the state can be shifted to the “AT state”. The configuration related to this example is not limited to the one in this example, for example, it is configured to be able to win an AT lottery with a rare role such as cherry (can win even if it is not a BB role), and when winning an AT lottery It may be configured to shift to the “AT precursor state” as the state related to the AT, and shift to the “AT state” by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the “AT precursor state”.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of Step 7100 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items and confirms various settings and information on the gaming machine. It is a screen that can. As an example of the item selection and determination method, the cursor is moved to a desired item by operating the cross key SB2 (having four buttons, an upper button, a lower button, a left button, and a right button) By operating the sub input button SB, the currently selected item (with the cursor) is determined, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed by determining the selected item are menu screens. In addition, there may be a plurality of display modes of the menu screen. For example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the gaming state, or the design of the background image may be different. Even if there is a difference, the menu screen is referred to.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
Examples of items that can be selected on the menu screen are listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: It may be configured such that the player can adjust the volume output from the gaming machine. For example, after the screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed, the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated to output. The volume may be increased and the output volume may be decreased when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated.
(2) Light intensity adjustment: The player may be able to adjust the light intensity (luminance) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50). For example, when a screen corresponding to light amount adjustment is displayed and the upper button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) is increased (brighter), and when the lower button of the cross key SB2 is operated, the light amount (brightness) is decreased. You may comprise so that it may become (dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters appearing during the game (main character, voice in push order navigation, battle character, character that supports the progress of the game displayed on the production display device S40, etc.) can be selected / changed. The screen may be configured, and after a screen corresponding to character customization is displayed, the cursor is moved to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2, and the sub input button SB is operated.
(4) Reel arrangement table: The reel arrangement may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table.
(5) Payout table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations constituting replays and winning combinations by being stopped) may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided into a plurality of screens and displayed, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched between the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen such as an operation of the sub input button SB (which may be configured to display over time) may be performed. As a specific example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Game end timing (timing at which the third stop button was turned on → off, display determination timing, payout completion timing based on winning, and a command related to game end set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side as game end processing From the timing, the timing at which the command related to the end of the game is received by the sub-control board S side, etc. The menu screen can be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed with no lever operation, no new reel rotation, etc. (until the sub input button SB is operated until then) But the menu screen is not displayed). Note that the bet operation includes both a case where a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 and a case where a bet is placed by inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 (automatic bet based on a replay stop display). May also be included in the betting operation).
(2-1) It may be configured not to be able to display the menu screen while the game is being executed (the game medal is betted, the wait period until the reel rotation starts, and the reel is rotating).
(2-2) The menu screen may be displayed while the game is being executed (such as when a game medal is betted).
(3) An effect that informs whether a lottery is won by adding the number of AT games during execution of an effect that informs whether or not a bonus has been won, an effect that informs whether or not a bonus has been won, a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games , Etc.) may be configured not to be able to display the menu screen.
(4) It may be configured not to be able to display the menu screen during the stop display of the re-gamer.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is displayed when the menu screen can be displayed. You may comprise so that it may blink.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation for displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB. However, the operation for displaying the menu screen may be changed, or a plurality of operations for displaying the menu screen may be provided. . In the case of Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time taken to shift to a standby screen described later from the game end timing) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the standby timer is timing). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time taken to shift from the menu screen to a standby screen described later, and the initial value at the timing when the menu screen starts to be displayed. Is set to a predetermined time B (in this example, 300 seconds, which is longer than the predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is timing), and performs the next processing (processing in step 7200). Migrate to

In step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image). As, you may comprise as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new start of reel rotation.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen continues to be displayed, it may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, 300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B) has elapsed since the start of display of the menu screen.
(3) A predetermined item on the menu screen may be selected and determined, and a predetermined operation may be performed on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item. For example, a cursor may be displayed on the volume adjustment item. By operating the sub input button SB, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed. After adjusting the volume by operating the cross key SB2, the sub input button SB is operated again. The volume is set to the medium size, the display of the menu screen is terminated, and a screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes referred to as a normal screen) is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image displayed before the menu screen display on the effect display device S40. As an example, when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the situation where the screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, when the display of the menu screen ends, The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 7200).

  If NO in step 7114, in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example) to the menu standby timer, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 7200). To do. It should be noted that if the result of Step 7104, Step 7106, or Step 7122 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 7200). As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set to the predetermined time B (300 in this example). Second) is reset, in other words, the time until the standby screen is displayed is measured again from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers related to the standby screen display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one timer related to the standby screen display is used. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited. You may comprise so that it may set to a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is turned from ON to OFF, a predetermined time A (180 seconds) is set in the standby timer, and then the sub input button SB is operated in a situation where the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds. When the display of the menu screen is started, a predetermined time B (300 seconds) may be set in the standby timer.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of standby screen display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 7200 of FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby screen is not displayed. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game is not executed for a predetermined time (the game is not progressing), and the effect that is executed on the gaming machine. A moving image related to a story is repeatedly played back, “Power Saving” is displayed, or a logo mark related to a gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, the player is required to operate as a condition for displaying the above-described menu screen, while the player is not required to operate as a condition for displaying the standby screen.

  In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a waiting timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when a later-described waiting timer is timing) is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the timing at which the third stop button is changed from on to off is used as the game end timing. In the case of Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby timer (a timer for measuring the time to shift to the standby screen from the end of the game, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends. Is set to a predetermined time A (in this example, 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag, and the process proceeds to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processing in step 7208 and step 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached. In addition, the sub input button SB is operated on the menu screen. Thus, the image displayed before the display of the menu screen may be displayed (the display of the menu screen is terminated).

  Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has become zero. If YES in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S 40 in step 7214, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the waiting timer timing flag, and proceeds to step 7224. Note that if the result is No in Step 7206, the process proceeds to Step 7224.

  Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu standby timer timing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has become zero. In the case of Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2110 processing). In addition, also when it is No in step 7224 or step 7226, it transfers to the next process (process of step 2110).

  If NO in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer timing flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the standby timer timing termination condition is not satisfied. To do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition that ends the timing of the standby timer and clears the timer value of the standby timer to zero. There is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, the waiting timer timing end condition is that the reel starts to rotate anew. If YES in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7212. If NO in step 7238, the process proceeds to step 7216.

  If NO in step 7202, in step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for terminating the display of the standby screen. In this example, a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation are performed. The start screen is a waiting screen end condition. In addition, it may be configured to be able to shift from the standby screen to the menu screen (display the menu screen). For example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB in a situation where the standby screen is displayed. You may comprise. Next, in step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As an example, if a standby screen is displayed because the game is not progressing for a predetermined time in a situation where a screen where the main character is walking in the forest is displayed, the main character is again executed by executing a bet operation. A screen of walking in the forest will be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a standby screen transition image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated while the menu screen can be displayed. Thereafter, under the situation where the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) elapses without operation of the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, the stop operation of the third stop button is performed, all the reels stop, and the player presses the third stop button. Since 3 minutes (predetermined time A, 180 seconds) have elapsed from the release timing, and the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time, a standby screen is displayed. Thus, in this example, the case where the predetermined time B has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, and the case where the predetermined time A has elapsed since the game was ended (after the third stop button was turned on → off) The standby screen can be displayed at a predetermined time B, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >>
Here, the configuration relating to the menu screen and the standby screen that can be applied to the swivel game machine according to the present example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. Note that the configurations listed below are applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and it is supplemented that there is no problem by appropriately combining one or more.

<Timing start timing of standby timer>
As the timing to set the initial value to the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed and start timing, (1) the third stop button as the final stop operation (stop corresponding to the reel that has rotated to the end) (2) Start timing from the timing when the button was turned on, (2) Start timing from the display determination execution timing, (3) Start timing from the payout completion timing based on winning, (4) Game The timing is started from the timing at which a command related to the end of the game is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S as the end processing. May be. Further, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timing start timing of menu standby timer>
The timing is set to start from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB as the timing for setting the initial value to the menu standby timer for measuring the time until the menu screen is displayed and starting the timing. May be. Further, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A set in the standby timer (the timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds).

<Configuration of sub input button>
It may be configured such that the initial value can be reset in the menu standby timer in a situation where the menu standby timer is timing, for example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. Thus, a predetermined time B (which is a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set in the menu standby timer. As an example, when the menu screen starts to be displayed, the menu standby timer is set to 300 seconds to start timing, and after 100 seconds, the menu standby timer value is 200 seconds. Depending on the operation, 300 seconds may be reset in the menu standby timer. Further, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB, and the menu screen is displayed (the screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the menu screen is displayed). It may be configured such that the initial value can be reset to the menu standby timer by operating the cross key SB on the transition destination screen where the transition is made may be a menu screen, or while the menu screen is being displayed (menu By operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB on the screen to which the screen has transitioned by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after starting the screen display) The menu wait timer may be reset to an initial value.

<Configuration for stop button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is not executed. Even if the stop button (the left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button) is operated in the situation, the initial value may not be reset in the standby timer. As an example, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on after being turned off as the final stop operation, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting, After that, in the situation where the betting operation is not executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset again even if the stop button is operated, and the timer value is 100 seconds. You may comprise so that it may remain.

<Configuration for betting operation>
When the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is executed ( When a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 or when a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170), the time of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the bet operation is executed. If no other operation is performed, the standby screen may not be displayed over time. In such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the elapse of time from the bet operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) elapses from the bet operation. May be configured to be 0 or small. With this configuration, the remaining game medals become less than a prescribed number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, the bet button is operated). The bet button when the game shop clerk cleans the gaming machine when the game ends or when the player has left the game with fewer than the prescribed number of game medals remaining in the credit and the game is ended (no betting) Even if the user bets by operating the button, no sound is output at an unintended volume.

<Display condition of standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on the condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer or the menu standby timer) regarding the display of the standby screen has changed from “1 → 0”. With this configuration, the timer value reaches “0” without going through “1” like “20 → 0” when a bet operation is performed or when an abnormality occurs in timer measurement. In this case (when cleared to zero), the standby screen is not displayed, and the display of the unintended standby screen can be prevented (the timer value is then reset to “1 → 0”). In this case, the standby screen may be displayed. A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to checkout button>
In the situation where the standby timer is timing, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then one or more credits exist. In the situation, when the settlement of the credit is executed by operating the settlement button, the timing after the predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the operation timing of the settlement button or when the settlement of the credit is completed (the last game medal is The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of returning to the discharge port D240.

<Configuration of setting key switch>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off and then turned on while the power is on. A standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing. As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened while the power is on. You may comprise so that a standby | waiting screen may be displayed when predetermined time A (for example, 180 second) passes from the timing which made the setting key switch OFF-> ON after that and closed the front door.

<Configuration related to the occurrence of a predetermined error>
As a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to a reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off. Thereafter, a predetermined error relating to the main control board M (for example, a game medal is selected by the medal selector DS). An error that occurs when the user stays inside the vehicle) occurs, and the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing at which the predetermined error was released.

<Configuration related to the front door>
As a final stop operation, the standby timer starts timing by turning on and off the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end), and then the front door is opened and opened. Even when the above is maintained, it may be configured to continue the timing of the standby timer. Also, as a final stop operation, the standby timer starts counting by turning on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) and then turning it off, and then opening the front door, Then, you may comprise so that time-measurement of a standby timer may be continued also when a front door is closed.

<Configuration 1 during AT>
Turn off after turning on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) as the final stop operation in a situation where non-AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “normal game state”) When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing at which the standby is performed, a standby screen may be displayed, while the final stop operation is performed in a state where the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “AT state”) The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off. May be. Similarly, the standby screen may not be displayed even if the predetermined time A has elapsed from the end of the final stop operation even during execution of the continuous effect, bonus execution, or ART. In addition, a third stop button (corresponding to a reel that has been rotated to the end) is used as a final stop operation in a game in which the push order navigation is executed in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “AT state”). When the predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of turning off after turning on the stop button), the standby screen is not displayed, while the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “AT state”) In a situation where the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off for a predetermined time as the final stop operation in the game in which push order navigation has not been executed. A standby screen may be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Configuration 2 during AT>
When the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button or the like in a situation where the AT is in progress (for example, the state related to the AT is “AT state”), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) elapses The standby screen can be displayed by (2), and after a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed, the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen is displayed) is restored. May be.

<Configuration 3 during AT>
Turn off after turning on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) as the final stop operation in a situation where non-AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is “normal game state”) When a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of the above, a standby screen can be displayed, and in a situation where the AT is not in progress (for example, the state related to the AT is “normal gaming state”), A menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of displaying the menu screen, a standby screen can be displayed. ), A menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the menu screen, a normal screen during AT (displayed before the menu screen is displayed). May be configured to return to that have been screen) it is. That is, when the time values are compared, the configuration may be such that “predetermined time A = predetermined time B <predetermined time C”. Note that the time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B need not be the same, and the predetermined time C only needs to be the longest.

<Other configuration 1>
The menu screen may be displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 during the display of the standby screen is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (2 ) A screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation (selecting and determining a predetermined item) from a menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button, (3) By operating the sub input button You may comprise like the screen different from the menu screen displayed. In addition, the menu screen continues to be displayed even if a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 during the display of the menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. When a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 during the display of the menu screen displayed by operating the input button, the screen may be returned to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and a bet is displayed while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen is displayed. When a bet is operated while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen is displayed before the menu screen is displayed. A screen may be displayed (a normal screen displayed during a game when a standby screen is displayed immediately after power-on). In addition, when a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and a bet is placed while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen is displayed. The standby screen is displayed, and three game medals stored in the credit are a prescribed number. In the above situation, if you bet by operating the bet button (for example, the Max bet button that allows you to bet 3 cards in one operation), the screen that was displayed before the menu screen is displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) In the case where the game is performed, the normal screen) displayed during the game is displayed, the standby screen is displayed, and the bet button is displayed in a situation where the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the prescribed number. A menu screen may be displayed when a bet is made by operating (for example, a maximum bet button that allows three bets by one operation).

<Other configuration 2>
It has multiple display modes for the standby screen, and satisfies certain conditions (for example, entering a password on the menu screen to take over the previous game history as a predetermined condition) If not, a moving image for introducing a story is displayed as a standby screen, but if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a moving image for introducing a character may be displayed as a standby screen. . In addition, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as standby screens in both the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, but is the predetermined condition satisfied? Depending on whether or not, the frequency of displaying either the story introduction or the character introduction may be different.

<Other changes>
In this example, the first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning a prize and the second BB combination in which the second BB having lower profit than the first BB for the player is executed by winning are included. Further, the first BB combination and the second BB combination may be elected in duplicate (providing a combination of “first BB + second BB”). In such a configuration, when “first BB + second BB” is won, the symbol combination (first BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the highly profitable first BB can be stopped and displayed after the execution of the first BB is completed. The symbol combination corresponding to 2BB (second BB combination) may be displayed in a stopped state (the second BB is won even during execution of the first BB). In addition, when “First BB + Second BB” is won, by executing the highly profitable first BB first, for example, when the closing time of the game hall is approaching, “First BB + Second BB” is won. In such a case, the second BB with low profit is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the game must be ended without executing the first BB with high profit. Can be prevented.

  After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning configuration of the second BB may be notified immediately, or may be notified after being hidden (after a predetermined game has passed without notification). In this case, it may be configured such that the winning probability of the replay is increased in the latent period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the production | presentation which suggests 2nd BB winning possibility may be performed when it is made to hide (for example, "BB consecutive resort chance time!" Is displayed on production display device S40). . In such a configuration, if there is no case where the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definitive that the production occurrence = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. Even after the operation of the first BB is finished, it is preferable that the production suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is executed (the production mode after the completion of the first BB is the same as described above. For example, “BB Renso Chance Time !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40). In addition, even when only the first BB is won, and after the operation of the first BB is finished, the first BB is won again, and the execution of the performance suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. May be. Further, once the winning of the second BB is notified, the winning of the first BB may be notified (for example, display of “BB consecutive resort chance time!” → display of “sorry” → “first” 1BB won !!!! ”). Furthermore, when the second BB is hidden after the first BB operation is completed after the winning of the duplicate during the AT, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared, etc. However, the internal reduction in the number of remaining games may be continuously interrupted. When the first BB and the second BB are selected and won, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small combination A are won simultaneously, the first BB is given priority to stop control.
(2) When the first BB and the small combination B are won in duplicate, the small combination B is given priority to stop control.
That is, there may be provided a small combination for which stop control is given priority over the BB combination and a small combination for which stop control is given priority to the BB combination.
(3) When the first BB and the small role A are both won, when the small role A wins, or some symbols of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small role A (for example, at the first stop, When 2 stops), a notification corresponding to the small combination A (notification that the small combination A can win) is performed.
In other words, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is used to notify the first BB hand that is controlled to stop with priority over the small hand A. Thus, when the first BB combination cannot be won regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can be won), a notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. Further, when the small combination A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification that is most advantageous to the player in accordance with various game situations that change in the middle of the game, and the content that is notified by the effect display device S40 and the like. It is possible to prevent the winning combination from being inconsistent.
(4) When the first BB and the small combination B are won in duplicate, a notification corresponding to the small combination B is performed during rotation of all reels.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that it may have a display (7 segment etc.) which displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) by which it stopped and is controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the active line, an effect that is highly likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, the lamp is lit in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided to have the following characteristics.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when a game is played using an earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine) ).
(3) When a game is played using an earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume that is not the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

  Further, during the AT state or during BB execution, even when a game is played using an earphone jack, it may be configured such that a production sound is output from the gaming machine. Further, a volume for when the earphone jack is not used and a volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even when the earphone is removed, the sound volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be cleared immediately (to the initial value). For example, when no operation is performed for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to an initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the sound volume for using the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place that does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted into the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever) ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-gamer can be varied between the end of the BB when the BB is acquired at a specific number or more and the end of the BB when the BB is acquired at a specific number or less. It may be configured.
(2) You may have two or more RT states which transfer when RT state (for example, RT1) with the relatively high winning probability of a re-game player is complete | finished. For example, it may be configured to shift to “RT0” after “RT1” ends, or may be configured to shift to “RT3” (a newly provided RT state).
(3) The RT state is shifted when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state does not correspond to the winning one-on-one, and the transition is made with a constant probability regardless of the condition device or the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) It is possible to mount 0th RT transition, duplicate winning combination of 0 sheets, and double winning combination of 0 sheets. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter what position the stop operation is performed, no more than one winning combination is provided as a 0 winning combination, and the RT state shifts by winning the 0 winning combination. It may be configured to be able to obtain a double winning combination of 0 and 7 and a winning combination of 0 and A. It should be noted that, when the double winning combination of the 0 sheets is selected, it may be configured such that either the 0 sheet combination that shifts to RT or the 0 sheet combination that does not shift to RT is awarded according to the pressing order. It is also possible to make a winning combination by prioritizing the 0-sheet combination by winning the 0-sheet combination and the BB combination.

  In addition, as in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("Left → Middle → Right", "Left → Right → Middle", "Middle → Left → Right", "Middle → Right → Left", “Right → Left → Middle” and “Right → Middle → Left” (6 choices), and push order replay push order is 3 choices (1st stop is left, middle, right 3 choices) In this case, the push order display in the push order display device D270 is different from the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay. You may comprise so that a display and 3 choice push order navigation display may differ. As an example, the push order display relating to 6 choices is “= 1” in the case of “left → middle → right”, “= 2” in the case of “left → right → middle”, “middle → left → “= 3” for “right”, “= 4” for “middle → right → left”, “= 5” for “right → left → middle”, “right → middle → left” Is displayed as “= 6”, and the push order display for the three options is “= 7” when the first stop is on the left, and “= 8” when the first stop is in the middle. When the first stop is on the right, the display may be such as “= 9”.

In this example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) It is configured so that the number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the “AT in progress state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, can be displayed on the effect display device. If the number of remaining games is 0 and the AT state is changed from the “AT state” to the “normal game state”, the AT lottery is won again within the specific game and the “AT state” is changed. While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), and then transitions from the “AT state” to the “normal game state” and then again within a specific game. When the AT lottery is won and the state is shifted to the “AT state”, the previous AT digest game number is not taken over, and the number of AT digest games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts to rotate, an indication prompting the reel to stop on the effect display device S40 (for example, “reel If you do not operate the stop button for a certain period of time after the reel starts rotating in a game where push order navigation has occurred, (2-1) Production The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed.
(3) When the power is turned “on → off → on” in a game where push order navigation occurs, the reel rotation speed becomes constant and before the stop button operation becomes valid. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing.
(4) A state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT are states related to an AT in which the push order navigation is generated in a game in which the common bell is won or the push order navigation may occur. The frequency with which the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state with respect to a certain AT and the state with respect to another AT that is a state with respect to the AT where push order navigation can occur.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example) where the winning probability of replay is the highest, the proportion of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the proportion of games in which push order navigation does not occur high. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell role and the replaying role is ½ or more. By configuring in this way, the game can proceed without the player getting bored during the AT.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

  Here, the feature point about the above-mentioned game section is explained in full detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for shifting to the “advantageous section” can be executed except during the internal winning of BB and the execution of BB.

≪Standby section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the “standby state”, it becomes an “advantageous section” from the next game.

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) Push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” (for example, shifting from a “high probability state” to an “AT in-progress state” as an AT-related state), an AT game number addition lottery, or the like may be executed.
(5) During the “favorable section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) If the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the “advantageous section” is basically used unless the BB or push order navigation is executed at least once in the “advantageous section”. However, as an exception, when the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and the push order navigation are performed once in the “advantageous section”. The “advantageous section” can be completed even if it is not executed.
(7) The advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is measured in all the games in the "favorable section" (for example, every game counter value is added even during execution of BB).

Here, the feature points related to the lottery for the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The presence / absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence / absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is not determined in the course of the number of games.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability depending on the set value is established, the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) In the case where a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is executed, even if the set values are different, the lottery probabilities are the same.
(4) The performance of the “advantageous section” does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the “high probability state”, and the setting 6 shifts to the “AT state”. Etc., there is no difference depending on the setting value).
(5) Setting to “advantageous section” When winning the lottery, the next game will be changed to “advantageous section” (setting to “advantageous section” in the BB role established in “normal section”. If the lottery is won, it can be set as a “standby section” in the next game).

Here, the characteristic points related to the performance change of the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” with reference to the set value is not executed (the condition common to all the set values may be that a predetermined number of games have elapsed and a predetermined condition device is established) .
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(3) When the BB is won internally, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(4) During the BB execution, when the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” during the BB execution Is not executed. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(5) A lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the execution of the BB is not different depending on the set value during the execution of the BB. Can be executed. A lottery or the like can be executed by adding the number of AT games.

  Further, the following configuration may be applied to the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example. Moreover, the following structures may be applied independently and a some structure may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) It is configured to have a “gase high probability state” as a state relating to an AT which is an “advantageous section” but is harder to win the AT lottery than the “high probability state”.
(2) The continuous performance is composed of at least a continuous number of games equal to or greater than a predetermined number of G.
(3) There is a normal role that is not won at 100% in the AT lottery and a special role that is won at 100% in the AT lottery, and when the continuous performance is executed with the normal role as a trigger, and the AT lottery is not won. In such a case, if the special role is won during the continuous production, the production is performed to notify that the AT lottery is won even during the continuous production (replace the continuous production).
(4) The more remaining games with the number of highly secured obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a higher expectation level (expectation level for bonus winning, expectation level for AT lottery), and the remaining games with the number of highly secured obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous performance with a low expectation.
(5) The smaller the remaining number of highly secured obstacles, the higher the probability of selecting an effect that completes one game with a higher expectation level (expectation level for bonus wins, expectation level for AT lottery wins).
(6) If the number of remaining high-impact games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the lost continuous effect will not be executed, but the winning continuous effect (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) Can be executed. In other words, if the remaining number of high secured obstacles is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the effect of completing one game can be executed both in the case of a loss and in the case of success, Can only be executed if.
(7) If the ceiling G number (1500 games) in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The selection tendency of effects differs depending on whether the number of ceilings G in the advantageous section is equal to or less than a predetermined value and when it is greater than the predetermined value (occurrence frequency of continuous effects, expected big hit expectation of predetermined effects, etc.).
(9) When a transition to a “favorable section” is newly made in the middle of a continuous production of lost in the “normal section” (for example, an effect of defeat),
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production “Characters turn around and Stechen suggestion” in the “advantageous zone” transition game). The rate at which the production is rewritten during the continuous production (defeat) is higher than the rate at which the production is rewritten during the continuous production (win).
(9-2) The stay stage is changed after the continuous performance is executed to the end. When the transition to the “advantageous section” is performed during the execution of the continuous performance, the proportion of notification that the transition is made on the sub-control board S side in the game, and the sub-game in the game when the continuous performance is not performed. The ratio of notifying that the control board S has shifted is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) The player can select a stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the “normal section”. For example, the selection can be made by operating the sub input button.
(2) Stay stage A group 1: A lottery result indicating whether or not it becomes an “advantageous section” is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game.
Stay stage A group 2: A lottery result indicating whether or not it becomes an “advantageous section” will be announced at the end of the game (or at the time of the next game bet (when the replay stop is displayed, the start lever is operated)).
(3) A stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group when it becomes a “normal section” from a state other than the “advantageous section” and stay stage A group. The stay stage is maintained when it becomes a “normal section” from the “advantageous section” and the stage other than the production A group.
(4) The AT expectation degree when the advantageous section indicator is off and stay stage A is different from the AT expectation degree when the advantageous section indicator is off and other than stay stage A group. For example, from the one with a low AT expectation level, “the advantageous section indicator is turned off and the stay stage A group → the advantageous section display is turned on and the stay stage A group → the advantageous section display is turned on and other than the stay stage A group”
(5) Stay stage transition (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) triggered by the effects (including 1G completion effects and continuous effects) in the game from “normal section” to “advantageous section” The rate of occurrence differs from the rate at which the stay stage transition occurs triggered by the effect in the game from “advantageous section” to “normal section”.

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The higher the number of games for “Advantageous Zones” (the remaining number of high secured obstacles), the higher the degree of expectation (expectation for winning an AT lottery, expectation for winning a bonus) The probability of selecting the stay stage is high, and the smaller the number of games guaranteed for the “favorable section” (the remaining number of games with high obstacles), the higher the expectation level (the expected level and the bonus won in the AT lottery) The probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation) is high.
(2) When the remaining security game in the “advantageous section” is less than or equal to a predetermined value (4 games or less), the smaller the number of remaining security games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts.
(3) When a high-expected performance is selected in the situation where you are not staying at a high-expectation stage (expectation you have won for the AT lottery, expectation you have won for the bonus) Expectation (winning for AT lottery) than when a stage with high expectation is selected in the situation where you are staying at a high stay stage (expectation for winning an AT lottery, expectation for winning a bonus) The expectation that is won and the expectation that the bonus is won) is high.

<< Point 4 >>
(1) If BB is won in the “Restorability Produce State”,
(1-1) The lottery may be executed with the AT added during BB or may not be executed.
(1-2) After completion of BB, the state may be shifted to “AT state” or may not be shifted.
(1-3) AT lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed.
(1-4) When shifting to the “AT state” after the end of BB, the number of AT remaining games may or may not be subtracted for one game in the “restorability effect state”.
(2) The AT addition lottery may be executed or not executed in the “restorability effect state”. If you run a lottery with AT,
(3) In the “Restorability Produce State”, when a reverse-pressed white 7-match replay or a forward-pressed black 7-match replay is won, an avoidance navigation occurs and the timing after executing the resurrection effect (success) Announce the number of additional games.
(4) If a winning combination that can shift to “advantageous section” is won in “revival / prohibition effect state”, the advantageous section indicator is turned off at the start timing of the next game, while “resurrection / prohibition effect state” If a winning combination that can move to the “advantageous section” is won in the next game when the resurrection lottery is not won, the advantageous section indicator can be lit at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of a specification that is an advantageous section in the “Restorability Producing State” but is not on the AT lottery,
(5-1) The number of AT games is not added even if the winning combination (for example, watermelon A) that can execute an AT addition lottery in “Restorability Producing State” is won, but the resurgence effect (success) is executed. When a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) is won in ("AT state"), the number of AT games can be added.
(6) Bonus in the case where “Battle Effect 3G + Restoration Effect (Failure) 1G” is scheduled to be executed as an effect at the end of the AT, and the Resurrection Effect (Success) is executed by winning the bonus in the Resurrection Effect Execution Game There is no extra number of AT games during the game, but there is an extra number of AT games during the bonus when the bonus effect is won in the battle production execution game (any of 3G) Can do. Moreover, the production | presentation tendency in a bonus may differ.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) In the case of having a gaming state A and a gaming state B as states relating to an AT that is an “advantageous section”
(1-1) Expected winning degree of the AT addition lottery is “gaming state A> advantageous state B” (the number of AT games is more likely to be added in the gaming state A than in the gaming state B or the AT additional game) a lot).
(1-2) The number of extras that can be added when winning a combination X in gaming state A is different from the additional number that can be added when winning a combination Y in gaming state A.
(1-3) The additional number that can be added when winning a combination X in the gaming state B is the same as the additional number that can be added when winning a combination Y in the gaming state B.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) When the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), after the second stop to before the third stop (C). Make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of “A <B <C” from the inconspicuous to the player.
(2) In the case of “Low Probability State” and “RT1” in which the AT has ended from the “AT in progress” state and the “RT1” state, the push order display device pushes when the winning combination is won. Although the forward navigation is displayed, the push navigation is not displayed on the effect display device (“???” is displayed).
(3) In a game in which a fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, when winning 18 (falling combination) is won at the third stop, the display is maintained in the same display mode as the display mode after the second stop. .
(4) When the start lever is operated in a situation where the initial process related to the display of the effect display device is not completed when the power supply is restored from the power interruption, rather than the completion of the initial process related to the display of the effect display device Push order navigation is executed with sound from the speaker (for example, “It is left!”) At the previous timing.
(5) Even if the player is in a state related to AT, which is highly profitable for the player, such as “specialized state of addition”, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is preferentially displayed when winning the fall combination.
(6) The “advantageous section” is maintained even if the faller wins a prize in the “advantageous section”.
(7) In a case where the falling combination is configured to be a push combination (determining whether or not to stop display depending on the push order), a winning combination (push order bell, etc.) that is not a falling combination is won and pushed. When navigation is performed and stopped in a pressing order different from the push order navigation, the display on the effect display device may be dimmed, but when the winning combination is a fallen combination, it is stopped in a pressing order different from the push order navigation. In such a case, the display on the effect display device does not turn dark (or does not turn dark on the display of the fall avoidance suggesting effect).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) When configured to shift to “RT3” and “AT ready state” after the end of BB related to BB with setting difference (similar to the first modification from the present embodiment).
(1-1) The winning combination is won by winning a winning combination with a high probability at “RT3” (100% winning or winning with a predetermined probability).
(1-2) Depending on the type of BB combination, the RT state to be shifted to after the end of the BB is made different, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (the combination for executing the addition lottery, addition) according to the combination that is likely to appear in any RT state The lottery winning probability and the number of AT extra games) are made different.
(1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (Replay probability is high), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3. The winning rate or the average number of added games is different.
(1-4) When bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 and promotion replay A and promotion replay B are included, the winning probabilities of promotion replay A and promotion replay B are RT1 and RT2. Is different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 are set so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay differ between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) There is a setting difference. After the BB ends, the state shifts to a dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT ready state”), and then shifts to the “additional special state” triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) It has 1 type BB-B1 and 1 type BB-B2, and after completion of 1 type BB-B1, it shifts to “RT3” and after 1 type BB-B2 ends, it shifts to “RT4” When configured as follows.
(1-1) “RT3” and “RT4” differ in the AT extra lottery execution mode (the role for executing the extra lottery, the extra lottery winning probability, and the number of AT extra games).
(1-2) The BB start effect relating to the type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start effect relating to the type 1 BB-B2 have different effect tendencies (the selection rate of the BB start effect having a high expectation is different).
(2) When the replay 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay 06 in the “AT ready state” and “RT3”, the process shifts to “RT4” and the treasure box loss effect is not executed. In “RT4”, a re-game player who is promoted to “RT3” is elected. In addition, when “RT4” is changed to “RT3”, the treasure chest opening addition effect is not executed even if the re-games -E1 to E3 are subsequently won.
(3) It has a plurality of types of BB roles, and even if the BB role is won, it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has won, and depending on the type of BB, The execution state of the AT addition lottery when the RT state is made different and the promoted regame player is won differs depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during the BB is made different depending on the type of BB (such as a gold treasure chest, a silver treasure chest, a copper treasure chest, etc.). Number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) There is a setting difference that was won during non-AT, and a ratio that became the same effect mode with a BB start effect related to BB with a setting difference won during AT and a start effect related to BB without a setting difference won during AT The ratio which becomes the same production | presentation aspect by the BB start production which concerns on BB, and the start production which does not have the setting difference BB won during non-AT differs.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) The setting value is suggested when BB without setting difference is won in the “normal section” rather than the probability that the effect suggesting the setting value is selected when winning the BB with setting difference in the “favorable section” The probability that a production is selected is higher.
(2) In the BB won during the non-AT, a different BB start effect is selected according to the setting difference. However, in the BB selected during the AT, the same BB start effect is selected regardless of the setting difference.
(3) The ratio at which the BB start effect is the same in the BB with a setting difference won during the AT and the BB without the setting difference won during the AT, and the BB with the setting difference won during the non-AT and the non-AT The ratio at which the BB start effect is the same effect mode is different from the BB without setting difference.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) When “Winning without setting difference (Winning rate with different winning rate depending on setting value) + BB” is selected, “Advantageous section indicator lighting + production B” that can be executed when winning with “No setting difference” is selected The probability of selecting “advantageous section indicator off + production A” that can be executed when winning a “combination with setting difference (combination with different winning rates depending on the set value)” is higher than the probability of { "At the time of the combination + BB" is an effect (for example, a battle effect) that praises the winning of the BB rather than an effect (for example, an effect that shifts to a stay stage where the user can stay in a high probability state). Is easier to implement}.
(2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, the game is configured to shift to a high probability state with 100%, and the allocation of the number of high secured obstacle games is “50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10% → 50G ", if 3G is selected, the battle is defeated, otherwise the battle is won. Also, the degree of expectation of the length of the number of highly probable games (whether 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who won the battle. Further, in the case of the above example, an effect of encouraging continuation with a high probability of 20G (an effect of encouraging whether it is 20 games or 50 games, and if successful, it becomes determinative that it is 50 games). .

<< Point 12 >>
(1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the “normal section”, and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the “advantageous section”, a predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) A predetermined freeze effect is more easily performed in the “normal section” than in the “advantageous section”.
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of a loss.

<<< Configuration applicable to this example >>>
A configuration applicable to the rotary type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. Any configuration described in detail below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. I will supplement what you may do.

<< Memory map configuration >>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, the configuration of a part of the memory map in the RAM (may be referred to as a first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) “set value data”: an area for data related to the number for managing the setting stage, (2) “external signal system data”: external signal output Area for storing related information, (3) “RAM checksum data”: data used in checksum calculation processing executed when power is turned on, calculated from data stored in RAM when power is turned off An area for storing the data and storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, “0”) in the checksum calculation process executed at power-on, (4) “control command buffer”: sub An area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control board side. (5) “Stack pointer temporary storage buffer”: Information used at the time of power-off recovery. An area for storing data stored in the pointer and storing information stored in the stack pointer at the time of power-off recovery, (6) “Unused area”: an area for storing an area not used for gaming ( 7) “Saved data 1 to saved data 8”: The areas are used in the order of RAM in which the saved data may be written to the maximum by design due to the CALL instruction, the PUSH instruction, or the like. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer by design is “7FF8H”, but when an unexpected failure (such as an unexpected power failure) occurs, it is higher than “7FF8H”. There is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates the address of. In that case, there is a possibility that the saved data may be stored beyond the area of “saved data 1 to saved data 8” that has been secured as an area of data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, data that does not affect the progress of the game (the effect is small) at an address (an address close to “7FF8H”) that may be indicated by the stack pointer when the unexpected failure occurs. (Data) is preferably stored. Specifically, by providing an address for storing “setting value data” at an address at least one address away from “saved data 1 to saved data 8” reserved as an area of data to be saved in advance. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to not only a person but also a game hall. In the figure, (5) “stack pointer temporary storage buffer” is data that is not used in a situation where a game is in progress after power-off recovery, and (4) “control command buffer” Is unlikely to affect the progress of the game even if the command cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. (3) “RAM checksum data” is used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is turned off. (2) “External signal system data” is data that is transmitted to the hall computer, and therefore has little influence on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) “setting value data” is data relating to a setting value that affects the game result. For example, if the setting value data is changed to a low setting value, a significant disadvantage is caused to the player. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the setting value is changed to a high setting value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur in the game hall. As described above, (1) “setting value data” is important data for normal progress of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the figure, (1) “set value data” is the highest order data (data stored in the high order address). In other words, (2) “external signal system data”, (3) “RAM checksum data” are included in addresses between (1) “setting value data” and (7) “save data 1 to save data 8”. ”, (4)“ control command buffer ”, (5)“ stack pointer temporary storage buffer ”, and (6)“ unused area ”. With such a configuration, even when a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, a RAM that is not used for gaming is provided. Thus, the gaming machine can be configured so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. (2) “External signal system data”, (3) “RAM checksum data”, (4) “Control command buffer”, (5) “Stack pointer temporary storage buffer”, (6) “Unused area” There is no problem even if the order of addresses for storing the five data is changed. For example, the order of “(3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)” from the higher address may be stored. Alternatively, it may be stored in order of “(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)” from the higher address. Further, (6) “unused area” may not be provided. Note that the data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) above cannot be inserted into game medals even when the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medals). Data that does not cause an error that cannot be input).

59 may be configured to store the following data in the area for storing “setting value data” shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG.
(A) Total score data: An area for storing data related to the number of game values that play the same role as the total number of game medals that can be thrown in an encased type revolving game machine that does not use actual game medals (total When the score data is stored in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may have 2 bytes)
(B) Minimum game time: Data for counting the minimum game time of one time (the counter value is subtracted for each interrupt process) (minimum game time of one time is 4.1 seconds)
(C) Acquired number counter at the time of BB operation: a counter for determining whether or not the condition (the number of payouts) at which BB ends is satisfied (corresponding to a value given a game value to the player) Subtract the value)
(D) Acquired number counter at the time of MB operation: a counter for determining whether or not the condition (the number of payouts) at which the MB ends is satisfied (corresponding to a value that gives a player a game value) Subtract the value)
It should be noted that a plurality of (A) to (D) and “set value data” may be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. Good. In the case where a plurality of data can be stored, each of the plurality of data is stored at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure so as to. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to a player or a game arcade. Furthermore, if the address is higher than at least the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is “7FF8H” by design, but an unexpected failure (such as an unexpected power failure) has occurred. In some cases, there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than “7FF8H”, but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player or the game hall.

<< Action related to replay stop display >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action in the winning game of the re-game applicable to the rotating game machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In addition, the structure illustrated below has illustrated the structure which can throw in a game medal even during the stop display of a re-game.

  First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing of (5) in the figure, a 2-bet ramp is used as an automatic bet operation related to the replay that has been stopped (when the replay is stopped, a bet is placed even if no game medal is inserted or no bet button is operated). D212 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on as an automatic bet operation related to the stopped replay. At substantially the same time, the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned on (the throwable lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

  Here, the characteristic points of the action in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed are configured to light up at substantially the same timing. When the throwable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert a game medal, the player recognizes that the start medal cannot be inserted by visually confirming that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the throw-in lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by making the throwable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 light substantially simultaneously as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50. It is possible to prevent the input and the operation of the start lever D50.

<Configuration 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which replay is stopped to the end of the game of the next game in which replay is stopped. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed, and it is possible to quickly notify that the re-game has been won. It can be smooth.

<Configuration 3>
The lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the fact that the replay has been stopped is at a timing before the lighting of the start lamp D180. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is notified that the replay has been won first, and then the start lamp D180 is turned on and the start lever D50 can be operated by the replay win. By notifying the player of this fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4>
The lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the fact that the replay has been stopped is at a timing before the lighting of the throwable lamp D300. In this way, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on first, so that the re-game is won first, and then the throw-in possible lamp D300 is turned on to notify that a game medal can be inserted. This makes it possible to grasp the game situation smoothly.

<Configuration 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is easy to recognize that the regame has been won, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation has been performed by the replay win. Since it is possible to notify early that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 6>
The re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the fact that the re-game is stopped and displayed before the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is easy to recognize that the regame has been won, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation has been performed by the replay win. Since it is possible to notify early that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 7>
The two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped are turned on after the two-bet lamp D212 is turned on and then the three-bet lamp D213 is turned on (the two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 are It does not light at the same time). By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation by the re-game winning has been performed, and the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 8>
The turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped and displayed is substantially the same. If a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are turned on, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state. It becomes possible to grasp the game state quickly.

<Configuration 9>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the fact that the re-game is stopped is indicated before the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the re-game is stopped and displayed. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is easy to recognize that the regame has been won, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation has been performed by the replay win. Since it is possible to notify early that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 10>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the fact that the re-game is stopped and displayed is before the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-game is stopped and displayed. In this way, by turning on the replay lamp D290 first, it is easy to recognize that the regame has been won, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic bet operation has been performed by the replay win. Since it is possible to notify early that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 11>
The lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed is substantially the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to quickly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<< Other functions 1 >>
Here, an operation different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the re-game winning game applicable to the spinning-reel game machine according to this example will be described in detail as the other operation 1.

<Configuration 12>
The two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 may always be lit from the bet operation timing related to the game in which replay is stopped to the end of the game of the next game in which replay is stopped. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize that an automatic betting operation has been performed by re-game winning, and can quickly notify that the re-game has been won. Can be made smooth.

<Configuration 13>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the fact that the replay is stopped and the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the replay is stopped and displayed may be configured substantially simultaneously. I want to inform the player that the automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2-bet lamp D212) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the gaming state, and the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (may be the lighting timing of the throwable lamp D300) It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by lighting up earlier.

<Configuration 14>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the fact that the re-game is stopped and the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the re-game is stopped may be configured substantially simultaneously. I would like to inform the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3-bet lamp D213) is kept on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming state, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is temporarily turned off. By doing so, the game state can be grasped smoothly, and the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-game lamp is stopped and displayed on the re-gaming lamp D290 (the lighting timing of the throwable lamp D300 may be used). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by lighting up earlier.

<Configuration 15>
When a re-game is won in a certain game and a re-game is also won in the next game of the certain game, the re-play lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game related to the certain game. The re-playing lamp D290 may continue to be lit until the end of the game after the certain game. In this way, by continuously lighting the re-game lamp D290, the player can be notified of the winning of the re-game quickly, and the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 16>
Various lamps such as a replay lamp D290, a 3-bet lamp D213, a 2-bet lamp D212, a 1-bet lamp D211, a start lamp D180, a throw-in enable lamp D300, etc., triggered by the third stop operation (or replay symbol stop display) The control may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute notification by a ramp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Configuration 17>
You may comprise so that the lighting timing of the replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300 may be substantially the same. By comprising in this way, it can alert | report clearly that it is lighting of the lamp | ramp based on the stop display of replay.

<Configuration 18>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost simultaneously, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 You may comprise so that it may light substantially simultaneously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals automatically bet when winning a re-game is three.

<Configuration 19>
Based on the fact that the replay is stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off substantially simultaneously, and thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are reactivated. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300 may be turned on substantially simultaneously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically betted when winning a replay is 3, and it is clear that the lamp is lit based on the replay stop display Can be notified.

<< Other effects 2 >>
Here, the operation different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the re-game winning game applicable to the spinning-reel game machine according to the present example will be described in detail below as the other operation 2 with reference to FIGS. Describe.

<Operation diagram 2 for replay stop display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the action applicable to the rotary type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

  First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212 Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the replay symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At substantially the same time, the replay lamp D290 is turned on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit at the timing (2) in the figure. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (4) in the figure, and then the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (5) in the figure, and the start lamp D180 and the ON are turned on. The enabling lamp D300 lights up substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operational diagram 3 regarding replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 is lit at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operational diagram 4 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and the start lamp D180 and the replay lamp D290 are turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. The throwable lamp D300 lights up. Thereafter, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing of (4) in the figure. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operational diagram 5 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 Are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the replay lamp D290 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously.

<Operational diagram 6 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 is turned on almost at the same time, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit at the timing (4) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operational diagram 7 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled at the timing (3) in the figure, and the replay lamp D290 and The start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operational diagram 8 for replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 Are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throwable lamp D300. Lights up at the same time.

<Operational diagram 9 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 is lit at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit at the timing (5) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 light up substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Operational diagram 10 at the time of replay stop display>
First, in a game won for replay (previous game is lost), two reels stop, one reel (also called final reel) rotates, one bet lamp D211 and two bet lamps D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-playing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the replay lamp D290 is lit at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

  Of the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, the same effects as those of the above-described configurations 1 to 19 can be created for those having the same configurations as the above-described configurations 1 to 19.

  The replay symbol stop display timing, the stop button operation timing, the replay lamp D290 turn-on / off timing, the 3-bet lamp D213 turn-on / off timing, the 2-bet lamp D212 turn-on / off timing, It is supplemented that the configurations relating to the lighting / extinguishing timing of the bet lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the throwable lamp D300 can be combined without any problem.

  In the above description, a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even during a replay stop display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game medal cannot be inserted during a replay stop display. It may be configured (applicable to all the configurations described above). In the case of such a configuration, the throwable lamp D300 remains off during the period when the replay is stopped.

  Further, the above-described “substantially simultaneous” is sufficient if it can be recognized as visually simultaneous when the player visually recognizes, and for example, it may be processing (lighting / extinguishing timing) executed within a period of executing interrupt processing 10 times. For example, there is no problem even if they are almost simultaneous.

<< Configuration related to bet button lamp >>
As a configuration related to the bet button lamp S50 in the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to the present example, the following configuration may be used.

  A process for enabling the bet button D220 from invalid is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M transmits a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control). The substrate M may be configured to transmit a command indicating that the bet button D220 is activated to the sub control substrate S side), and then the sub control substrate S transmits the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control substrate M. A process for turning on the bet button lamp S50 may be executed when a command for turning on is received. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 manages lighting / extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but the bet button D220 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on, and even if the player visually recognizes the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether or not the bet (bet button D220) is valid, It can be configured so that there is no discrepancy with the game situation.

<< Configuration related to stop button lamp >>
As a configuration related to the stop button lamp S60 in the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example, the following configuration may be used.

  A process for enabling the stop button D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) from invalid is executed by the process of the main control board M, and then the main control board M is the sub control board. A command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 (stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the enabling process has been executed) is transmitted to the S side {the main control board M is the stop button to the sub control board S side D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) may be configured to be transmitted}, and then the sub-control board S is the main control board. When the command for lighting the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M is received, the process for lighting the stop button lamp S60 is executed. It may be so that configuration. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 manages lighting / extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. Can reliably turn on the stop button lamp S60, and the player visually recognizes that the stop button lamp S60 is turned on and stops the button D40 (one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43). Even if it is determined whether or not the game is effective, the game situation on the main control board M side can be prevented from being discriminated.

<< Configuration related to reel unit RU applicable to this example >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the spinning-reel game machine according to this example includes each of the reels M50 (M51, M52, and M53) rotatably via a reel unit RU. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning cylinder gaming machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and an opening RU10 is formed. The three reels M51, M52, and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52, and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. Although details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top portion RU20 and a bottom portion RU30 with the opening RU10 interposed therebetween. By placing the bottom part RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of a base part BU which will be described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the base part BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end at the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU. Yes. The three through holes RU40 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<< pedestal part BU >>
The pedestal portion BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate shape. The end of the pedestal unit BU is attached to the left side, right side, and back of the back box with screws or the like (not shown), and the pedestal unit BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal portion BU is attached to the back box so as to extend in the horizontal direction. As described above, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal unit BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
A plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU10 are formed in the front end portion of the base portion BU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end portion. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the base portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

  Note that the numbers and positions of the through holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 only need to correspond to each other and be arranged along the horizontal direction, and it is only necessary that the reel unit RU can be stably placed on the base part BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU, or the reel unit may be configured by the screw hole BU10 (and screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU. You may comprise so that both RU and one reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, or right reel M53) may be attached to the base part BU.

<< Reel unit RU fixing method >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and the reels are arranged such that each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the screw hole BU10 of the corresponding pedestal portion BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through-hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position of the base part BU. In this way, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base part BU.

  The reel unit RU may be detachably attached using a detachable rivet, for example, a push rivet or the like in addition to the screw BS and a screwed member such as a screw or a bolt. It is only necessary that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engagement member, a locking member, or the like.

  In this example, the configuration in which the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal unit BU is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may fix (it fixes so that it may hang), and you may comprise so that the through-hole RU40 may be provided in the both-sides side part of the reel unit RU, and it may fix to the inside of a housing | casing with bis | screw BS. Even in such a configuration, the configuration related to the position of the screw BS and the fall position of the screw BS described in detail below (for example, the configuration related to the screw BS disposed at the position closest to the position where the front door DU opens and closes) ) Is applicable.

<< Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS >>
FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view from the back right side of the hopper H40, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view from the back left side of the hopper H40. In FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), an arrow indicating the movement of a screw BS described later is also shown. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are described in FIGS. 66A and 66B for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

  The hopper H40 (sometimes referred to as a main tank member) is a funnel-type tank molded from ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 includes a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to circulate, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. The The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medals inserted from the above-described medal insertion slot D170 are introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30. The hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as a hopper H40, a main tank member, a main tank unit, and the like.

  Further, the hopper H40 includes a hopper bottom H52, a right inclined portion H54, and a left inclined portion H56. The right inclined portion H54 is disposed on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medal introduced to the right side of the hopper H40 is guided by its own weight toward the hopper bottom portion H52 described later. The left inclined portion H56 is disposed on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides medals introduced on the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom portion H52 with its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is disposed so as to cover an upper portion of a substantially left half of a disk H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent the plurality of game medals from being connected and dropped at the hopper bottom H52, and to smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom H52.

  By providing the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, any game medal introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The medals guided by the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom H52. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores game medals inside the hopper H40.

  A disk H50 as a rotating body is disposed on the hopper bottom H52. The disk H50 is rotationally driven by the hopper motor H80 described above, and the game medal is discharged from the game medal outlet H60 by the rotation operation of the disk H50. In this way, medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal outlet H60.

<Discharge guide part H62>
Inside the front side wall H42, a discharge guide portion H62 is formed along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has a long shape and has an inclined surface H64 formed to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is disposed in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is positioned below the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed to be substantially constant, but is formed so as to expand slightly as it goes downward (from left to right).

  The discharge guide section H62 guides the game medals located above the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS before the game medals are stored in the hopper H40, and the game medals overflow from the hopper H40, and is stored in the hopper H40. This is a member for reducing medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. In this way, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing game medals inside the hopper H40, while the discharge guide portion H62 is used for storing game medals. It functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

  The left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left side toward the right side. That is, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all have a downward slope. The final target of the left inclined part H56 and the covering part H57 is the hopper bottom part H52, and the final target of the discharge guide part H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS, but by making the inclination the same, the overall hopper H40 The movement of game medals can be aligned from left to right.

  In the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62, a protruding wall H58 is provided so as to protrude upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64. The medals placed on the inclined surface H64 can be prevented from falling to the hopper bottom H52 by the protruding wall H58.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially quadrangular prism shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 in the upper part, and medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Removal of screw BS of reel unit RU >>
A front door DU is attached to the rotating type gaming machine so as to be openable and closable with respect to the back box (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side (left side as viewed from the player) of the front door DU as the center of rotation. For this reason, the right side of the front door DU (right side as viewed from the player) has the longest moving distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact with or collision with the back box occurs and propagates to the back box. Since an impact is generated on the right side of the spinning machine, the impact on the right side of the spinning machine is the largest, and on the left side of the spinning machine, the impact is likely to be gradually weakened.

  As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU with the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three locations on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is subjected to the greatest impact. For this reason, the right screw BS that is screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most easily loosened by an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right screw BS drops and falls. Further, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subjected to an impact, and may be loosened and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 is assumed to have a small impact, but there is a possibility that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of propagation of the shock and the usage time.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal paying device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged at the lower part of the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right screw BS among the three screws BS described above.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The right screw bis which has fallen reaches the inclined surface H64, and rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the right screw BS, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  In this way, even if the right screw BS is dropped due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS can be prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS can It is possible to prevent the rotation of the disk H50 from being hindered or to damage the disk H50, and to operate the hopper H40 stably.

  In the above-described example, only the right side screw BS is targeted. However, the hopper H40 is configured such that all of the three left side screw BSs, the center screw BS, and the right side screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. The reel unit RU may be positioned. Even if any screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front door DU that is easily affected by contact with the back box or collision is generated. A member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side as viewed from the player) may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when dropped.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, among the three screws BS described above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. In FIG. 67, the same components as those in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it falls freely downward (arrow 2A) as it is (without touching the inclined surface H64) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and moves along the inclined surface H64 by rolling on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the central screw BS (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  The right screw BS and the central screw BS that have fallen out are prevented from entering the hopper H40, the rotation of the disk H50 is prevented from being disturbed by the dropped screw BS, and the disk H50 is prevented from being damaged. It can be operated stably.

  In the above-described example, the right screw BS and the center screw BS are targeted. However, the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU are positioned so that the left screw BS is also located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Also good. Even if any screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As described above, it is preferable to form the protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has fallen and placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or higher than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when it falls onto the inclined surface H64. The screw BS can be prevented from dropping to the hopper bottom H52, and the screw BS can be prevented from obstructing or causing the operation of the disk H50.

  As described above, even when the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration caused by opening and closing of the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40, and the medal assistance By configuring so as to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the game hall can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right screw BS falls, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall H48 as viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The falling right screw BS can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64 by adopting a configuration in which the dropped right screw BS is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40.

  On the other hand, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right side (right side wall H480) may be used. In the hopper H400, a bottom opening H410 is formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480. When the right screw BS falls, the hopper H400 passes through the hopper H400, and further passes through the bottom opening H410. Stored in HS. Thus, by passing through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<< Extension part RU50 >>
In the above-described example, when the screw BS falls off, the screw BS falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is. On the other hand, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 65, an extension part EN may be provided below the reel unit RU and the base part BU. By providing the extension part EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it does not immediately drop, but after being guided by the extension part EN, it can be dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. Thus, the extension portion EN can match the position where the screw BS is attached and the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and can increase the degree of freedom of the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of Medal Auxiliary Tank HS >>
<Full-detection electrode through hole HS20>
As shown in FIG. 68, in the medal auxiliary tank HS, at least two full detection electrode through holes HS20 are formed on the back side surface. In addition, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection substrate CC (see FIG. 65) are provided at the lower part of the back of the back box. The two full detection electrodes DE have a long shape, extend parallel to each other and horizontally, and are arranged to protrude forward. The two full detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is disposed at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding full detection electrode through holes HS20 and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL (see FIG. 69C) of the stored game medals gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. FIG. 69C is a cross-sectional view showing a state where game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost part UL shown in FIG. 69C is a line (for example, an envelope) connecting the outlines of the game medals located in the uppermost part UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For the sake of simplicity, the uppermost portion UL is illustrated with a smooth curve). When a game medal stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS comes into contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE are conducted through a plurality of medals, the two full detection electrodes DE are interposed between the two full detection electrodes DE. An electrical circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the continuity detection substrate CC outputs a signal indicating that continuity is established between the two full detection electrodes DE. In this way, when game medals are stored up to the position of the two full detection electrodes DE, a medal full error can be detected.

  Note that the number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, and may be three or more. For example, in the case of providing three, in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, a new full detection electrode is provided below the two full detection electrodes, and the newly provided one A medal full error can be detected when the full detection electrode is electrically connected to one of the two full detection electrodes described above. Even when game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when game medals are stored biased to the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), a medal full error can be detected.

<< Bis BS material and medal material >>
The material of the screw BS can be magnetized and can be conducted. For example, it is formed of a steel material. In addition, the material of the medal cannot be magnetized and can be conducted. For example, it is formed of brass plated or stainless steel. With this configuration, even when the screw BS falls in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship Between Total Length BL of Screw BS and Distance EL Between Two Full Detecting Electrodes DE >>
The left screw BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the base BU. FIG. 69B is a front view showing the entire screw BS. As this screw BS, one having a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69B) shorter than the distance EL between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69A) is used (of the screw BS). Total length BL <Distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than between the full detection electrodes DE. Are not connected to the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS is not caught by the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. FIG. 69A is a plan view of the back side portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the full detection electrode DE protrudes into the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<< Relationship between the length HR of the bearing surface of the screw BS and the diameter ED of the full detection electrode DE >>
The radial length HR of the seat surface of the screw BS (see FIG. 69B) is shorter than the diameter ED (see FIG. 69A) of the full detection electrode DE (in the radial direction of the seat surface of the screw BS). Length HR <diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). By doing in this way, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS is not caught by one full detection electrode DE, and the screw Even when the BS is in contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be removed immediately, and the bis BS alone does not conduct by accident.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 69C, one full detection electrode DE of the two full detection electrodes DE (for example, the right full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69C) has already been stored. When it is in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the full detection electrode DE on the left side of FIG. 69C) and the screw BS are in temporary contact. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately detached from the full detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). The conduction circuit is not formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

  In this example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that accommodates all three reels has been described. However, even when the reel unit RU is a separate unit that separately accommodates each of the three reels, the screw BS Thus, the possibility that the screw BS is detached and the screw BS is detached similarly arises. For this reason, configurations such as the medal auxiliary tank HS and the screw BS can be similarly adopted.

<< Configuration of reel band >>
FIG. 70A is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70 (b) is a perspective view showing a state where the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70 (c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the cut M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70 (d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The “white seven” symbol is a bonus symbol, and “white seven, white seven, white seven” is stopped and displayed on the active line, and BB is started. The reel band MO has a thin plate-like long shape (band shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. Moreover, it has translucency and a design can be illuminated from the back by the light emitted from the rotator backlight.

  The reel band MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 are curved so as to face each other and are attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames having the same size, and the two frames are formed of a resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged in parallel with each other so that both centers are located on the same rotation axis. Further, the interval between the two frames is arranged to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by sticking the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames.

<Superimposed portion M58 and cut M59>
The reel band MO is formed such that the length in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO is slightly longer than the entire length of the reel frame MW. For this reason, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion where the reel band MO partially overlaps near the first end M55 and the second end M57 (overlapping portion M58) is generated. In this way, the reel band MO can be attached over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without causing a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel band MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55. When the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when the reel band MO is started to be pasted, it starts to be pasted from the second end M57 to the reel frame MW, and then the reel frame MW is reeled. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel band MO is pasted along the circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 toward the first end M55. The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the second end M57, and the pasting to the first end M55 is completed. When the reel band MO is pasted in this order, the first end M55 ends pasting in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 is placed on the reel band MO. The part M55 is overlapped.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be pasted from the first end M55 to the reel frame MW, and then the reel band MO is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50 while the reel band MO is moved to the first end. Affixing along the circumference of the reel frame MW from the M55 toward the second end M57, and finally, a reel band MO is affixed to the upper side of the first end M55, and the affixation is continued to the second end M57. End. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the second end M57 is finished in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end M57 is placed on the reel band MO. M57 is overlapped.

  Here, the reel band MO starts to be pasted from the first end M55 to the reel frame MW, and then the second end M57 is pasted in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the reel band MO is placed on the reel band MO. When the second end M57 is overlapped, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the air contacts the cross section of the second end M57 (the air resistance is large). Then, air easily enters between the second end M57 and the lower reel band MO, and the reel band MO in the vicinity of the second end M57 is gradually peeled off.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO is started to be pasted from the second end M57 to the reel frame MW, and then the first end M55 is pasted in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the first end M55 is overlaid, when the game is executed and the reel M50 is rotated, the second end M57 is overlaid on the reel band MO described above. In comparison with the first end M55, the air is less likely to contact the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is small), the air is less likely to enter between the first end M55 and the lower reel band MO, The reel band MO in the vicinity of the first end M55 is in a state where it is difficult to peel off.

  From the above, when the reel band MO is stuck to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO starts to be stuck to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 is overlapped on the reel band MO after being pasted in the direction.

<Various errors>
Thus, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapping portion M58 is formed between the first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57, and the first end portion M55 or the second end portion M57. A cut M59 is formed by any one of the end portions M57. Since the reel frame MW described above is formed of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. Further, there are cases where an error occurs due to deformation when assembling the reel frame MW. Furthermore, since the reel band MO is flexible, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is attached in a state where the reel band MO is distorted or the size of the reel frame MW ( In some cases, the outer periphery is attached with a slightly different design value. When a large symbol (for example, “white seven”) is positioned on the reel band MO on the lower side of the overlapping portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is desired because of these various errors. It is also assumed that the large symbol is covered by the upper reel band MO because the upper reel band MO of the overlapping portion M58 overlaps with the large symbol when the position deviates from the position.

  In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol depending on the gaming state, and when the bonus symbol is arranged near the cut M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol or When the bonus symbol is stopped, the break M59 may be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When various errors as described above occur, it is assumed that not only the symbol but also the shift of the cut line M59 and the symbol position are caused to be visually recognized by the player. When the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, since it is a symbol combination that is highly profitable for the player, the player will pay attention to the bonus symbol with joy. If the user sees a shift in the position of the symbol, there is a possibility that the pleasure that the symbol combination as a bonus symbol is stopped and displayed is reduced.

<Bonus design>
In order to prevent this, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at a position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of a symbol (such as a bonus symbol) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is greater than LL. A short symbol (length SL in the longitudinal direction) is arranged at a position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

  Thus, even if various errors occur by arranging the symbols with a short length in the longitudinal direction at positions closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and the symbol can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Furthermore, even when the above-described various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the shift of the cut line M59, the shift of the symbol position, and the like. In the figure, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bell symbol (the symbol that can constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the bell) and the length in the longitudinal direction of the cherry symbol (the symbol that can constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry) Although shown as the same SL, if the length of the bonus symbol (white seven) is shorter than the length LL, the length of the bell symbol is different from the length of the cherry symbol in the longitudinal direction. There is no problem. In addition, the symbols arranged in the vicinity of the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may not be a bonus symbol. For example, a replay symbol (a symbol combination that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to replay). Or a watermelon symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon) may be arranged in the vicinity of the cut line M59. Further, in this example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) is compared with the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (for example, bell symbol) located near the cut line M59. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The length in the short direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) may be longer than the length in the short direction of the symbol (for example, bell symbol) located in the vicinity of the cut line M59.

  In the example described above, the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (such as a bonus symbol) is LL, and the length SL in the longitudinal direction of the symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL. The arrangement of the symbols was determined by comparing the two, but the length in the short direction (the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LT, and the short length of the symbols is shorter than the length in the short direction. The arrangement of symbols may be determined by comparison with the direction length ST.

  The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the symbol that protrudes most upward along the longitudinal direction and the portion of the symbol that protrudes most downward. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the short-side direction are the lengths of differences between the symbol portion that protrudes most upward and the symbol portion that protrudes most downward in the short-side direction.

<For small roles>
In addition to bonus symbols, watermelon symbols, cherry symbols, and other symbols that are not displayed on the active line depending on the operation timing of the stop button, in other words, they are placed more than the maximum number of sliding frames. A symbol with at least one location (a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be missed, etc.) may also be a symbol subject to eye-catching, and the symbol that the player wants to visually recognize It is. Also, in a game where a rare role has been won, there may be cases where the winning of the rare role is not notified before the stop button is operated, and even in such a case, the player wants to win the rare role, so the rarest In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that makes it easy to acquire a combination (the most profitable for the player). There are some gaming machines that have a lot of winning combinations, such as a single payout number when winning, and in such a case, the stop button operation timing (operating operation that is most profitable for the player) In many cases, the stop button is operated. It should be noted that operating the stop button at the stop button operation timing (operation mode) that is most profitable for the player may be referred to as an optimal gaming method.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when the game is executed by the optimum game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the effective lines are the left reel upper stage, middle reel upper stage, right reel upper stage (upper straight line), left reel middle stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel middle stage (middle straight line), Left reel lower stage, middle reel lower stage, right reel lower stage (lower straight line), left reel upper stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel lower stage (lower right straight line), left reel lower stage, middle reel middle stage, right reel upper stage (upward straight line) ), And the prescribed number is three. In addition, as a rare role, there are a watermelon role and a cherry role, and when the watermelon role wins, “Watermelon / Watermelon / Watermelon” is displayed in a straight line on the active line, and the cherry role wins Is configured such that “cherry, any, any” (any indicates that any symbol may be displayed) is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the active line. Further, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are rare, the symbol has at least one location that is spaced apart by more than the maximum number of sliding frames.

  FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. Is arranged. When a player wins a rare role, the player often operates a stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare role and easily win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be won by playing with the above-described optimal game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, it stops between 3 frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the upper stage to the timing when the cherry symbol is located in the lower stage By operating the buttons, you can win if you win both the watermelon and cherry roles. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimum game method), the range of nine frames from the upper part of the cherry symbol to the lower part of the watermelon symbol is the range that can be stopped and displayed. Thus, even when any range of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (any of the nine stop display modes), the position away from the first end M55 and the second end M57 (There are no cuts M59 near the symbols placed on the two watermelon frames, and there are no cuts M59 near the symbols placed two frames below the cherry.) It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing a shift in the position of the symbol or the symbol.

  As shown in the figure, when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to win the rare role, a symbol that can be stopped is displayed in the vicinity of the first end M55 and the second end M57. It is possible to prevent the first end M55 and the second end M57 from being located at positions where frequent stop display is performed on the reel. Even in the case where there is a deviation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the deviation of the cut M59 or the deviation of the position of the symbol.

  In this example, the number of steps for one reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336/20 = 16 remainder 16, there are 16 frames of 17 steps (symbols) and 4 frames of 16 steps (symbols) as 20 frames (symbols). The reel is structured. In addition, since it is better and better to configure the cut line M59 so that it is not visible to the player as much as possible, the frame (symbol) adjacent to the cut line M59 should be 16 steps with a relatively small number of steps. Is preferred.

  In addition, it is not necessary to insert and pay out substantial game medals used in a general swing type gaming machine as a configuration of the spinning type gaming machine in this example, and use a pseudo-game media that is converted into data. It may be configured to allow the game to proceed. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the revolving game machine is increased by the amount that does not require insertion / withdrawal of a substantial game medal (for example, a game medal insertion opening Or having no payout opening, and the front door and back box are integrated, etc., to close the gap where foreign objects are inserted), reducing the risk of unauthorized gaming medals being used, It can be configured to improve the security against such illegal acts (so-called goto acts) (sometimes referred to as an encapsulated revolving game machine). In addition, it is supplemented that the configuration of the encapsulated spinning cylinder game machine is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the credit number display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) are collected as one total score, and the main control board M and the payout control are combined. The total score increase / decrease process and the display process may be executed on the board H (also referred to as game value control board or game value control means) or other board.

In addition, it corresponds to a substantial game medal used in a general swing type game machine, and has a “score” as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game with an encapsulated type game machine. It may be configured. The “score” may be referred to as “score information”, “score score”, “score information”, “game value”, and “game value information”. A physical game medal that physically exists can be handled and handled directly by the player. On the other hand, in the encased type of spinning machine, the player can advance the game without directly handling the actual game medal. The score is not a substantial game medal but a pseudo game medium that is converted into data so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. The “credit” is a score for temporarily storing a betable state or a payable state among the scores, and is data managed mainly by the main control board M. Further, the “total score” is all the scores that can be input to the encapsulated spinning machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The “total score” corresponds to the number of game medals placed on a medal tray of a general revolving game machine using substantial game medals. In addition, when applying the configuration of the encapsulated spinning cylinder game machine to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as “game medal” in this specification is referred to as “score”, “score information”, “ There is no problem handling it as “score”, “score information”, “game value”, “game value information”, etc., and “score”, “score information”, “score”, “score information” as appropriate There is no problem in naming them as “game value” and “game value information”. It is not necessary to have “credit”. It is also possible to replace the credit number display device as a total score display device.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player is configured to have the state during AT, etc., and in the state during AT (so-called AT), the push order navigation is executed, thereby the state advantageous to the player. Although the fun of the game is improved, the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing AT is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration of a spinning machine that can execute AT different from the configuration of the present embodiment will be described as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment in the figure is step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second). That is, after the conditional device number management process described above is executed in step 1450, step 4100 (second) is executed. 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a rotation start freeze execution determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550.

  In step 1750, after executing the above-described AT state start control process, in step 4200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a stop-time freeze execution determination process to be described later. Transition. Although details will be described later, in the second embodiment, the freeze occurs when the reel starts rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel stops (when the final reel stops or when the third reel stops). (The reel does not start rotating for a predetermined time, and a bet operation relating to the next game for a predetermined time cannot be executed).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the rotation start freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT has newly changed from the game to the “AT state”. Here, “newly in the AT state” means that the state related to the AT becomes the “AT state” for the first time after winning the AT lottery (may also be referred to as the first AT hit), As an example, (1) BB wins in “high probability state” → shift to “advantageous BB internal state” → BB symbol (bonus symbol) stops and transitions to “advantageous BB state” → BB Ends and newly transitions to “AT state”, (2) If the cherry is won in “High probability state”, the AT lottery is won by 1/2, and after winning the AT lottery, the sign state { It is a state related to AT that gives players a sense of expectation regarding whether or not they have won the AT lottery, and even if they are not won the AT lottery related to the winning of Cherry, “Gase sign state” which is the production mode (background production, etc.) If it is configured to shift to “It may be configured to have a｝”, the cherry is won in the “high probability state”, and the AT lottery based on the winning of the cherry is won. A game state transition such as a new transition to the “AT state” occurs because the predetermined number of games that are the end condition of the “precursor state” has been executed, corresponds to “newly in the AT state”. . On the other hand, as an example of a case where it does not correspond to “newly in AT state”, (1) staying in “AT state” → AT counter value becomes 0, so “AT continued battle state” { Transition to “a state where there is a possibility of transitioning to“ AT state ”again” → transition to “AT state” again, (2) winning BB in “AT state” → “ The game state transition such as “Transition to advantageous BB internal state” → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, “Advantageous BB state” is transitioned to → BB is terminated, and “AT state is reentered”. Will not fall under "AT state during."

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that will be executed when reel rotation starts by turning on) ) Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the AT start freeze execution command (command to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side receives the command. Then, the AT start effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). Even in the case of No in step 4102, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). The freeze illustrated in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if it is configured to have various types of freezes (execution conditions and execution time).

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second), that is, in step 1568 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M has the AT start freeze execution flag turned on. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1568 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag in step 1570 (second). Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a freeze execution timer (a decrement timer, which is a decrement timer, which is executed when the “AT state” is newly entered) and “AT The timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze that is executed when the “medium state” is completed is the start freeze execution time (in this example, 5 seconds, and is now in the “AT state”) The execution time of the freeze executed in this case is set to start the timer, and the process proceeds to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has become zero. In the case of Yes in step 1574 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the execution time of the freeze at the start of the “AT state” starts. Note that if the answer is No in step 1568 (second), the process proceeds to step 1552.

  As described above, the second embodiment is configured such that a freeze (sometimes referred to as a freeze at the start of AT) is executed when the “AT state” is newly started, and details will be described later. However, during the freeze execution, the AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of the AT is 5 seconds. However, the execution time can be changed without any problem, and is preferably set according to the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. Has been. In this way, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, to be relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, it is possible to enhance the player's gaming motivation It can be a high gaming machine.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the stop-time freeze execution determination process according to the subroutine of Step 4200 (second) in FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value is newly 0 in the game. “AT counter value is newly 0” is a case where the AT counter value is “1 → 0” in a situation where the AT counter value is subtracted, such as “AT in progress”. This does not include the case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state relating to AT is “normal gaming state”.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 4202, the process proceeds to step 4206. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4202, in step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous section remaining game number counter value has newly become 0 in the game. “Advantageous section remaining game number counter value is newly set to 0” means that the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is subtracted from the advantageous section remaining game number counter value such as “AT state”. This is a case of “1 → 0”, and does not include the case where the advantageous section remaining game number counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the state relating to AT is “normal game state”. If Yes in step 4204, the process proceeds to step 4206. Next, in step 4206, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (which is a decrement timer, which is executed when the “AT state” is newly set) and the “AT state”. Freeze execution time at the end (in this example, 3 seconds, the freeze that is executed when the “AT state” ends) Set the execution time) and start the timer. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command, so that the sub control board S side receives the command. Then, the AT end effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to step 4210. Next, in step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is zero. In the case of Yes in step 4210, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the end of the “AT state” ends. In the case of No in step 4204, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3500).

  Next, FIG. 76 is an AT start effect execution image diagram in the second embodiment. In the figure, an example of a case in which a power interruption does not occur during execution of an AT start effect and a case in which a power interruption occurs will be described in detail.

  First, in (a) in the figure, a detailed description will be given of a case where a power interruption does not occur during execution of an AT start effect. First, when the start lever D50 relating to a game in which the state relating to the AT is newly set to the “AT state” is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Is done. Also, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, “warp execution!” Is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect exclusively for executing the AT start effect is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds. Thereafter, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display of “Warp execution!” Is erased in the effect display device S40. Note that the state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the freeze execution, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 for one second as the effect mode of the AT start effect. Thereafter, when 5 seconds elapse from the start of the freeze execution, the execution of the freeze is finished, the execution of the AT start effect is finished, and the rotation of the reel is started. When the execution of the AT start effect is finished, the display of “AT50G START !!!!” on the effect display device S40 is deleted, and the AT effect is displayed from the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect. It will be switched to possible background effects. Also, when the above-described push order navigation is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts rotating and effects The display device S40 displays the push order navigation, (2) the freeze starts execution, the freeze ends when 5 seconds have passed, the reel starts rotating, the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, and the effect display device S40 It may be configured such that the push navigation is displayed. With this configuration, even when the reel rotation start timing becomes later than the conventional timing due to the execution of freeze, the player erroneously operates the stop button corresponding to the pressing order different from the correct pressing order. Can be prevented.

  Next, the case where a power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail in FIG. First, when the start lever D50 relating to a game in which the state relating to the AT is newly set to the “AT state” is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started and the freeze is executed. Is done. Also, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, “warp execution!” Is displayed for 1 second on the effect display device S40 (while the AT start effect is being executed, a background effect exclusively for executing the AT start effect is always executed). . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and the freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time when the power is off). Thereafter, one second has elapsed from the start of the freeze, and the display of “Warp execution!” Is erased in the effect display device S40. Note that the state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. Thereafter, when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the freeze, a power failure occurs (for example, a power failure occurs at a game arcade). Thereafter, when the power is restored, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 for 3 seconds, and the freeze is still executed. After that, when the total time from the start of the freeze, except when the power is turned off, is 5 seconds, the freeze is finished and the AT start effect is finished, and the reel starts to rotate. It will be. In this way, in this example, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of freeze (during execution of the AT start effect) and then returns from the power interruption, the execution time of the freeze is from the state before the occurrence of the power interruption. It will be executed continuously. As an example, when the freeze execution time is 5 seconds and the power is cut off 1 second after the start of the freeze execution, the freeze is executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored. If the power is cut off after 3 seconds from the start, the freeze is executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

  Also, the execution time of the AT start effect is the same as the execution time of the freeze, and when the power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and then returns from the power interruption, the execution time of the AT start effect is It will be executed continuously from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect is different between the case where the power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power interruption does not occur. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect, When power is not cut off, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 at the timing when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of execution of the AT start effect, while the AT start effect is being executed. In the case where the power interruption occurs, “AT50G START !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40 after returning from the power interruption regardless of the occurrence timing of the power interruption. The display “AT50G START !!!!” may be referred to as an AT start game number display. In the same figure, as the AT start game number display, it is shown that the AT remaining game number at the start of AT (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games, but the display mode is However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the “advantageous BB state” executed immediately before the transition to the AT state is performed and the lottery can be executed by adding the number of AT games, It is configured to display the number of AT remaining games obtained by adding the number of remaining games acquired in the lottery in addition to the number of games on the AT initial game number 50 games on the effect display device S40 as an AT start game number display. Also good. As an example, when the AT remaining game number of 30 games is acquired by adding the number of AT games in the “advantageous BB state” by lottery, “AT80G START !!” is displayed as the AT start game number display. May be. In the figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but the AT end effect is similarly produced in the case of the AT end effect when the power is cut off during the execution of the AT end effect and when the power is cut off. (For example, in the case where the power interruption does not occur during the execution of the AT end effect, “AT end GET OO” is 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect.) On the other hand, if the power is cut off during execution of the AT end effect, “AT end GET OO” is displayed after the return from the power cut regardless of the timing of the power cut. Also, an effect that is displayed during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and an effect that is displayed immediately after the power is turned off when the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect. If this is the case, the display is not limited to the number of games at the start of AT, and there is no problem as long as the game can be smoothly progressed by being visible to the player.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the state is newly shifted to the AT state and when the AT state ends. The AT start effect is executed during the freeze execution when the state is newly shifted to the AT state, and the AT end effect is executed during the freeze execution when the AT state ends. In such a configuration, if a power interruption occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, the display is scheduled to be displayed from a predetermined timing in the AT start effect or the AT end effect after the power interruption is restored. By configuring the display so that it is displayed immediately after the power is restored, even if an unintentional power outage (for example, a power failure at a game arcade) occurs during the freeze, By configuring so that the player can immediately display information necessary for grasping the game situation, a situation in which the player cannot grasp the game situation can be prevented.

  In the second embodiment, it is configured that the freeze can be executed when the state is newly shifted to the AT state and when the AT state ends, but the execution mode of the freeze is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed at the start of BB, at the end of BB, or the like, or may be configured to be executed based on a winning condition device or a staying gaming state.

In addition, from the configuration related to the freeze in the above-described spinning cylinder gaming machine according to this example,
Freeze execution period when power failure does not occur during freeze execution = A
Freeze execution period until power failure occurs when power failure occurs during freeze execution = B
Freeze execution period after a power failure occurs when a power failure occurs during freeze execution = C
If
A = B + C
It is comprised so that.

  When the freeze related to the AT start effect ends, the reel acceleration process described above is executed.

<<<<< Configuration 2 applicable to this example >>>>
A configuration applicable to the rotary type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below. Any configuration described in detail below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations detailed below may be applied. I will supplement what you may do.

<<< Configuration of lamp unit >>>
First, with reference to FIG. 77 and FIG. 78, a detailed description will be given of a configuration relating to lighting of a lamp unit (a general term for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example.

  FIG. 77 is a lamp unit lighting configuration image. In the same figure, the structure regarding lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the items shown in the column of element 1 are not limited to only eight items “red” to “no color”. First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements 1 to 6 as elements relating to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 is a lighting color, and “red”, “blue”, “green”, “white”, “red + green”, “blue + green”, “blue + white”, “no color” 8 Various kinds of lighting colors are included as element 1. The lamp unit according to this example is composed of a plurality of LEDs. When the lighting color is “red”, it indicates that all LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is “red + blue”. ”Indicates that M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue among N LEDs, which is the total number of LEDs (N = M + L). . Note that the combination of the order of the LEDs that are lit in red and the LEDs that are lit in blue may be only one or a plurality of combinations. A plurality of lighting colors such as “red + blue 1” and “red + blue 2” may be provided). Further, “no color” indicates light extinction (non-lighting), and is a lighting color selected when the light is always off. As described above, the number of items constituting the elements 1 to 6 in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and the element 1 has three or more colors such as “red + blue + green”. There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combined lighting color.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, which is “0.1 seconds”, “0.2 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “1 second”, “3 seconds”, “always”, “no light” Seven types of lighting times are included as element 2. Note that “always” is a lighting time selected when the light is always on, and “no light” is a lighting time selected when the light is always off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 is a light-off time, which is “0.1 second”, “0.2 second”, “0.3 second”, “1 second”, “3 seconds”, “always”, “no light off” Seven types of turn-off times are included as element 3. Note that “always” is a lighting time that is selected when the light is always off, and “no light is off” is a light-off time that is selected when the light is always light.

<Element 4>
The element 4 is a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is configured by combining the lighting time as the element 2 and the extinguishing time as the element 3, and “lights for 0.1 seconds → 0.1 seconds. "Lights off", "Lights for 0.1 second-> Lights off for 0.3 seconds", "Lights on for 0.2 seconds-> Lights off for 0.3 seconds", "Lights on for 1 second-> Lights off for 0.1 seconds", "Lights on for 3 seconds-> 0. Seven types of lighting time patterns of “3 seconds off”, “always on”, and “always off” are included as element 4. As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of “lighting for 0.1 seconds → lighting for 0.1 seconds”, the lighting time of “0.1 seconds” as the element 2 and the lighting time of “0.1 seconds” as the element 3 It is configured by combining time. Note that “always on” is a lighting time pattern that is selected in the case of always lighting, and is configured by combining the “always” lighting time that is element 2 and the unlighting time that is “no light extinction” that is element 3. Has been. Further, “always off” is a lighting time pattern selected in the case of always turning off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of “no lighting” that is element 2 and the lighting time of “always” that is element 3 Has been.

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining a lighting color as the element 1 and a lighting time pattern as the element 4. In other words, the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color as the element 1, the lighting time as the element 2, and the extinguishing time as the element 3. In the figure, for the convenience of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting elements are shown as the lighting element contents, and the identification elements assigned to the lighting element contents are shown as the lighting element types. As a lighting element,
Lighting element type a: “0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off”
Lighting element type b: “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off”
Lighting element type c: “0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type d: “0.1 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type e: “0.2 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type f: “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type g: “White lighting for 1 second → Lights off for 0.1 second”
Lighting element type h: “1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 second off”
Lighting element type i: “3-second green lighting → 0.3 second off”
Lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”
Lighting element type k: “Always red”
Lighting element type l: “Always light blue”
Lighting element type m: “Always green”
Lighting element type n: “Always white lighting”
Lighting element type o: “always red + green lighting”
Lighting element type p: “always blue + green lighting”
Lighting element type q: “Always blue + white lighting”
Lighting element type r: “always off (no color)”
18 kinds of lighting elements are provided as element 5. As an example of the lighting element, in the case of “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off”, element 1 “red” and element 4 “0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second off” A lighting time pattern (as described above, the lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time and a light-off time) is combined. Further, “always red + green lighting” is configured by combining “red + green” that is element 1 and “always lighting” that is element 4. Further, “always off (no color)” is configured by combining “no color” as element 1 and “always off” as element 4.

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or a plurality of lighting elements as the element 5. In the figure, for the convenience of explanation, the specific content of the lighting pattern is shown as the lighting pattern content, and the identification elements distributed for each lighting pattern content are shown as the lighting pattern type. As lighting pattern,
Pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”
Pattern 2: “b → b → b → b”
Pattern 3: “a → b → a → b”
Pattern 4: “a → a → g → g”
Pattern 5: “g → f → j”
Pattern 6: “i → h → b”
Pattern 7: “g → f → b”
Pattern 8: “i → j → g”
Pattern 9: “g → g → g”
Pattern 10: “k”
Pattern 11: “l”
Pattern 12: “m”
Pattern 13: “n”
Pattern 14: “o”
Pattern 15: “p”
Pattern 16: “q”
Pattern 17: “r”
17 types of lighting patterns are provided as element 6. As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a → a → a → a”, the element 5 “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” is repeated four times. In the case of pattern 8 “i → j → g”, the lighting element type i: “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” is executed, and then the lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0 .3 seconds off ”and the lighting element type g:“ 1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off ”is executed. The lamp unit may be turned on by further combining lighting patterns, such as pattern 1 → pattern 4, or “pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 → pattern 4 → pattern 1 →... “Pattern 1 → Pattern 4” may be turned on repeatedly until the lighting end condition is satisfied. Note that the lighting end condition may be satisfied when a game situation such as a predetermined error cancellation is changed, or may be configured when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of lighting elements of element 5, The lighting element of is composed of a combination of the lighting color of element 1 and the lighting time pattern of element 4, and the lighting time pattern of element 4 is composed of a combination of the lighting time of element 2 and the lighting time of element 3 Has been.

  In addition, although it explained in full detail that it was comprised from the element 1-the element 6 as a structure which concerns on lighting of a lamp unit, it is not limited to this, The number of elements may be increased / decreased, The element 1-element 6 May be changed (for example, the element 1 is turned on).

  Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a situation-specific notification mode. In the figure, a lighting pattern of a lamp unit (also referred to as a lamp unit lighting pattern) and a lighting mode of a rotating back lamp S30 (also referred to as a back lamp lighting mode) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. And an example of the configuration of each game situation regarding the sound output from the speaker S20 (also referred to as speaker sound). It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is only a part of the excerpt. For example, the lighting pattern executed during BB execution is not limited to only one type of pattern 7, but the type of BB (conditions related to BB) Depending on the type of device) and the gaming state won for BB, the lighting pattern may be different, and in one BB, a lighting mode (lighting cycle) combining a plurality of lighting patterns is repeatedly executed until BB ends. It supplements that it may constitute so. Further, as an example of the error, a medal empty error is illustrated as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be different depending on the type of error. In all of the configurations 1 to 6, in the normal game (no error is occurring, not immediately after the power is turned on, the standby screen is not displayed, the setting check mode is not set, and the setting change mode is not set, The lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed) is any one of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. Or a combination of one or more. In addition, since it has comprised so that it may have various game states, such as a low probability state and an AT state state, during a normal game, you may make the lighting pattern of the lamp unit which can be selected according to a game state differ. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific gaming state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific gaming state. The power-on state is a state from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses (immediately after the power is turned on).

<< Configuration 1 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively small light amount (light amount smaller than the normal light amount) Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during the occurrence of a medal empty error until error cancellation (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: A dedicated sound is output for a specified time when the power is turned on.
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always green)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting confirmation mode <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” is repeated three times)
Back lamp lighting mode: extinguished Speaker sound: dedicated sound during setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.2 second blue + green light → 0.3 second light off” → “0.1 second blue light → 0.1 second Off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above. In addition, you may comprise so that the effect performed at the time of power activation may differ with the effect performed before the power failure occurred, and the game state before the power failure occurred.

  As in Configuration 1, it is configured so that only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the occurrence of an error such as when a medal empty error occurs and during the normal game, and as the lighting color constituting the lighting pattern The red color is used when a medal empty error occurs, while the red color is not used during normal games (the predetermined lighting color is selected only when an error occurs), so that the player or manager can The case where an error has occurred and the case where no error has occurred can be easily discriminated, so that the business of the game hall and the progress of the game can be made smooth. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns immediately after power-on and during normal games, the player or manager can easily distinguish between power-on and normal games It is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, there is no misunderstanding that an error has occurred in spite of a normal game, the player can proceed with the game without stress, and the administrator can clearly identify the gaming machine in which the error has occurred. It becomes. In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns for the lamp unit between the standby screen display and the normal game, the player and the administrator can easily display the standby screen and the normal game. It is possible to discriminate, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, while the standby screen is displayed, power consumption due to the use of a flashy lighting pattern can be suppressed even though the player is not playing a game. In addition, by configuring the lamp unit to select different lighting patterns during the setting check mode and during normal games, it is easy for players and administrators to switch between the setting check mode and normal games. It is possible to discriminate, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, an unintended setting check mode can be immediately determined by the administrator, and an unintended setting check mode can be quickly determined, and even if the setting key switch is forgotten, it can be detected. can do. In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns for the lamp unit between the setting change mode and the normal game, it is easy for the player or administrator to change between the setting change mode and the normal game. It is possible to discriminate, and it is possible to smoothly operate the game hall and progress the game. In addition, a setting change mode that is not intended by the administrator can be immediately determined, and a setting change mode that is not intended can be quickly determined. In addition, by configuring different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit between the BB execution and the normal game (the state where the BB is not being executed), the player or the administrator can execute the BB execution and the normal game. Medium (a state where BB is not being executed) can be easily determined, and the player or manager can clearly determine the game situation.

  In addition, as described above, the difference between the occurrence of an error relating to the lamp unit and the normal game, the difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the difference between the display of the standby screen and the normal game, setting The difference between the confirmation mode and the normal game, the difference between the setting change mode and the normal game, the difference between the BB execution and the normal game, and the lighting colors (elements not used during the normal game) 1), or may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a light-off time (element 3) that is not used during a normal game. Alternatively, it may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during a normal game, or may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during a normal game. And it may be configured to have unused lighting patterns (element 6) during normal game.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during medal empty error until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Waiting for standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights in a dedicated pattern while the standby screen is displayed (flashes)
Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.2 second blue + green light → 0.3 second light off” → “0.1 second blue light → 0.1 second Off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 3 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (Repeat “red for 0.1 seconds → turn off for 0.1 seconds” four times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during medal empty error until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen is displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white light → 0.1 second light off” → “0.2 second blue + green light → 0.3 second light off” → “3 second green light → 0.3 second light off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (always red)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 4 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during medal empty error until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Waiting for standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second Off ”→“ 0.1 seconds blue light on → 0.1 seconds off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second blue lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second Off ”→“ 0.1 seconds blue light on → 0.1 seconds off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off” )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above. The warning sound output from the speaker when a medal empty error occurs and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and setting change mode are the same warning sound, and a medal empty error occurs separately from the warning sound. During the setting check mode, a voice message saying “A medals empty error is occurring” is output from the speaker, and during the setting check mode, it is output from the speaker. It may be configured to output from a speaker. Similarly, for an error different from the medal empty error, a warning sound and a voice “00 error in progress” may be output from the speaker.

<< Configuration 5 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during medal empty error until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: lighting → extinguishing (lights up when normal game is in progress)
Speaker sound: No output <Displaying standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting confirmation mode <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("white lighting for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above.

<< Configuration 6 >>
<Medal empty error is occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (Repeat “red for 0.1 seconds → turn off for 0.1 seconds” four times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light Speaker sound: Loops a dedicated sound during medal empty error until error is canceled (repeated playback)
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <Waiting for standby screen>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <In setting check mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” → “White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting confirmation mode <In setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” → “White lighting for 1 second → Off for 0.1 seconds”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Normal lighting level Speaker sound: Dedicated sound in setting change mode <BB running>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 ("white lighting for 1 second → off for 0.1 seconds" → "0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off" → "3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds Off ”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light Speaker sound: Loop dedicated sound during BB execution (repeated playback)
It is configured as described above.

  In the figure, six types of configurations 1 to 6 are illustrated, but the configuration is only an example, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, the back lamp lighting mode, and the sound output from the speaker for each game situation May be combined from each configuration or may be changed in any way. In addition, regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, the difference between the error occurrence and the normal game related to the lamp unit, the difference between immediately after turning on the power and the normal game, the display of the standby screen and the normal game Differences between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and differences between the BB execution and the normal game are as follows. It is preferable that any one (see FIG. 77) is selected so that one that is not selected during normal game is selected.

  Also, in the figure, only the medal empty error is illustrated as an error, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display determination error and the door opening error are also related to the lamp unit at the time of error occurrence and during normal game. Difference between power-on and normal game, difference between standby screen display and normal game, difference between setting confirmation mode and normal game, setting change mode and normal game As a difference from the inside, a difference between the BB execution and the normal game, any one of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) is selected that is not selected during the normal game. Depending on the type of error that has occurred, such as making any one of the elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit different between the medal empty error and the display determination error, Lamp unit The elements described above 1 elements 6 according to the may be different from any of the (see FIG. 77).

  Further, when the re-gamer is stopped and displayed, it may be configured to notify the player that the symbol combination related to the re-gamer has been stopped and displayed according to the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the gaming state of the game, the lamp unit is lit when the symbol combination relating to the re-gamer is stopped by displaying the winning combination of the re-gamer, and any one of the elements 1 to 6 Is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when the symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the re-gamer is stopped and displayed without winning the re-gamer. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, the player can clearly recognize that he has won the re-game player.

<<< Configuration for opening the front door and paying out >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a configuration related to payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. Note that “normal” shown in the same figure means that, for example, winning-B (common bell) is won in the “low probability state”, and the symbol combination (for example, winning 04) corresponding to the common bell is stopped and displayed. In this case, 11 game medals are paid out. In addition, regarding “occurrence of payout before opening the door” and “occurrence of payout after opening the door”, winning-B (common bell) is won, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. Is illustrated. In the figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit value (50 in this example) is described in detail.

<< Configuration 1 >>
<In case of normal payout>
The case where the normal payout in the configuration 1 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is Winning 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (the third stop button changes from being pressed to non-pressed when the player removes his / her finger from the third stop button, etc. Note that since the third stop button is being pressed) The non-pressing state may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the game medal payout from the speaker S20 (same as above) Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door opens>
Next, the case where payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. Thereafter, in a situation where a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is output, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is opened from the speaker S20 (in the figure) Sound A) is output. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. Thereafter, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the output of the payout sound, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the front door DU remains open, that is, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened, and then output even if the front door DU remains open. The configuration is such that the output ends when a specific time elapses from the opening. By configuring in this way, when the administrator opens the front door DU to perform setting confirmation or setting change, the front door opening notification sound is continuously output until the setting confirmation or setting change is completed. Without being prevented, setting confirmation and setting change can be performed without stress. In the figure, the output of the front door opening sound is terminated simultaneously with the end of the output of the dispensing sound, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output end timing of the dispensing sound and the output of the front door opening sound are illustrated. There is no problem if the end timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where payout is executed after the door is opened in Configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is opened. The That is, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off. Thereafter, under the situation where the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and a game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and from the speaker S20. A payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started. That is, the payout sound and the front door opening notification sound are output simultaneously. Thereafter, the specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Thereafter, the output of the payout sound ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the payout sound output.

  By configuring the game medal so that it can be executed regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 1, the game hall manager forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with a game medal. Even in the case where it has been (not closed firmly), etc., the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured not to be disadvantaged. In addition, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be output simultaneously, the situation of the gaming machine can be grasped in real time. When configured as described above, it is preferable to use an output mode (tone, tone, tempo, etc.) that makes it easy to distinguish the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound.

<< Configuration 2 >>
<In case of normal payout>
A case where normal payout in configuration 2 is executed will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button is Winning 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (the third stop button changes from being pressed to non-pressed when the player removes his / her finger from the third stop button, etc. Note that since the third stop button is being pressed) The non-pressing state may be referred to as the third stop button being turned from on to off), the game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out, and the payout sound corresponding to the game medal payout from the speaker S20 (same as above) Sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payout is executed before the door opens>
Next, the case where payout is executed before the door is opened in the configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the third stop button is turned from on to off, a game medal corresponding to the winning prize 04 is paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medal is started to be output from the speaker S20. Thereafter, in a situation where a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is output, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound for notifying that the front door DU is opened from the speaker S20 (in the figure) The sound A) is output and the output of the payout sound ends. Thereafter, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the predetermined time, which is the output period of the payout sound, ends during the output of the front door opening notification sound.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where payout is executed after the door is opened in Configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, in a situation where two of the three reels are stopped and the other one is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and the winning prize 04 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door opening notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is opened. The That is, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened regardless of whether the third stop button is on or off. After that, under the situation where the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned from on to off, and a game medal corresponding to the winning 04 is paid out. The corresponding payout sound is not output. Thereafter, in a situation where game medals are being paid out, a specific time has elapsed since the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound is terminated, and a payout sound corresponding to winning 04 is output. Thereafter, a predetermined time elapses from the start of payout of the game medal corresponding to the winning 04, and the output of the payout sound is finished.

  By configuring the game medals to be able to be paid out regardless of the opening of the front door DU as in the configuration 2, the manager of the game hall forgets to close the front door DU when the game machine is replenished with game medals. Even in the case where it has been (not closed firmly), etc., the game medal can be paid out normally, and the player can be configured not to be disadvantaged. Also, by preventing the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound from being output at the same time, the situation where the situation of the gaming machine becomes difficult to judge due to the mixture of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound is prevented. can do. In the configuration 2, even when the front door opening notification sound is being output, the payout sound is output, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively small compared to the volume of the front door opening notification sound (volume 0 is also set). It may be configured to include).

<< Other configuration >>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even when the front door DU is opened, a game medal is inserted, a max bet button (in this example, a bet button D220) is operated, and a bet button lamp S50 (also called a max bet lamp). May be configured so that lighting of a lamp that can be inserted or a bet lamp (a 1-bet lamp, a 2-bet lamp, or a 3-bet lamp) is effective. That is, when a game medal is inserted while the front door DU is opened, it is possible to detect the insertion of the game medal (the blocker is on) and the insertion is valid (the credit is increased, or the game medal is Bet bet). In such a configuration, a bet sound (or medal insertion sound) corresponding to a game medal insertion or bet button (max bet button) operation may be output from the speaker S20 (front door DU). Even if the game is not open, game medals can be inserted or a bet sound corresponding to the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), and game medals can be inserted or the bet button (max bet button) can be operated The bet sound may not be output.

<<< Configuration related to power interruption and withdrawal >>>
An example of the action that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present example when the power is turned off while pressing the third stop at the time of winning the small role is shown below. Note that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is an upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small role. In addition, an effect caused by blinking of the rotating backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp effect.

<Configuration 1>
In a game won for a small role (for example, a common bell for winning 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small role → Power failure occurs with the third stop button pressed (A power failure occurs at the game hall, etc.) → Power is restored while the third stop button is pressed → Power is restored and the game medal payout corresponding to the small role is executed. May be.

  In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and a game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role, a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role can be executed, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, the power supply is restored while the third stop button is pressed as in the above-described configuration 1, and the game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role. In such a case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role may not be executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role may not be output. With this configuration, the player can be configured not to be surprised by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

  With this configuration, even when the player presses the third stop, a power interruption occurs, and even when the power is immediately restored, the game medal payout based on the winning of the small role is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Even if any of predetermined operation members (for example, a start lever, all stop buttons, a bet button (max bet button), a settlement button, etc.) controlled by the main control board M side is operated, If the operation member is not operated, a game medal payout based on winning may be executed. For example, when returning from a power interruption, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on), the game medal payout based on winning is not executed. Also good. Further, in such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or releasing the start lever, the operation member that is turned on among the operation members controlled by the main control board M side is 1 The game medal payout based on the winning may be executed. (2) After that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (the main control board M side is A game medal payout based on a winning may be executed when all the operation members to be controlled are turned off.

  As an example of the situation where the power interruption occurs, the power switch is turned from on to off, the power supply cable is disconnected, a power failure occurs in the game arcade, the power supply cable comes out of the insertion port, In any case, the above-described configuration can be applied.

<Configuration 2>
In a game won for a small role (for example, a common bell for winning 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small role → open the front door DU while pressing the third stop button (Opening the front door DU causes a door opening error), and power is cut off (turning off the power switch, etc.) → Power is restored with the third stop button pressed (turn on the power switch) → Close the front door DU while pressing the third stop button to release the door opening error (for example, insert the door key into the key hole D260 and twist in a predetermined direction) → The door opening error is released The game medal payout corresponding to the small combination may be configured as described above.

  In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and a game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role, a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role can be executed, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, as in the above-described configuration 2, the door opening error is canceled while the third stop button is pressed, and the gaming medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role. May be configured such that the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role is not output. With this configuration, the player can be configured not to be surprised by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the door opening error is canceled.

<Configuration 3>
In a game won for a small role (for example, a common bell for winning 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small role → Power failure occurs with the third stop button pressed (For example, a power failure occurs in the game hall) → Release your finger from the third stop button (turn the third stop button from on to off) → Return to power → Return to power and pay out game medals corresponding to the small role May be configured as described above.

  In addition, when the game progresses in a situation where the power is not cut off and a game medal is paid out based on the winning of the small role, a back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role can be executed, In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the small role can be output, as in the configuration 3 described above, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released. Thus, when a game medal payout based on the winning of the small role is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the small role is not executed, and the payout sound based on the winning of the small role is not output. Good. With this configuration, the player can be configured not to be surprised by suddenly executing the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

  In the case of the configuration 1, the configuration 2, or the configuration 3, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether or not it is turned on) as a process after the power is restored. Before executing the process (process executed in the game progress control process), a game medal payout process based on a winning (process executed in the game progress control process) may be executed. Further, as described above, in the situation where the symbol combination for which the small role is awarded is stopped and displayed, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed, and then the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed. Then, the game medal payout based on the winning may be executed by releasing the third stop button after that, and in such a case, the output of the payout sound corresponding to the payout and the back lamp effect. May be configured not to be executed (when a game medal payout based on a prize is executed without turning off the power, a payout sound output and a back lamp effect are executed).

<<< Configuration for Confirmation Mode and Payment >>>
An example of the action that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present example when the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop is pressed at the time of winning the small role is illustrated below. Note that any of the configurations exemplified below can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies a case where the credit is an upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, a case where a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 by winning a small role. The configuration described in detail below is when the reel is stopped and the power is turned on, and the main control board side such as the start lever, all stop buttons, bet buttons (max bet buttons), checkout buttons, etc. In the situation where the various operation members controlled by are not operated (not turned on), when the front key DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode can be entered. The case where it is done is illustrated. During the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that it is in the setting confirmation mode, or may be configured not to notify.

<Configuration 1>
In a game won for a small role (for example, a common bell for winning 04), press the third stop button (turn it on) to win the small role → open the front door DU while pressing the third stop button (Opening the front door DU generates a door opening error) and turning on the setting key switch (does not shift to the setting confirmation mode) → The front door DU is closed with the third stop button pressed. The door opening error is canceled (for example, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 and twisted in a predetermined direction). Alternatively, the configuration may not be changed to the setting confirmation mode even if the third stop button is released.

  Further, in such a configuration, the setting key switch is kept on, and then betting is possible, and the reel can be started to rotate by operating the start lever in the betting state, and the stop button The reel may be stopped by operating (to allow the game to proceed). Further, if the setting key switch is kept turned on, betting may not be possible (game medals cannot be inserted), and betting is possible, but the reel does not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. May be. In other words, the game may not be executed if the setting key switch remains on. In the case of such a configuration, it is supplemented that the display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is being displayed is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Moreover, when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the re-playing symbols are not stopped and the setting key switch is turned on (after the operation as in the above configuration 1), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode. You may comprise so that it may obtain, and when the front door DU is open | released in the condition where the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed, you may comprise so that it may not transfer to setting confirmation mode. Further, when the front door DU is opened and the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may display that it is the setting confirmation mode.

<<< Configuration related to lighting of Max Bet Lamp >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. 83, an operation relating to lighting of a max bet lamp (also referred to as a bet button lamp S50) applicable to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In addition, the structure illustrated below has illustrated the structure which can throw in a game medal even during the stop display of a re-game. The max bet lamp is controlled on the sub-control board S side or the main control board M side, which informs that the operation of the max bet button provided in or near the max bet button is effective. It is a lamp. In the figure, it is ON that the max bet lamp is lit (or flashing), OFF that the max bet lamp is not lit, 1 ON that the bet lamp D211 is lit, 1 bet OFF that the lamp D211 is off, ON that the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit ON, OFF that the 2 bet lamp D212 is off, and ON that the 3 bet lamp D213 is lit It is illustrated that the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off, that the start lamp D180 is turned on (or blinking), and that the start lamp D180 is turned off. Also, in the figure, when game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 such as the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, etc. are detected. In this example, the game sensor detects one game medal one by one), but as a bet button, one game medal can be bet by one operation (off → on) different from the max bet button. A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button that can bet two game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. In such a configuration, one bet to the medal slot D170 is provided. Same as game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, or second insertion sensor D30s) The use, there is no problem even when applied to a single press of the 1 bet button.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the maximum bet lamp is turned on and the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the maximum bet lamp is lit and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the Max bet lamp is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

  As in the configuration 1, the maximum bet lamp is configured to be “lights off → lights up” each time one game medal is inserted, so that the period during which the game medal is guided from the medal insertion slot D170 to the inside of the gaming machine is maximum. Since the operation of the bet button is invalid, the period during which the max bet button is valid can be accurately notified by turning off the max bet lamp during the guided period. In addition, by accurately informing the period during which the Max Bet button is valid, the player can grasp the period during which the Max Bet button is invalid, in other words, the period when the game medal is invalid, It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted during the invalid period and the game medal is not normally inserted, and it is possible to realize a game progress with a good tempo.

  Further, when the third bet lamp D213 is turned on by configuring the third bet lamp D213 to be turned on after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off as in the configuration 1, Since the max bet lamp is turned off, the player can clearly recognize that the prescribed number of three game medals has been bet.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, Configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains on, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. After that, the max bet lamp goes off.

  As in configuration 2, the third game medal is inserted and the 3rd bet lamp D213 is turned on and then the maximum bet lamp is turned off. In other words, the player presses the 3rd bet lamp D213 with the max bet button. By configuring it to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, the game progresses smoothly, and the player has extra Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted or a player is distrusted by the performance and behavior of the gaming machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains on, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the Max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on.

  As in the configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on is turned off, the start lamp D180 is turned on almost at the same time. It is possible to quickly notify the player that it is possible to start the game, and the progress of the game can be made smooth, and the player can throw in extra game medals, It is possible to prevent situations in which the behavior is distrustful.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the maximum bet lamp is turned on and the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned on. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the maximum bet lamp is lit and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, a third game medal is inserted and the Max bet lamp is turned off. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit and the start lamp D180 is lit.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. Under the situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the Max bet lamp is flashing, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is on and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted and the 2-bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, and the start lamp D180 is lit. Thereafter, the max bet lamp is extinguished before (in the middle of lighting) the timing at which the max bet lamp blinks, from when it is turned on to off. In addition, in the figure, since the Max bet lamp is turned on and turned off repeatedly, the case where the third game medal is inserted in the lighting state is illustrated. The max bet lamp is turned on and off at the timing when the first game medal is inserted, but the third game medal is inserted in the blinking state of the max bet lamp. The max bet lamp remains off after the timing when the third game medal is inserted.

  Even when the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are all lit up in the situation where the player is not betting as in the configuration 5, the number of game medals inserted (first, By changing the combination of lighting / extinguishing of the start lamp D180, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 according to the second and third sheets, the player can change the current game situation (how many game medals). Can be grasped).

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, Configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains on, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights. Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the start lamp D180 is turned on at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (timing earlier than the start timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in the configuration 2), The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit. After that, the max bet lamp goes off.

  As in the configuration 6, the third game medal is inserted and the 3rd bet lamp D213 is turned on and then the maximum bet lamp is turned off. In other words, the player presses the 3rd bet lamp D213 with the max bet button. By configuring it to light up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, the game progresses smoothly, and the player has extra Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is inserted or a player is distrusted by the performance and behavior of the gaming machine due to slow operation.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where no gaming medals are bet on the spinning type gaming machine and the betting is valid, the max bet lamp is turned on, the 1 bet lamp D211 is turned off, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off. The 3-bet lamp D213 is off and the start lamp D180 is off. Thereafter, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains on, and the 1 bet lamp D211 lights. Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned on (starts blinking). Thereafter, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. Thereafter, the third game medal is inserted, the Max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on.

  As in the configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on substantially simultaneously. In other words, the player sets the 3 bet lamp D213 to the max. By configuring the bet button to light up as soon as possible after operating the bet button, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be lighted seamlessly in accordance with the player's operation, and the game progress can be made smoother. It is possible to prevent a situation where a player puts in extra game medals or feels distrustful in the performance and behavior of the gaming machine due to slow operation.

  In the above-described configurations 1 to 4, configuration 6 and configuration 7, the max bet lamp is ON = the max bet lamp is lit. However, the lighting mode is such that the player can recognize that the max bet button is valid. As in the configuration 5, the maximum bet lamp may be turned on, and the maximum bet lamp may blink. Also in the configuration 5, the maximum bet lamp may be turned on and the maximum bet lamp may be turned on. Similarly, in the configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is ON = the start lamp D180 is lit, but any lighting mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective. Similarly to the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on, and the start lamp D180 may blink. Further, in the configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on, and the start lamp D180 may be turned on. Further, the maximum bed lamp may be configured to be controlled on the sub-control board S side or may be configured to be controlled on the main control board M side.

<<< Configuration for Checkout Button Operation >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, the action when operating the settlement button D60 applicable to the rotating type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the following configuration, three gaming medals are bet on the gaming machine, and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the figure, it is ON that the Max bet lamp is lit (or flashing), OFF that the Max bet lamp is off, and ON that the operation of the settlement button is newly detected, and the settlement button. OFF that the operation of 1 is not detected, or that the operation of the settlement button is not newly detected is OFF, that the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit ON, and that the 1-bet lamp D211 is OFF is OFF, ON that the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on, OFF that the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off, ON that the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and that the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. OFF, when the start lamp D180 is lit (or flashing), ON, when the start lamp D180 is off, ON that the enabling lamp D300 is lit (or flashing), OFF that the enabling lamp D300 is OFF, and 1 that the credit number display device D200 is decremented by 1 from OFF to ON to OFF . Further, in the figure, a case where game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 is illustrated, but as a bet button, one operation is different from the maximum bet button by one operation (off → on). A 1-bet button for betting game medals or a 2-bet button for betting 2 game medals by one operation (off → on) may be provided. There is no problem even if the same action as the insertion of one game medal into D170 is applied to one press of the 1 bet button. The configuration exemplified below may be configured so that the game medals stored in the gaming machine can be settled even during the replay stop display, or stored in the gaming machine during the replay stop display. You may comprise so that the game medal which can be settled cannot be settled. In addition, as the condition for operating the checkout button D60 and paying out the betted game medal from the discharge port D40 (as a condition for determining that the checkout button has been operated), the checkout button has been changed from “on to off”. Or “on” or “on for 0.5 seconds or more”.

<< Configuration 1 >>
First, Configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned off and betted. Three game medals are paid out from the outlet D40 (payout is started), and thereafter, four game medals, which are credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200, are released. It is paid out from the exit D40. In addition, the throw-in enable lamp D300 is turned on at the timing when the game medal to be paid out at the end (game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 is 1 → 0) is paid out.

  By configuring the game medals being betted (payout) before the credit as in Configuration 1, it is confirmed that the credit has become 0 when the player finishes the game. Even if you leave immediately, you can avoid forgetting to settle the betting game medals. In particular, when a game is ended in a situation where the number of credits is a small amount, such as 1 or 2 cards, it is relatively likely that the player will end the game without obtaining sufficient game medals. The attention of the person may be distracted. Even in such a case, in order to prevent an unintended disadvantage to the player, the game medals being bet are settled (paid out) before the credits. In the configuration 1, before the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is subtracted, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are included. And the throwable lamp D300 are turned off.

<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, Configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the Max bet lamp is turned on, and the three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started). Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is extinguished, and the throwable lamp D300 is extinguished. Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the throw-in lamp D300 is turned on. In the configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. A credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

  When it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once as in the configuration 2, the bet game medals are paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the settlement button D60 is operated, By configuring the 1st bet lamp D211, the 2nd bet lamp D212, the 3rd bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180 and the throw-in enable lamp D300 to be turned on before the extinction of the max bet lamp, Will be paid out only, and the player wants to bet credit by operating the max bet button again, so that the max bet button can be operated quickly. By configuring to notify, the progress of the game is smooth. It can be.

<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, the configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (from OFF to ON), and the start lamp D180 and the throwable lamp D300 are turned off. Three betting game medals are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started), and thereafter, four credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are stored. A game medal is paid out from the discharge port D40. Further, after the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3-bet lamp D213 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 1-bet lamp D211. In addition, the throw-in enable lamp D300 is turned on at the timing when the game medal to be paid out at the end (game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 is 1 → 0) is paid out.

<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the checkout button D60 is operated once (off → on), the start lamp D180 and the throw-in enable lamp D300 are turned off, and three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout starts). ) Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off and the throw-in lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In the configuration 4, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. A credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

  By configuring the bet game medals to be paid out as in the configuration 4, but not to pay out the credits, and to configure the maximum bet lamp to be lit at a timing later than the turn-on lamp D300 is lit. If the player wishes to change to a single bet after betting three, the player adjusts the settlement button D60 once to settle the three game medals and then sets one game medal. In such a case, it is possible to make the game progress smoothly by turning on the enabling lamp D300 before the MAX bet lamp.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, Configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off → on), the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the throw-in lamp D300 are turned off and betted. Three game medals are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started). Thereafter, the enabling lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In the configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. A credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<< Configuration 6 >>
Next, the configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when it is turned off → on), the enabling lamp D300 is turned off. Thereafter, the start lamp D180 is turned off. Three betting game medals are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started), and thereafter, four credits stored in the gaming machine displayed on the credit number display device D200 are stored. A game medal is paid out from the discharge port D40. Further, after the timing when the settlement button D60 is operated, the lights are turned off in the order of the 3 bet lamp D213 → the 2 bet lamp D212 → the 1 bet lamp D211. Further, after the game medals to be paid out at the end (game medals whose display on the credit number display device D200 is changed from 1 to 0) are paid out, the insertable lamp D300 is turned on. Note that the Max bet lamp remains off.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, the configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. In a situation where three game medals are bet on the spinning-type gaming machine and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. The 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the throw-in lamp D300 is lit. Thereafter, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed (the timing when it is turned from OFF to ON), the blinking of the max bet lamp starts and the start lamp D180 is turned off. Thereafter, the throw-in enable lamp D180 is turned off, and three game medals bet are paid out from the discharge port D40 (payout is started). Thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned off. Thereafter, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off. Thereafter, the 1-bet lamp D211 is turned off. Thereafter, the enabling lamp D300 is turned on. Note that the Max bet lamp remains off. In the configuration 7, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once, the bet game medal is paid out, but the credit is not paid out, and the bet game medal is 0. A credit is paid out when it is determined that the settlement button D60 is operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<< Difference in operation due to power-off timing >>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S according to the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off. FIG. 88 (a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off, and FIG. 88 (b) shows the timing of the timing of power-supply to the gaming machine and power-off. 6 is a timing chart showing the second aspect.

  The first mode is a mode in which a power interruption occurs after the execution of the main program of the main control board M and the sub program of the sub control board S is started. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which a power interruption occurs before the execution of the main program of the main control board and the sub program of the sub control board is started.

  In this example, power failure is the state where power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the power cable is disconnected, the power cable is disconnected, power failure But you can. This includes cases where power supply is stopped unintentionally at the game hall. Note that the timing when the power interruption occurs is the timing when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the timing when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off, the timing when the power cable is disconnected, and the power cable is disconnected. This is the timing when a power failure occurs.

  88 (a) and 88 (b), ΔT1 indicates that the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches a low level (sometimes referred to as an off level) after a power interruption occurs from the start of power feeding. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the supply voltage to the main control board M from the timing when the power interruption occurs. ΔT4 is the time until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level until the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started, and ΔT5 is the time until the low level. This is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level until the main program of the main control board M is started. Here, relationships of ΔT5 <ΔT1, ΔT2 <ΔT3, ΔT5> ΔT3, and ΔT4 <ΔT5 are established.

<<< First Aspect >>>
<< Changes in power supply status >>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started at time t1, power supply is cut off at time t3, and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. In the drawing, the case where the time from when the power supply to the main control board is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the time from when the power supply is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (be random). Further, the case where the time from when the power supply to the sub control board is started until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and power supply to the sub control board is started. It may be configured such that the time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is varied (random). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) from when the power supply to the main control board is started until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is the same as when the power supply to the sub control board is started. It is preferable that the power supply voltage is configured to be longer than the maximum time (maximum time) until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level.

  Thereafter, the power is cut off at time t3. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and is substantially reduced from the time t4 to the maintenance level. It becomes constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power source composed of a capacitor, and the power supply unit E has a substantially constant power supply voltage over a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5) even when a power interruption occurs. (Maintenance level) can be output (the power-off process is executed in a situation where a voltage of the maintenance level is supplied). In this example, the time for maintaining the maintenance level from the start of execution of the power-off process (when power-off is detected) (the time from time t3 to time t5) is a time that allows timer interrupt processing to be executed at least 20 times. (Time when timer interruption processing (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times) can be secured.

  Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5 and becomes off-level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed on the main control board is started from time ta after lapse of ΔT5 from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this main program, the above-described main control board START (power-on) process shown in FIG. 13 is executed.

  As described above, when the setting key switch is OFF in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1016 to 1022, 1036 to 1046 and 1300 are executed. Is activated.

  If the setting key switch is ON in the determination processing in step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processing in steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 is executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
When the setting key switch is off, a timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and when the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1104 of FIG. . After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined period T. The period T at which the timer interrupt is executed is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of power interruption>
When the occurrence of power interruption occurs, a power interruption detection signal is output from the power supply unit E. The main control board M has an input port to which a power-off detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when no power-off occurs, and is a low-level signal when a power-off occurs. The main control board M can determine whether or not a power interruption has occurred depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high level signal or a low level signal.

  In this example, the main control board M detects the power-off in the determination process in step 1604 of FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that a power interruption has occurred when the data read from the input port is a low level signal both times in two successive timer interrupt processes.

  Thus, in this example, the occurrence of power interruption is detected by two successive timer interrupt processes. Accordingly, when the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 of FIG. 14, the occurrence of the power interruption can be detected. On the other hand, if the power interruption occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, the occurrence of the power interruption cannot be detected.

  As described above, when the power interruption occurs after the execution of the main program is started and the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. Thus, it is possible to detect that a power interruption has occurred by interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power interruption has occurred, the power interruption processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<< Sub-control board operation >>
<Invoking subprogram>
The subprogram executed on the sub control board S is started from time tb when ΔT4 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this subprogram, the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 described above is executed. Note that ΔT4 is shorter than the above-described ΔT5, and the sub control board S does not miss the command transmitted from the main control board M by starting the sub control board S before the main control board M. Can be received. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after power supply to the main control board M is started, and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after power supply to the sub-control board S is started. Is shown as the same time tb, but the time from the start of power supply to the main control board M until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level and the power supply voltage after the power supply to the sub-control board S is started. The time until the supply level is reached may be different, and even in such a configuration, power supply to the main control board M is started until the main program of the main control board M is started. Is preferably set to be longer than the time from when the power supply to the sub control board S is started until the sub program of the sub control board S is started. Reached the supply level Is longer than the time from when the power supply voltage on the side of the sub control board S reaches the supply level until the sub program of the sub control board S is started. It is preferable to configure.

<<< Second Aspect >>>
FIG. 88 (b) is a timing chart showing a second mode of power supply to the gaming machine and power-off timing. The second mode is a mode in which a power interruption occurs before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. That is, this is a mode in which a power interruption occurs at a time point before the lapse of ΔT5 from time t2 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

  As described above, in the second mode, the power supply is interrupted by the main program because the power supply is interrupted before the execution of the main program is started (before the timer interrupt is activated). This cannot be detected, and the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is not executed, and the gaming machine stops due to power-off (the supply voltage reaches a low level).

<< Operation of main control board >>
<Power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board>
Power supply to the gaming machine is started from time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

  Thereafter, the power is cut off at time t13. Due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and is substantially reduced from the time t14 to the maintenance level. It becomes constant. Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15 and becomes off-level at time t16.

  As described above, in the second mode, the execution of the main program is started after the power interruption occurs. However, the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 of FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 of FIG. Before the power supply unit, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is set to the off level.

In addition, in the same figure, although the 1st aspect and the 2nd aspect were illustrated, as a structure applicable to the gaming machine which concerns on this example,
(1) Immediately after the power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after the time when the timer interrupt process is executed once after the start of the power supply to the main control board M) → the main program is executed Before starting, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes an off level (the execution of the main program is not started).
(2) Starting power supply to the main control board M → immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M is the supply level) Power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process has been executed once) until the power supply voltage is reached → The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the execution of the main program is started Level (the main program execution will not start)
You may comprise as mentioned above.

<<< Relationship between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State >>>
FIG. 89 (a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89 (b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between a power feeding state and a condition.

<< Relationship between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in First Mode >>
<State 1>
First, in state 1 of FIG. 89 (a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being executed or a state in which a game can be executed, and the setting key switch is set to “OFF”. “Power supply state” is “ON”.

<State 2>
In the state 2, the power is cut off with the setting key switch being “off”, and the “power supply state” is “off”. At this time, the power-off process in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to “on” while the “power supply state” remains “off”.

<State 4>
Next, in the state 4, when the setting key switch is in the “on” state and the power is supplied, the “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the “power supply state” is “on”, the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. As described above, the first mode is a mode in which the power supply is interrupted after the execution of the main program is started. Before the power supply is interrupted (next state 5), the main program in FIG. A control board START (power-on) process can be executed.

  In the determination process of step 1014 of FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is ON, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. Transition from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. Thus, when the setting key switch is “on” and the “power supply state” is “on”, the mode changes to the setting change mode, and then the setting change switch and the start lever are operated. Thus, the setting value can be changed. In addition, a setting change start command is transmitted to the sub control board S by the processing of step 1622 in FIG. 32, so that the sub control board S can be notified that the setting change mode is being executed.

<State 5>
Next, in the setting change mode, when the power change occurs while the setting change device control process is being executed, the “power supply state” changes to “off”. When the power is cut off, the power-off process shown in FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the setting change device control process (setting change mode) is returned to the return address by the process of step 1902. Are stored in the storage area.

<State 6>
In state 6, with the “power supply state” remaining “off”, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to “off”.

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied in a state where the setting key switch is “off”, and “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the “power supply state” is “on”, the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the setting key switch is determined to be “off”, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the processing in step 1022, the return address stored in the storage area in state 5 is restored, and execution is started from the processing of the return address. As described above, the return address stored in the storage area in state 5 is the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process, and the setting change device control process is immediately executed by returning. Is done. As described above, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and the setting key switch is turned on and the power supply is turned on in a situation where the power supply is turned off to shift to the setting change mode. This is the basic action when shifting to the setting change mode, but even when the power supply is turned off in the setting change mode and the setting key switch is turned off and then the power supply is turned on, Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, the setting change mode is set. By configuring in this way, even when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode (for example, when a game hall has a power failure), it is possible to return to the state before the power failure occurred, and the gaming machine malfunctions. It is possible to make it difficult to generate an operation.

<< Relationship between Setting Key Switch State and Power Supply State in Second Mode >>
<State 1>
In state 1 of FIG. 89 (b), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being executed or a state in which a game can be executed, as in the first mode. “Off”, and “Power supply state” is “On”.

<State 2>
Similarly to the first mode, in the state 2 as well, the power is cut off while the setting key switch remains “off”, and the “power supply state” is “off”. At this time, the power-off process in FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as a return address.

<State 3>
In the state 3, the setting key switch is operated and switched to “on” while the “power supply state” remains “off”.

<State 4>
In state 4, power is supplied in a state where the setting key switch is “on”, and “power supply state” is switched to “on”.

<State 5>
In state 5, when the setting key switch is “on”, the power is cut off, and “power supply state” is switched to “off”. As described above, in the second mode, the power supply is interrupted before the execution of the main program executed on the main control board M is started. Therefore, in the second mode, the “power supply state” is temporarily “on” (state 4), but immediately after the “power supply state” in state 4 is “on” (for example, timer interrupt processing is performed). After the elapse of one execution time, the “power supply state” is switched to “off”. In other words, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed (or before the timer interrupt is started). (State 5). For this reason, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address stored in the state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in state 6, with the “power supply state” remaining “off”, the setting key switch is operated and the setting key switch is switched to “off”.

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied in a state where the setting key switch is “off”, and “power supply state” is switched to “on”. When the “power supply state” is “on”, the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed. In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is OFF, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the process of step 1022, the return address stored in the storage area in the state 2 is restored, and the execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address saved in the storage area in state 2 is the address of the next process to be executed in the normal state, and the next process to be executed in the normal state is executed. Thus, in the second aspect, even when the setting key switch is “on” and the “power supply state” is “on”, the main program of the main control board M is not executed. When the power supply is turned off, the setting key switch is turned off and the power supply is turned on. . By configuring as in the second aspect, there is a possibility that an unintended malfunction may occur in the gaming machine if the power is turned off immediately after the gaming machine is turned on and the mode is changed to the setting change mode. Even if the setting key switch is on, it can be configured not to shift to the setting change mode, and a gaming machine that is less prone to malfunction can be configured.

<<< Medal grant control and payout sound output control >>>
As described above, when winning a small combination (when a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed), a payout number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination is awarded to the player.

<< Medal grant process >>
The process for granting medals includes a process for adding and granting medals, and a process for actually paying out and giving game medals to the outside of the gaming machine.

<Credit number addition processing>
When the current number of credits is less than the maximum stored number (for example, less than 50), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the number of credits according to the payout number until the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number. This credit number addition processing is executed by the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M.

<Game medal payout process>
The CPUC 100 of the main control board M grants medals by driving the hopper H40 and paying out medals from the medal payout device H when the current number of credits exceeds the maximum storage number. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<< Mode of Medal Grant >>
In accordance with the current number of credits and the number of medals to be granted, the mode shifts only from the credit number addition process, the game medal payout process only, and the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process ( There are three types of modes: a mode in which both credit number addition processing and medal payout processing are executed.

<Only credit number addition process>
When the current credit number is equal to or less than the maximum storage number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the credit number according to the payout number until the credit number reaches the maximum storage number. If the maximum stored number is not reached even if the number of payouts is added, the medal granting process is completed only by the credit number adding process.

<Mode of transition from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing>
When the current credit number is equal to or less than the maximum storage number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the credit number according to the payout number until the credit number reaches the maximum storage number. When the number of credits reaches the maximum storage number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition amount from the payout number. The sum of the credit addition amount and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the payout number corresponding to the winning small combination.

  In this way, when shifting from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspects of game medal payout processing only>
When the current number of credits has already reached the maximum number of reserves, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 and pays out game medals for the number of payouts from the medal payout device H.

<< Specific example >>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when a medal with 5 payouts is given to a player when the current number of credits is 47, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M first sets the credit number to 1 Add one by one. Specifically, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47 → 48 (first (time t1)) → 49 (second (time t2)) → 50 (third (time). t3)). When the number of credits is 50, the maximum storage number (50 sheets) is reached, and no more credits can be increased.

  Next, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and the remaining number obtained by subtracting three credits from the payout number is five. Are paid out from the medal payout device H.

  In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 and starts a payout process. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and ends the payout process. .

<< Various times >>
<Unit processing time for credit addition processing and unit processing time for game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition process by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, a unit processing time a is required to increase from the credit number m to the credit number m + 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2−time t1 = a to increase from the credit number 48 (first sheet) to the credit number 49 (second sheet), and the credit number 49 (second sheet). From time t3 to time t2 = a is required to increase the number of credits to 50 (third). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

  In the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, a unit processing time c is required from the payout of the nth game medal to the payout of the (n + 1) th game medal. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6-time t4 = c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

  One unit processing time a can be defined by the difference in timing between two successive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing of addition processing from 47 to 48 (first sheet) (time t1) and the timing of addition processing from 48 to 49 (second sheet) (time t2). Also, the difference between the timing of the addition process from 48 to 49 (second sheet) (time t2) and the timing of the addition process from 49 to 50 (third sheet) (time t3).

  Further, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference between the timings of starting two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the start timing of the fifth sheet (time t6) and the start timing of the fourth sheet addition process (time t4). In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be defined so as to have a constant cycle.

<Switching time e from credit addition processing to game medal payout processing>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum storage number, and when not all of the payout numbers are given, the game medal payout process is switched. A switching time e is required for the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit number adding process to the game medal payout process.

<< time comparison >>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is a time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M and the time required to drive the medal payout device H. And both. The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. In this way, the payout can be accurately controlled including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

  As described above, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a by adjusting the time required for driving the medal payout device H. In this way, the payout process can be speeded up.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By lengthening the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process, and to smoothly switch from the calculation process of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to the driving of the hopper H40. .

  Also, the switching time e can be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit number addition process to the game medal payout process. By ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be started immediately. It is possible to increase the consumption of game medals, increase the profit of the game hall, and increase the operating efficiency of the gaming machine.

  In this way, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the game medal payout process, the payout is different from a certain period, and the exhilaration feeling that the payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts. A sense of expectation can be given to the game.

  It is also possible to make the switching time e coincide with the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is matched with the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a fixed period, and the addition of the number of credits and the payout process of the game medals are equivalent medals. A sense of security can be given by showing this to the player.

<< Output of game medium added sound >>
The CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub-control board S when starting the credit addition process (time t1). The sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20 upon receiving this payout start command.

  Further, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub-control board S when the payout of the game medal is finished (time t7). The sub-control board S ends the output of the game medium imparting sound from the speaker S20 upon receiving this payout end command. As described above, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and all the game medals of the payout number corresponding to the winning small role are given to the player. It is determined whether or not it has been granted. When the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that all of the payout game medals corresponding to the winning small role have been awarded, the CPUC 100 ends the output of the payout end command to the sub-control board S, and from the speaker S20. The output of the game medium giving sound is terminated. If the game medium imparted sound is reproduced (output) repeatedly with a certain period of sound, the game medium imparted sound is immediately output at the timing when the sub-control board S receives the payout end command. It may be configured to end the output, or the output of the game medium giving sound is ended at the timing when the period of the game medium giving sound output at the timing when the payout end command is received by the sub-control board S side. You may comprise.

  The game medium imparted sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit imparted sound data at least once. The unit imparted sound data is stored in advance in the RAM of the sub control board S. As shown in FIG. 90, the reproduction time for one unit-giving sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads the unit-giving sound data from the RAM and receives a payout start command. The game medium imparted sound is output from the speaker S20 by repeatedly reproducing the unit imparted sound data a plurality of times during the period until it is received.

<First aspect>
The first mode of the game medium imparted sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit imparted sound data is repeatedly reproduced every reproduction time d from when the payout start command is received. By playing in this way, game medium imparted sound is output at a constant period. As described above, even when switching from the process of adding credits to the process of paying out game medals, the game medium imparted sound is output at a constant cycle, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable about the payout. A sense of security can be given by showing the player that both the number addition process and the game medal payout process have the same value.

<Second aspect>
Also, in the second mode of the game medium imparted sound shown in FIG. 90, the unit imparted sound data is reproduced for each reproduction time d from the time when the payout start command is received, and only the time f after the credit number addition processing is completed. This is a mode in which the unit imparted sound data is reproduced, and thereafter, at the time t4, the reproduction of the unit imparted sound data is started again with the start of the game medal payout process. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium giving sound is output at a timing different from a certain period, so that it is possible to give the game a sense of excitement and expectation that payout of the game medal to the medal tray starts. .

  When a game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H and there is no game medal in the hopper H40 and a hopper error occurs (for example, when it is determined Yes in step 1279), the sub The control board S stops the output of the game medium giving sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When the game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and the payout state is enabled, the main control board M transmits a payout start command to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S starts outputting the game medium giving sound. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when a hopper error occurs, the game medium imparted sound is continuously output. However, the volume of the game medium imparted sound is not the same as the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred. The sound is output at a lower volume compared with the volume (the volume may be set to 0), and when the hopper error is canceled, the output of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the game medium added sound You may comprise so that a volume may be returned.

<<< Arrangement of integrated circuit on substrate >>>
FIG. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on main control board M. FIG.

  The main control board M has a substantially board-like rectangular printed board MP. On the front side of the printed circuit board MP, a CPUC 100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, and the like are mainly mounted. On the back side of the printed circuit board MP, a circuit pattern mainly made of a conductor is formed. The main control board M (printed circuit board MP) includes two long end portions ML1 and ML2 parallel to each other along the longitudinal direction and two short end portions MS1 and MS2 parallel to each other along the short direction. It has a rectangular shape.

  In this example, the main control board M is attached so as to stand up in the casing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is installed upright, the long end portions ML1 and ML2 are disposed along the horizontal direction, and the short end portions MS1 and MS2 are disposed along the vertical direction. The longitudinal end portion ML1 is located on the upper side, and the longitudinal end portion ML2 is located on the lower side. Further, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end portion MS1 is located on the left side of the short end portion MS2, and the short end portion MS2 is located on the right side of the short end portion MS1.

  Hereinafter, the long end portion ML1 side is referred to as the upper side, the long end portion ML2 side is referred to as the lower side, the short end portion MS1 side is referred to as the left side, and the short end portion MS2 side is referred to as the right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC 100 has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is CLL, and the length in the short direction is CSL. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, an electrical connection is formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, in the operation of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC 100 in an appropriate direction so that the CPUC 100 can perform a desired operation. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC100. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the CPUC 100, or a notch (not shown) for visually confirming the orientation of the CPUC 100 is formed.

  In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 coincides with (in parallel with) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is located on the lower left side, the CPUC 100 is arranged in alignment with the orientation of the IC described later. When attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, mistakes in attaching the CPUC 100 in the wrong direction can be reduced.

  Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name is printed on the main body of the CPUC 100. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100. It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized in a state where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is located on the lower left side, it is possible to arrange the CPUC 100 in an orientation in which the printed model number, manufacturer name, and the like are easily visible.

  When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC 100 increase in order along the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is ILL, and the length in the short direction is ISL. Like the CPUC 100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins are formed to protrude from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connection is formed by the plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. For this reason, even in the operation of attaching the IC to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the IC in an appropriate direction so that the IC performs a desired operation. For this reason, the first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the IC is also used as a reference pin for placing the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) is formed on the main body of the IC, or a notch (not shown) for visually confirming the orientation of the IC is formed.

  In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP so that the longitudinal direction of the IC matches the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M (so as to be parallel). Further, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is always located on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. In this case, it is possible to reduce mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction.

  Further, in general, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer name is printed on the main body of the IC. The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. In a state where the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, it is preferable that the character information such as the IC model number and the manufacturer name can be easily visually recognized. As described above, by placing the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC is placed so that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily viewed. You can also.

  When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the IC pin numbers increase in order along the counterclockwise direction starting from the first pin (1P) when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connection with other electronic components is formed. The IC has a long shape, the length in the longitudinal direction is RLL, and the length in the short direction is RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and electrical connection with other electronic components is formed. The main control board M is connected to the sub control board S or the like via a connector, and can transmit and receive various signals.

<Interval between CPUC 100 and IC>
As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 91, only a resistor is arranged inside a predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, and no IC is arranged. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length of the CPUC 100 from the outer periphery COR is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL of the CPUC 100 in the short direction. Various currents (currents that change with time, for example, high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can be a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. In this way, by not placing the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the IC is placed at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and noise emitted from the IC is reduced. The operation of the CPUC 100 can be prevented from being affected.

  Further, the predetermined length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC 100 may be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor. Since current flows through the resistor, the resistor can be a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100. For this reason, by not arranging the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC100, the resistor is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC100 by a certain distance (for example, the length RLL), and is emitted from the resistor. The generated heat can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC 100.

<Relationship between CPUC100 height, IC height and other parts height>
FIG. 92 is a side view showing the height of various electronic components shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC 100 is the highest, then the IC height IHT is the highest, and the resistance height RHT is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only parts having a height less than CHT of CPUC 100 are arranged inside a predetermined range CSR2 around CPUC 100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than the predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the length RLL of the resistor in the longitudinal direction.

  In the operation of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, an attachment tool (not shown) is used. The attachment tool is a tool that is attached close to the printed circuit board MP while holding the CPUC 100 at the tip of the attachment tool. Since the CPUC 100 is clamped by the tip of the mounting tool, the tip of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is clamped. For this reason, when the CPUC 100 is attached, the tip of the attachment tool must also be brought close to the printed circuit board MP, and a space for the tip of the attachment tool is prevented so that the tip of the attachment tool does not interfere with other electronic components. It is necessary to secure.

  For this reason, in the area CSR2 around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, only components having a height less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged. By doing in this way, even if the tip of the attachment tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the attachment tool does not interfere with other parts. The area CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer periphery COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be at least the length RLL in the longitudinal direction of the resistor, for example.

  It should be noted that only components having a height less than CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged only in the area around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed board MP, and the area around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed board MP in the printed board MP. Outside, it may be configured such that components having a height CHT of the CPUC 100 or more are attached, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP may be components less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100.

  In this way, by placing only electronic components lower than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC 100, it is possible to secure a space in which the tip of the mounting tool can be approached, Even if the attachment tool is used, the CPUC 100 can be attached to the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components.

  In the example described above, the main control board M has been described as an example. However, all the boards on which electronic components such as a CPU and an IC are mounted, such as the sub control board S, the door board D, the rotor board K, and the power board E. Can be applied to.

<<< Configuration related to AT lottery >>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of the AT state transition control process applicable to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail. In addition, it supplements that the structure illustrated in the figure is applicable to all the structures mentioned above, when it has comprised AT.

  First, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state in which an AT lottery is possible. In the figure, there are not a plurality of gaming states having different probabilities of winning the AT lottery such as a low probability state and a high probability state, for example, one gaming state such as a high probability state in this embodiment. The AT lottery can be executed only at. Further, as a difference from the present embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the BB winning.

  In the case of Yes in step 1401-1, in step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets “2” as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for reducing the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery and for identifying the winning probability when executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has no setting difference (condition device with no setting difference in the lottery probability). In the modification example shown in the same figure, the condition devices that have no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (all replay players may be used, or some replay players may be used), In this process, it is determined whether or not a condition device that has no setting difference is selected. Although there is a setting difference between the lottery probability and the common bell (there is a setting difference), this process is configured not to determine whether or not a loss or common bell has been won. ing. It is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type is different from the RAM area for storing the winning number and the effect group number described above. By configuring in this way, an area for storing a winning number, which is an area in which information related to a condition device having a setting difference in winning probability and information related to a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability are stored and an effect group An area for storing an AT lottery type, which is an area in which information relating to a condition device having a setting difference in winning probability and information relating to a condition device having no setting difference in winning probability are stored without distinction; Can be configured not to be confused.

  In the case of Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table and sets the AT lottery type to the predetermined RAM area (in step 1401-2). The data is temporarily stored (overwritten) in the same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area), and the process proceeds to Step 1401-5. Note that if the answer is No in step 1401-3, the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right of FIG. In this modified example, when winning a condition device that has no setting difference in a situation where AT lottery can be executed, when winning watermelon B, “0” is selected as the AT lottery type, and cherry is won If the winning lottery type is “0”, if the watermelon A is won, the AT lottery type is “1”, if the replay is won, the AT lottery type is “2”, and if the winning order is won “2” is set as the AT lottery type.

  Next, in step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right part of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is “0” and 18 / when the AT lottery type is “1”. When the AT lottery type is “2”, it is 1/256, and “0 → 1 → 2” in order from the one that is easy to win the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed in step 1401-5 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1401-6, in step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the AT initial game number in the AT counter. In this modified example, unlike the present embodiment, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter in the AT state transition control process, and the AT initial game number is set in the AT state start control process. (The number of AT games may be added if the number of AT games is won). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “AT in-process state”, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1430). In addition, also when it is No at step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, it transfers to the following process (process of step 1430).

  In a conventional gaming machine, as an AT lottery, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination and a lottery process that is executed when a condition device that does not have a setting difference is won (a lottery process that refers to the winning combination). In the case of having the configuration, it was necessary to execute AT lottery at least twice, but by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, a common lottery process that does not refer to the winning combination (in the figure, Step 1401-2 corresponds) and lottery processing executed in the case of winning a condition device that does not have a setting difference (in the figure, the processing of Step 1401-4 corresponds) Can be executed in a single lottery process (in the figure, the process of step 1401-6 corresponds).

  As mentioned above, the configuration of the swivel type gaming machine has been exemplified as the gaming machine. it can.

  Of the configurations described above, the configuration related to the settings such as the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, and the setting / reset button (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) also applies to pachinko machines having setting values. Applicable.

<<< Configuration relating to push order navigation applicable to the gaming machine according to this example >>>
The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. Here, the execution mode of push order navigation applicable to this example will be described in detail below. In addition, it supplements that the structure explained in full detail below is applicable to all embodiment.

Regarding the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is referred to as push order navigation.
(1) Displaying an operation mode of a stop button advantageous to the player on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying “= 3”, it is possible to instruct the pressing order of “middle → left → right”. Further, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction and instruction display, and a game for executing the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game.
(2) Display of an operation mode (an image suggesting) of a stop button advantageous to the player on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying “123”, it is possible to indicate (suggest) the pressing order of “left → middle → right”.
(3) Outputting a voice suggesting an operation mode of a stop button advantageous to the player from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, by outputting “I am left” when the start lever is operated, it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.
(4) The fact that the reel window frame lamp D310 controlled by the sub-control board S is lit (flashes) so as to suggest an operation mode of a stop button advantageous to the player is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and the left stop button is turned on, thereby instructing (suggesting) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. Is possible.
(5) A stop button lamp S60 provided inside a stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub control board S is a player. Turning on (flashing) so as to suggest an operation mode of a stop button that is advantageous to the user is referred to as push order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel is lit, so that it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button.

  In the following, a push order navigation is displayed for a game in which a push order combination (a combination in which the number of payouts and the transition state of the RT state may differ depending on the push order such as a push order bell and a push order re-playing game part) is determined as a winning combination. The timing at which the navigation starts and the timing at which the push order navigation ends will be described. By determining the pushing order as the winning combination in the AT state, it is possible to execute push order navigation that informs the player of the stop button operation mode (reel stop order or stop button operation timing) that is most advantageous to the player. It is configured as follows.

<< Configuration related to display start of push order navigation >>
<Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>
First, when there is no weight, in other words, when the game is executed by operating the start lever when the minimum game time has elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is 0). The execution mode of navigation will be described below.

<Configuration 1>
First, the configuration of FIG. 94 will be described. When the AT-related state is the AT state (a gaming state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is elected) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the rotation of the spinning cylinder starts. The process is executed and the reel starts to rotate (executed in step 1260 in FIG. 18). It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

Thereafter, “= 3” is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D 270 immediately after executing the rotation process. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270,
“= 1”: Indicates the order of pushing “Left → Middle → Right” “= 2”: Indicates the order of pushing “Left → Right → Middle” “= 3”: Indicates the order of pushing “Middle → Left → Right” Instruction “= 4”: Indicates the order of pushing “Middle → Right → Left” “= 5”: Indicates the order of pushing “Right → Left → Middle” “= 6”: Push order of “Right → Middle → Left” It is configured as instructed.

  In addition, the display mode in the case of executing the push order navigation with the push order display device D270 is not limited to the above-described display mode. A number may be displayed only on the right side, or a display mode that is not a number corresponding to the stop button (or reel) may be displayed only on the right digit (lower digit). The right digit (lower digit) is displayed corresponding to the stop button (or reel) to be stopped next time, and the left digit (upper digit) is displayed to indicate the order in which the entire game is pressed. Also good. In such a configuration, the right digit (lower digit) can change the display mode for each stop button stop operation, while the left digit (upper digit) is the same regardless of the stop button stop operation. It becomes a display mode.

After “= 3” is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, “123” is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40,
“123”: Instruct the push order of “Left → Middle → Right” “132”: Instruct the push order of “Left → Right → Middle” “213”: Instruct the push order of “Middle → Left → Right” “312” ”: Instruct the push order of“ Middle → Right → Left ”“ 231 ”: Instruct the push order of“ Right → Left → Middle ”“ 321 ”: Configure the push order of“ Right → Middle → Left ”as instructed Has been.

  In addition, as a display aspect in the case of performing push order navigation in effect display apparatus S40, it is not limited to the display aspect mentioned above, It is good also as a display aspect other than arithmetic numbers, for example, it is good also as a Chinese numeral. Alternatively, an image of a character that is not a number, an image of a symbol, or the like may be used. In addition to the display modes corresponding to all the stop buttons, for example, “1-−” (push order navigation notifying that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop) instructing only the first stop. Such push order navigation may be executed.

  Note that “display” may indicate that all the elements to be displayed have been displayed, or that the elements to be displayed have started display. For example, displaying “123” on the effect display device S40 may indicate that all “123” is displayed on the effect display device S40, and display of “123” is started on the effect display device S40 ( It is also possible that an effect at the start of display has occurred. Similarly, “display end” may mean that all the elements whose display is to be ended may not be displayed, or may be that display transition for causing the elements whose display is to be ended not to be displayed is started. For example, when the display of “123” is ended on the effect display device S40, all “123” may not be displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the displays of “123” is displayed on the effect display device S40. It may be that the part has started to be erased (the effect at the end of the display has occurred, etc.). Similarly, “clear display” may mean that all elements whose display is to be erased may not be displayed, or may be that a display transition has been started so that the elements whose display should be erased are not displayed. . For example, erasing the display of “123” on the effect display device S40 may mean that all “123” is not displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the displays of “123” on the effect display device S40. It is also possible that the part has begun to be erased (for example, an effect at the time of display erasure has occurred). Similarly, erasing the display of “1” on the effect display device S40 means that the effect display device is operated after the left stop button is operated in a state where all “123” is displayed on the effect display device S40. “1” may not be displayed in S40, or part of the display of “1” may be started to be erased in the effect display device S40 (such as an effect at the time of display erasure).

  After the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes effective. After the reel starts rotating, the operation of the stop button becomes effective when the reel driving state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state. In the instruction game, the player checks the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or the effect display device S40 and operates the stop button, so that the stop button becomes effective as shown in FIG. By making it possible to display the push order navigation before, it is possible to prevent a situation where the player operates the stop button before confirming the push order (a situation where the push order is mistaken).

  In FIG. 94, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed (display is started) before the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 will be described. When “Winning-A3” is determined as the winning combination, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sends a command related to the winning / replaying winning information as a control command as a sub-control board at step 1622 as a timer interruption process. Send to S side. The CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the command processing of Step 2250 based on the command related to the winning / replaying winning information received from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M (the push order navigation such as Step 2360 is performed as the command processing). Execute push order navigation display processing to display).

  Here, the processing in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side will be described in detail. First, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a command related to winning / replay winning information from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, the command data is stored, the command analysis process, the sub main board (in the sub control board S) The process of transmitting commands related to the display order of the push order navigation from the board) to the effect control board (the board in the sub control board S) is sequentially performed. It takes about 16 ms to transmit the command according to the aspect. In addition, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process takes about 32 ms. As an example, the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S is a command related to winning / replaying winning information, but it is only an example, and other commands such as a command related to a production group number may be used. What is necessary is just to design suitably according to the execution timing of the production desired.

  Further, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled on the main control board M side, the push order display device D270 is configured to light up by dynamic lighting. If the period is 2 ms, the five 7-segment LED units are sequentially turned on every timer interrupt process, and therefore it takes about 10 ms at maximum until the lighting is completed. Since it is configured in this way, the display of the push order navigation is displayed after an opportunity (for example, operation of the start lever) to display the push order navigation is generated in the push order display device D270 controlled on the main control board M side. An opportunity to display push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side rather than the time until completion (for example, reception of a command related to winning / replay winning information from the main control board M side) ) Occurs until the display of the push navigation is completed.

  Here, the period in which the display of the push order navigation in this example can be started will be described in detail using a process executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPUC 100 of the main control board M advances the game by controlling peripheral devices and the like. Note that the processing executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M in this example is described only for specific steps in order to simplify the description, but it is supplemented that this is not the case. For example, if the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines in step 1251 that the start lever D50 has been operated, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed in step 1550. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing in step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether the reel acceleration state start timing in step 6106 has been reached. In step 6108 and step 6110, the reel driving state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the rotation of the reel is started. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 is a period corresponding to the wait period until the reel rotation starts. For example, from the game start timing (reel rotation start timing) by the game interval minimum time timer M70 as a predetermined condition. This is a period that occurs because the time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured before the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing) is not satisfied, and may also be referred to as the minimum game time. Next, in step 6114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel acceleration state end timing in step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state in Step 6116 and Step 6118, performs processing to maintain the reel constant speed state, and then validates the operation of the stop button. Is executed. In this example, any timing within the period in which the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-described processing, in other words, any time from when the start lever operation is performed until the stop button operation becomes valid. It is only necessary that the push order navigation is displayed (display start) at the timing.

  As described above, the period from when the start lever D50 is operated to when the stop button operation becomes valid has been described according to the processing executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M. In this example, the main control board M is used. In accordance with the processing executed by the CPU C100, start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid (also referred to as reel stop button operation is valid) The period will be defined separately. For example, FIG. 94 exemplifies a case where the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is performed immediately after the rotation rotation start processing is executed, and the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed during the reel acceleration state. Yes.

In FIG. 94, the case where push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state is illustrated, but the main control board M transmits a command to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board. This means that S performs the drawing process and the push order navigation is displayed during the reel acceleration state, and the configuration related to the display of the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side is as follows. Also good.
(1) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes rotation rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Reel driving state is updated to acceleration state → Main control board M pushes forward display device D270 Press to display the navigation in dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives a command related to winning / replay winning information → In response to this command, the sub-control board S executes drawing processing and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state (2) Start lever operation → Minimum game time has elapsed → The main control board M executes the spinning rotation start processing and starts the reel rotation → updates the reel driving state to the accelerated state → the main control board M pushes the push order display device D270 to the dynamic navigation point Display → The main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replaying winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives a command related to winning / replaying winning information → The main control board M is sub-controlled A predetermined command is transmitted to the substrate S side. The sub control substrate S side receives the predetermined command. In response to the predetermined command, the sub control substrate S side executes a drawing process and displays a push navigation on the effect display device S40. → Reel drive state is updated to a constant speed state (3) Start lever operation → Minimum game time has elapsed → Main control board M executes rotation rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Reel drive state is updated to acceleration state → Main control board M displays push order navigation with dynamic lighting on push order display device D270 → main control board M sends command related to winning / replay winning information to sub control board S side → sub control board S side enters・ Receiving command related to re-game winning information → Reel driving state updated to constant speed state → Sub control board S side executes drawing process triggered by the command and displays push navigation in effect display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → Minimum game time has elapsed → Main control board M executes rotation rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Reel driving state is updated to acceleration state → Main control board M is pushed by push order display device D270 Sequential navigation is displayed with dynamic lighting → The main control board M sends a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives a command related to winning / replay winning information → main control Substrate M transmits a predetermined command to the sub-control board S side → Sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → Updates the reel drive state to a constant speed state → Sub-control triggered by the predetermined command The substrate S side may perform the drawing process and display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. That is, a time value from when the sub control board S side receives a predetermined command from the main control board M side to when the drawing process is executed is designed to determine the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side. Alternatively, the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side may be determined by designing the timing at which the main control board M side transmits a predetermined command to the sub control board S side.

<Configuration 2>
Next, the configuration of FIG. 95 will be described. When the AT-related state is the AT state (a game state in which push navigation is performed when the push forward is selected) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the spinning rotation starts. The processing is executed and the reel starts to rotate. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  Thereafter, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, a command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S side, and “213” is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. After “213” is displayed as the push order navigation in the effect display device S40, “= 3” is displayed in the dynamic lighting as the push order navigation in the push order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is the timing after the rotation rotation start processing is executed, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 is the timing immediately before the operation of the reel stop button becomes effective. Executed.

<Effect 1>
By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or FIG. 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel Start rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until operation of the stop button becomes valid), for example, push order navigation is started on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can surely prevent a situation in which the player cannot see the push-forward navigation regardless of which display device the player sees, and does not give a disadvantage to the player Can do.

<Effect 2>
In addition, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. Thus, it is possible to avoid the situation where two display devices must be viewed at the same time, and the player is able to visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. User-friendly gaming machines that can be reduced can be provided.

<Configuration 3>
In the AT state, not only the effect display device S40 but also, for example, FIG. 97, as an effect means for notifying the push order when a push order (push order bell, push order re-gamer, etc.) is determined as a winning combination. 98, as shown in FIG. 98, the pressing order is notified by a lamp (hereinafter referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided in the middle panel (medium decorative panel) or by a sound output from the speaker S20. A simple configuration is also possible. In the configuration 3, when the instruction game is executed, the push window navigation can be executed by the reel window frame lamp D310. The reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position (in the vicinity of the reel) corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and includes, for example, an LED or the like as with the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound output from the speaker S20, and the like are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S as in the effect display device S40. In other words, when the push order navigation is executed by these effect means, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the step based on the command received from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M as in the case of the effect display device S40. By executing command processing (referred to here as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and audio output processing) in 2108 and step 2250, it is possible to execute push order navigation. Note that the reel window frame lamp D310 is preferably provided at a position where the player can visually recognize as much as possible. For example, an upper side or a lower side of the reel window D160 (reel from which the reel can be seen when viewed from the player). It is preferable to provide a space corresponding to each reel in the upper or lower space of the window D160.

  The configuration 3 will be described with reference to FIG. When the AT-related state is the AT state (a game state in which push navigation is performed when the push forward is selected) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the spinning rotation starts. The processing is executed and the reel starts to rotate. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  Thereafter, immediately after the rotation rotation start processing is executed, “= 3” is displayed (starts display) as dynamic push in the push order display device D270 as push order navigation. After “= 3” is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (medium stop button) is turned on (lights on) as the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. . Thereafter, “213” is displayed (starts display) as push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 97, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device”, and the display of the push order navigation by the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 is started. The timing to be performed is later than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

  Here, when the push navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning / replaying winning information from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M. After the command is received, the command data is saved and the command analysis process is sequentially performed, and then the sub-main board (the board in the sub-control board S) is pushed to the effect control board (the board in the sub-control board S). A process for transmitting a command according to the display mode and a process for transmitting a command according to the lighting mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (the board in the sub control board S) to the lamp control board (the board in the sub control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation. . In addition, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process takes about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation, and immediately executes the lighting process when there is no problem in the content of the command (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, a command related to winning / replaying winning information is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command to trigger the effect display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310. In the case of executing the push order navigation according to, the push order navigation display (lighted display) by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command related to the winning / replaying winning information, but may be a command related to the production group number.

  In this way, by displaying the push order navigation display (lighting display) by the reel window frame lamp D310 before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40, a simple notification is given to the player. This can be executed earlier, and a situation where the player operates the stop button before confirming the pushing order (a situation where the pushing order is mistaken) can be prevented.

  The order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be “push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp”. In such a configuration, after the sub main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the effect control board, the sub main board may send a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board. Then, a command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310. And may be different commands.

As described above, the case of “push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device” has been described as the order in which push order navigation is displayed (display start), but push order navigation is displayed ( The order in which the display is started is not limited to this. For example, as a modification of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), “reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device”, “effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp”, “Reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device”, “effect display device → reel window frame lamp → push order display device” may be used. In such a configuration, after the sub main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the lamp board and the effect control board, the main control board M dynamically performs the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (display start) by lighting, or a command from the main control board M and a push order navigation in the reel window frame lamp D310 that trigger the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. The command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of may be a different command. In this way, according to the timing at which a command is sent from the sub-main board, and the timing at which the main control board M pushes forward navigation to display (display start) dynamic navigation.
(1) Push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first (2) Push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed first (3) Push order by the effect display device S40 The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) can be changed, for example, the navigation is executed first.

<Effect>
As described above, in the situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation with the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state). → The period until the operation of the stop button is valid), for example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push navigation is turned on ( In this example, a user-friendly gaming machine that can be executed by using a reel window frame lamp D310 or the like, and that the player cannot easily recognize push order navigation (an advantageous operation mode of the stop button). Can be provided.

<Configuration 4>
Next, as the configuration 4, a configuration for performing notification of the push order navigation by the sound output from the speaker S20 will be described. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the pressing order by voice in the instruction game. For example, a speech such as “left”, “middle”, “right” is output as a voice from the speaker, and the stop is performed. Push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be operated (stop button to be operated) is executed.

  Configuration 4 will be described with reference to FIG. When the AT-related state is the AT state (a game state in which push navigation is performed when the push forward is selected) and the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated and the spinning rotation starts. The processing is executed and the reel starts to rotate. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  Thereafter, immediately after the rotation rotation start processing is executed, “= 3” is displayed (starts display) as dynamic push in the push order display device D270 as push order navigation. After “= 3” is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, “middle” (as the first stop operation, the middle stop button is operated as the push order navigation for outputting the sound from the speaker S20. Voice suggesting that) is output. Thereafter, “213” is displayed (starts display) as push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “push order display device → sound → effect display device”, and the timing at which the notification of the push order navigation by voice output is started is the reel window frame. Similar to the lamp D310, the timing is later than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

  Here, when the push navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled on the sub-control board S side, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning / replaying winning information from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M. After the command is received, the command data is saved and the command analysis process is sequentially performed. Then, the sub-main board (the board in the sub-control board S) is pushed to the effect control board (the board in the sub-control board S). A process for transmitting a command according to the display mode and a process for transmitting a command according to the output mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (the board in the sub control board S) to the voice control board (the board in the sub control board S). It takes about 16 ms from the reception of the command related to the winning / replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation.In addition, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, executes the drawing process when there is no problem in the content of the command, and the drawing process takes about 32 ms. On the other hand, the voice control board receives the command related to the output mode of the push order navigation, and immediately executes the voice output process when there is no problem in the content of the command (the voice output process is executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, a command related to winning / replaying winning information is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side is triggered by reception of the command by the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20. When the push order navigation is executed, the output of the push order navigation (voice output) by the speaker S20 is executed before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command related to the winning / replaying winning information, but may be a command related to the production group number.

  In this way, by configuring so that the output of the push order navigation (voice output) by the speaker S20 is executed before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, simple notification to the player is executed earlier. And the player can recognize the push order by voice even without looking at the effect display device S40, and operates the stop button before confirming the push order (the push order is wrong). Situation) can be prevented.

  As described above, the case where “push order display device → sound → effect display device” is described as the order in which push order navigation is displayed (display start), but push order navigation is displayed (display start). This order is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), it may be configured as “push order display device → effect display device → voice”. In such a configuration, after the sub main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the effect control board, the sub main board may send a command related to the push order navigation to the voice control board. Alternatively, the command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 and the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the sound from the speaker S20. The command may be a different command.

Furthermore, as the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), “voice → push order display device → effect display device”, “voice → effect display device → push order display device”, “effect display device → voice → push” It is also possible to constitute “order display device”, “effect display device → push order display device → speech”, and the like. In such a configuration, after the sub main board transmits a command related to the push order navigation to the voice control board and the effect control board, the main control board M performs the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. You may comprise so that it may display by dynamic lighting (display start), and the order from the command from the main control board M and the voice from the speaker S20 that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40. The command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the navigation may be a different command. In this way, according to the timing at which a command is sent from the sub-main board, and the timing at which the main control board M pushes forward navigation to display (display start) dynamic navigation.
(1) Push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first (2) Push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 is executed first (3) Push order by the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), such as executing navigation first.

<Effect>
In this way, in the situation where the minimum game time has passed, the start timing of the voice push order navigation is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button For example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the navigation in the pressing order is made by voice (in this example, from the speaker S20). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can be executed using the output voice, etc., and that it is difficult for the player to recognize the push order navigation.

<< Execution mode of push order navigation when there is weight >>
First, when there is a weight, in other words, when the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is greater than 0), the start lever is operated, and then the game is executed. The execution mode of the push order navigation in the case of being performed will be described below.

<Configuration 1>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 99 will be described. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an in-AT state (a gaming state in which pushing navigation is performed when pushing winning combination is won) and the minimum gaming time has not elapsed. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  First, in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 by the timer interruption process, whereby “=” is displayed on the push order display device D270. The process of displaying (starting display) the “3” push order navigation with dynamic lighting is executed. After that, during the period before the minimum game time has elapsed, “213” is displayed (starts display) as push navigation in the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Configuration 2>
Next, Configuration 2 in FIG. 100 will be described. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an in-AT state (a gaming state in which pushing navigation is performed when pushing winning combination is won) and the minimum gaming time has not elapsed. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the production group number to the sub-control board S side in the timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying “213” (starting display) as push order navigation in the effect display device S40 (the above-described drawing). Process). Thereafter, the minimum game time elapses, and the reel rotation start processing is executed to start the rotation of the reel, and the main control board M is set to a state in which the reel drive state becomes a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before (just before the operation of the stop button becomes valid), a process of displaying “= 3” with dynamic lighting (display start) as a push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is executed. In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. Note that, here, the sub control board S executes the process of displaying (213) “213” as the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 based on the reception of the command related to the effect group number. The command that triggers the process of displaying (starting display of) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, but at the timing of displaying (starting the display of) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In response, a command transmitted from the main control board M as a trigger may be determined.

<Configuration 3>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 101 will be described. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an in-AT state (a gaming state in which pushing navigation is performed when pushing winning combination is won) and the minimum gaming time has not elapsed. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  In a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the production group number to the sub-control board S side in the timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S executes a process of displaying “213” (starting display) as push order navigation in the effect display device S40 (the above-described drawing). Process). Thereafter, the main control board M dynamically sets “= 3” as the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 at the timing when the minimum game time has passed and the reel rotation start processing is executed and the reels start to rotate. A process of displaying (starting display) with lighting is executed. In FIG. 101, when the start lever is operated in a situation that requires a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is a time value for five timer interruption processes) before the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device The push order navigation of S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In addition, when the start lever is operated in a situation where a time less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms which is a time value for five timer interruption processes) remains until the minimum game time elapses, or the minimum game time When the start lever is operated in a state where the time has elapsed, as described above, the trigger for displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 controlled on the main control board M side (for example, the start lever) The display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled on the side of the sub control board S (for example, the main control board M) than the time from when the display of the push order navigation is completed until the display of the push order navigation is completed. Since the time until the display of the push order navigation is completed after the receipt of the command related to the winning / replay winning information from the side) is generated, the push order display is performed. If the push order navigation location D270 is displayed earlier than the push order Navi effect display unit S40.

  As described above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is displayed (display start) has been described. However, the push order navigation is displayed (display start). This timing is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the timing at which the push order navigation in FIG. 99 is displayed (display start), during the period before the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device S40 precedes the push order display device D270. During the period before the minimum game time elapses when the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the push order navigation is simultaneously displayed (start display) on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. Alternatively, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, the push order navigation is displayed (display start) on the push order display device D270, and the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the effect display device S40 after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the period before the minimum game time elapses, the push order navigation is displayed (starts display) on the effect display device S40, and after the minimum game time elapses, the push order display device D270 Such as the forward navigation and displays (display start), the smallest game display of elapsed push order Navi across the front and back of the time (display start) may be configured to divide the timing.

<Effect>
As described above, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration). State → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid). With this configuration, the push order navigation display (display start) timing can be made different between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. As an effect of changing the timing of displaying (starting display of) the push order navigation between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40
(1) When the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 The start lever is operated, and the main control board M plays the winning role (here, the push order) Since the timer interruption process (for example, about 2 ms) immediately after determining the production group number based on the determination of the “bell role”, the push order display device D270 can be configured to display the push order navigation (display start). Thus, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly informs the player of information related to push order navigation.
(2) When the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, Since information related to the current game state or winning combination is often suggested on the effect display device S40, the player advances the game while viewing the effect display device S40. Will go. An effect display is realized by promptly informing the player of information related to the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 that is larger in size (display area) than the push order display device D270 and is easily visible to the player. Even when the push order navigation is newly executed while viewing the device S40, the push order navigation can be confirmed while viewing the effect display device S40. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the player's gaming burden without turning his attention to the display device.
In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the push order navigation cannot be recognized regardless of which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a disadvantage to the player.

  Furthermore, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different so that the two display devices cannot be viewed at the same time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the player's gaming burden that the player can visually confirm the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. .

<Configuration 4>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 102 will be described. Note that the configuration 4 includes a reel window frame lamp D310. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an in-AT state (a gaming state in which pushing navigation is performed when pushing winning combination is won) and the minimum gaming time has not elapsed. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  The start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub-control board S side in the timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S turns on a lamp corresponding to the middle reel (medium stop button) as a push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. Execute the process. Then, the process of displaying (213) as “push order navigation” in the effect display device S40 is executed. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation by the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is earlier than the effect display device S40. As described above, when the sub control board S receives the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting process in the reel window frame lamp D310 is performed in the push order navigation. This is because it can be executed earlier than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. Thereafter, the minimum game time elapses, the reel rotation start process is executed, the reel starts to rotate, and then the push order display device D270 displays “push order navigation” before the stop button operation becomes valid. = 3 ”is displayed with dynamic lighting (display start). In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device”, and the display of the push order navigation by the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 is started. The timing to be performed is ahead of the push order display device D270 and is ahead of the effect display device S40.

  In the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 102, the start lever is operated immediately before the period before the minimum gaming time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum gaming time elapses) ( When the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device” or There are cases where “reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device”. Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 receives the command. In this case, it takes about 32 ms as the time until “213” is displayed (starts display) (until the drawing process is executed) as the push order navigation, and immediately before the period before the minimum gaming time elapses ( For example, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M transmits a command related to the production group number to the sub control board S side) until the minimum game time elapses, the push order display device The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display start) after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310.

In the reel window frame lamp D310, the start lever is operated immediately before the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses) (the main control board M is When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board S side), it takes time until the sub control board S side receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. There is a case where the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp is displayed (display start) after the push order navigation is displayed by the order display device D270.
As described above, the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 is started as described above: start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → If it is a period until the operation of the stop button is valid, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing for displaying the push order navigation.

<Effect>
In this way, by displaying the push order navigation display (lighting display) by the reel window frame lamp D310 before the push order navigation display by the effect display device S40, a simple notification is given to the player. This can be executed earlier, and a situation where the player operates the stop button before confirming the pushing order (a situation where the pushing order is mistaken) can be prevented.

  Further, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be executed by using the lighting of the lamp (in this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310). It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the push order navigation.

<Configuration 5>
Next, the configuration 5 in FIG. 103 will be described. Note that the configuration 5 is configured to execute the push order navigation with the sound output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The start lever is operated in a state in which the state relating to the AT is an in-AT state (a gaming state in which pushing navigation is performed when pushing winning combination is won) and the minimum gaming time has not elapsed. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub-control board S side by the timer interruption process during the period when the minimum game time has not elapsed. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S is “middle!” (The middle stop button is used as the first stop operation) as the push order navigation for outputting the sound from the speaker S20. A process of outputting a voice with a voice that suggests an operation is executed. Then, the process of displaying (213) as “push order navigation” in the effect display device S40 is executed. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation by the sound from the speaker S20 is started is earlier than the effect display device S40. This is because, when the sub control board S receives a command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the voice output process from the speaker S20 draws the push order navigation on the production display device S40. This is because it is executed earlier. Thereafter, after the minimum game time has elapsed, the reel starts to rotate, and the operation of the stop button becomes effective, and the main control board M becomes more stable than the operation of the stop button becomes effective because the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant. The process of displaying (= starting display) “= 3” in the dynamic lighting as the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 before. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “voice → effect display device → push order display device”, and the timing at which the notification of the push order navigation by voice output is started is the push order display. It is ahead of the device D270 and is ahead of the effect display device S40.

  Even in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 103, the start lever is operated immediately before the period before the minimum gaming time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum gaming time elapses) ( When the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub-control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is “push order display device → sound → effect display device” or “sound → There is a case of “push order display device → effect display device”. Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 receives the command. In this case, it takes about 32 ms as the time until “213” is displayed (starts display) (until the drawing process is executed) as the push order navigation, and immediately before the period before the minimum gaming time elapses ( For example, if the start lever is operated (the main control board M transmits a command related to the production group number to the sub control board S side) until the minimum game time elapses, the push order display device The push order navigation by the effect display device S40 may be displayed (display start) after the push order navigation display by D270 or the push order navigation notification by voice.

  Also in the speaker S20, the start lever is operated immediately before the period before the minimum gaming time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum gaming time elapses) (the main control board M is the sub control board). When the command related to the production group number is transmitted to the S side), it takes time until the sub control board S side receives the command related to the production group number from the main control board M side. There is a case where the push order navigation by the sound from the speaker S20 is notified after the display of the push order navigation by D270.

  As described above, the timing for starting the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is as follows: start lever operation → period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → If it is a period until the operation of the stop button is valid, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be determined as appropriate.

<Effect>
In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is determined for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel rotation start → Reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid), for example, even a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, Push order navigation can be performed in a simple notification mode of voice (in this example, voice output from the speaker S20), in a situation in which the effect display device S40 is not seen focusing on the reel or the stop button. Even when the push order navigation is executed, the player recognizes the push order navigation by voice while paying attention to the reel or the stop button. Can be for, it is possible to provide a occurs hardly user-friendly gaming machine that such a player can not recognize the push order Navi.

  The timing for displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the example of the timing for displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 have been described with respect to the case where there is a weight and the case where there is no weight, respectively. The timing at which the push navigation is displayed on each display device is not limited to these. From the start of operation of the start lever D50 described above, start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → reserved button operation is in the appropriate order The timing for displaying the navigation can be determined. Further, it is preferable to set the display timing of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 to be narrower than the above-described period. This is because a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms or more) is required from when the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a predetermined command from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M until the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. It is. Further, if the number of drawing frames displayed on the effect display device S40 is large, an additional time is required. The winning combination is determined after the operation of the start lever D50 is performed. Considering the time required for the push navigation to be displayed on the effect display device S40 after the winning combination is determined as described above, As an example of the timing at which the display of push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is started, the minimum game time has not elapsed (when there is a weight) → reel rotation start (when there is no weight) → reel acceleration It is preferable to set the period until the operation of the state → reel constant speed state → stop button becomes effective. By defining in this way, the period until the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the period until the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 are made different. Can do. It is possible to determine the timing for starting the display of push order navigation on each display device as appropriate during these periods.

For example, in the period until the start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button operation is valid, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, voice, reel When describing an example of the order of notification of push order navigation with the window frame lamp D310,
(1) Push order display device → effect display device → audio → reel window frame lamp (2) Push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice (3) Push order display device → voice → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) push order display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (5) push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → sound (6) push order display device → reel window Frame lamp → Voice → Production display device (7) Production display device → Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp (8) Production display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Voice (9) Production display device → voice → push order display device → reel window frame lamp (10) effect display device → voice → reel window frame lamp → push order display device (11) effect display device → reel window frame lamp → push order display device → voice (12 ) Production display device → Window frame lamp → voice → push order display device (13) voice → push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (14) voice → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (15) Voice → Production display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Voice → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (17) Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Production display Device (18) voice → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device (19) reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device → voice (20) reel window frame lamp → push order display device → Audio → Production display device (21) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Push order display device → Voice (22) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Voice → Push order display device (23) Reel window frame lamp → Audio Push order display device → effect display device (24) reel window frame lamp → sound → effect display device → start lever operation → minimum game time has elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel setting In the period from the speed state to the operation of the stop button being valid, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start).

Further, as one of the production means controlled by the sub-control board S, control is performed by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). The stop button lamp S60 can be configured by adding a push order navigation that lights (flashes) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player. By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the production group number to the sub-control board S side in the timer interrupt process. After receiving the command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights (or blinks) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button to be subjected to the first stop operation. Execute the process. When an example of the order of display (start of display) of the push order navigation of the configuration in which the push order navigation by the stop button D40 is added is described,
(25) Push order display device → voice → reel window frame lamp → stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (flashing)) → effect display device (26) push order display device → voice → stop button lamp (first stop) Button only lights (flashes)) → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (27) push order display device → voice → stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (flashes)) and reel window frame lamp almost simultaneously → effect Although it can be configured as a display device or the like, the order here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the above (27), the timing of turning on (flashing) the reel window frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 is set at the same time, but it is also possible to further output sound from the speaker S20 at the same time. Execution timing (push order display device D270) of timer interrupt processing related to display (display start) of push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270), or sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel) The order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start) may be determined in accordance with the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation of the window frame lamp D310, the speaker S20, and the stop button D40). In the case of executing push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamps corresponding to all reels are not lit (flashing) but only the stop button lamps corresponding to the reels to be stopped. It is preferable to control to turn on (flash). For example, when the push button navigation of “213”: “middle → left → right” is executed by the stop button lamp S60, the stop button lamp (lit) corresponding to the middle stop button D42 → the middle stop button D42 is operated → middle stop Stop button lamp corresponding to the button D42 (off) → Stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button D41 (lit) → Operate the left stop button D41 → Stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button D41 (off) → Right stop button Stop button lamp corresponding to D43 (lit) → Operate right stop button D43 → Stop button lamp corresponding to reel is lit based on the progress of the game, such as stop button lamp corresponding to right stop button D43 (lights off) (Flashing), configured to turn off.

  Further, the case where the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided in the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) is executed by the sub control board S is described above. The control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) may be configured to be executed by the main control board M. Hereinafter, the start timing of the push order navigation by the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) on the main control board M will be described.

When the stop button lamp S60 is controlled on the main control board M, the timer is interrupted after the start lever is operated and the production group number is determined based on the determination of the winning combination (in this case, the pressing order combination) A process for turning on (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60 is executed by a process (for example, if it is the first cycle from the determination of the production group number, the time taken to turn on the stop button lamp S60 is about 2 ms). It becomes possible to do. By configuring in this way, an example of the order in which the push order navigation of the configuration in which the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is added (display start) is described.
(28) Push order display device → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (flashing)) → Audio → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (29) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (flashing)) → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Production display device (30) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button is lit (flashing)) and push order display device are almost simultaneous → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Production Although it can be configured as a display device or the like, the order here is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the above (28) to (30), the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 that is controlled on the main control board M side is the sound from the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20 that is controlled on the sub control board S side. , Which is started before the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310, the timing for executing the timer interrupt processing for lighting (flashing) the stop button lamp S60 is changed on the main control board M side, The push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 may be started after the push order navigation on the sub-control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40, the sound from the speaker, the reel window frame lamp D310) is started. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing related to display (display start) of push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel window frame) The order of displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation may be determined in accordance with the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation of the lamp D310 and the speaker S20).

<< Configuration related to display termination of push order navigation >>
Next, the end timing of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 will be described. The timing when the push order navigation ends can be freely designed to some extent according to the period when the player finishes the game, similar to the timing when the push order navigation starts. An example of a period during which the player ends the game is the timing at which the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated and all reels are completely stopped and a winning is achieved, the game ends when the payout of the game medal based on the winning is completed.

  As a period for ending the display of the push order navigation, starting from the operation timing of the third stop button, the “third stop button operation (pressing) → third stop button non-pressing → winning determination → payout completion based on winning” period It is possible to define any timing. In this example, as the timing at which the push order navigation ends, the end timing of the push order navigation differs for each push order (push order bell, push order re-playing game combination). For example, the timing of ending the display of the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 differs depending on whether the determined winning combination is a push order bell or a push order re-playing game combination.

  In the configurations 1 to 5 described below, the first stop button and the second stop button are already pressed in order to explain the end timing of the push order navigation, and the effect display device It is supplemented that the push order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button in S40 is also ended.

<Configuration 1>
First, the configuration 1 in FIG. 104 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to the AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, In the situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). When the stop button is pressed, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is completed, and the push order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start). Is done. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  Here, the push order navigation disappearance effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the display of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device is finished. In the figure, the right stop button is operated and the sensor for detecting the operation of the right stop button is turned on from off in the situation where “3” is displayed as push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, the command related to the detection is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command related to the detection. Thus, by executing the process of deleting the display of “3”, the push order navigation disappearing effect that is deleted after the display of “3” is transmitted is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the situation where the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 has ended, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 ends). Here, both the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 are terminated by “pressing the third stop button” (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is off). In FIG. 104, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is ahead of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40. The display is completely erased. This is the same as the start of the push order navigation, and even if the end timing of the push order navigation is “when the third stop button is pressed”, the CPUSC of the sub control board S draws a plurality of frames. It can be said that the end of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed by the amount of the process for displaying the display.

  The end of the push order navigation will be described in detail. In the push order display device D270, the push order display device D270 is turned on → starts turning off → completes turning off, and the push order navigation is finished. Display of forward navigation → start display of push order navigation disappearance effect → display end of push order navigation disappearance effect (erasure complete) ends push order navigation. In this example, the timing at which the push order display device D270 starts to turn off is referred to as the push order display device extinguishing, and the display start of the push order disappearance effect is referred to as the display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect. The push order display device extinction may be replaced with the timing when the push order display device D270 is completely extinguished, or the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect may be replaced with the timing when the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect ends. The timing of turning off the push order display device and the display (display start) of the push order disappearance effect may be the display of the push order display device off → display of the push order disappearance effect (display start), or display of the push order disappearance effect. (Display start) → Push order display device may be turned off, and the push order display device may be turned off and the push order navigation disappearing effect display (display start) may be performed simultaneously.

Further, the configuration in which the display of the push order navigation is ended when the third stop button is operated has been described above. However, when the third stop button is operated, the timing when the third stop button is pressed (the operation of the third stop button is detected). Is the timing at which it is detected by interruption processing on the main control board M side that the sensor for turning on has been turned on, and is sometimes referred to as “when the third stop button is pressed”). After the button is pressed, the third stop button is released (after detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side) In the following description, the timing at which it is detected that the switch has been turned from on to off may also be referred to as “when the third stop button is not pressed”). There can be also be configured to define the timing of completion. For example, in the order of the timing when the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40,
(When push order navigation ends at the same time)
(1) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from the off state by the interruption process on the main control board M side → the push order display device is turned off → the sub control is performed from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the substrate S side → the sub control substrate S side receives the command → display of the push order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(2) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from the off state by the interruption process on the main control board M side → the push order display device is turned off → the interruption process on the main control board M side To detect that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off → transmit a command relating to detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub Control board S side receives the command → Display push order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(3) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from on by the interruption process on the main control board M side → the push order display device is turned off → the sub control is performed from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the substrate S side → the sub control substrate S side receives the command → display of the push order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(4) It is detected by the interruption process on the main control board M side that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off → the third from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Sends a command related to detection of the stop button → the sub control board S side receives the command → displays the push order disappearance effect (display starts) → turns off the push order display device (5) The interrupt process on the main control board M side causes the first 3 Detect that the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button has been turned on from OFF → Send a command related to detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → Sub control board S The side receives the command → Displays the push order disappearance effect (display start) → The sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from on by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side. Is detected → Push order display device is turned off (6) It is detected from the main control board M side that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off by the interrupt process on the main control board M side. A command related to detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the sub-control board S side → the sub-control board S side receives the command → display of the push order disappearing effect (display start) → turn off the push order display device (end of push order navigation) Are simultaneously)
(7) It is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from the off state by the interruption process on the main control board M side → the third from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side Send command related to detection of stop button → Sub control board S side receives the command → Push order extinction effect display (display start) and push order display device extinguished (8) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side, Detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from ON → Sends a command for detecting the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board It is possible to define that the S-side device receives the command and displays the push-order disappearance effect (display start) and simultaneously turns off the push-order display device.

Further, for example, the display mode of the push order navigation not when the third stop button is pressed but when the first stop button is pressed or when the second stop button is pressed will be described as a supplement. First, in the push order display device D270, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned from on to off (or from on to off) by interruption processing on the main control board M side after the lighting is started. Until it is detected and turned off, the lighting state continues. On the other hand, in the effect display device S40, for example, the first stop button is pressed (the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from off to on (or from on to off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side). ) A command relating to detection of the first stop button is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → the sub control board S side receives the command → the push order corresponding to the first stop button disappears Start changing the display mode of the effect display (display start) and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next (for example, display of “2”) (hereinafter referred to as “display mode of the second reel press order navigation”). (Also referred to as “change start”). The order in which they are executed is as follows:
(9) Display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to the first stop button (display start) → Start change of display mode of second reel push order navigation (10) Start change of display mode of second reel push order navigation → No. Display of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to 1 stop button (display start)
It may be configured as either. Similarly, when the second stop button is operated,
(11) Display (display start) of push order disappearance effect (display mode is changed) corresponding to the second stop button → Start change of display mode of third reel push order navigation (12) Third reel push order Start of change of display mode of navigation → Display of push order disappearance effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to second stop button (display start)
It can be configured as follows.

<Configuration 2>
Next, the configuration 2 in FIG. 105 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to the AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, In the situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, the push order navigation disappearing effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display start) on the effect display device S40. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  Thereafter, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect is finished while the right stop button is being pressed (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is finished). Thereafter, when the right stop button is released, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is ended.

<Configuration 3>
Next, Configuration 3 in FIG. 106 will be described. In FIG. 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is “3” instead of “= 3”. That is, the numerical value is displayed as the push order navigation in the right digit in the push order display device D270, and the left digit is not displayed. Further, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation display and the acquisition number display.

  The instruction game is executed when the state related to the AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, In the situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on by the interruption process on the main control board M side → the sub-control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the substrate S side → the sub control substrate S side receives the command → the effect display device S40 displays the push order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) (display start) Is done. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

  After that, while the right stop button is pressed, the symbol combination related to the pressing order bell (the symbol combination for 11 payouts) is stopped and displayed, and “0” is displayed on the pressing order display device D270. Thereafter, when the right stop button is released, the payout relating to the symbol combination displayed in a stopped state is started, and “1” → “2” → “3” →... “10” → “11” is displayed on the push order display device D270. ”Is displayed. After “11” is displayed on the push order display device D270 (after the acquired number is displayed), the display on the push order display device D270 is ended (not displayed). In this way, the push order display device D270 can display both the push order navigation and the acquired number display, and the display mode of the push order navigation display is a numerical value only in the lower digits of the push order display device D270. When the symbol combination in which the game medals are paid out in the designated game is stopped, the push order display device D270 displays both the push order navigation and the acquired number display. May misunderstand the push order navigation or the acquired number of sheets. Therefore, the display of the push order navigation is terminated, and “0” is displayed during the start of the display of the acquired number of coins, so that regardless of the number of payouts relating to the stopped symbol combination (for example, 1 The player can recognize that the display of the acquired number starts (whether the number is 11 or 11). The numerical value of “0” may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as push order navigation.

  It should be noted that the end timing of the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is changed from “third stop button non-pressed (after release)”, that is, “3” display (function of the push order display device) to “0” display. The timing is switched to (function of payout number display device), but it may be the timing of “completion of payout based on winning” when the display on the push order display device D270 completely disappears, for example. By setting the end timing of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 to “when the third stop button is pressed”, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is ahead of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. You can see that it ends.

  As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as “13”, “23”, and “33” instead of “= 3”. The displayed push order navigation will be described in detail. The left digits “1”, “2”, and “3” are associated with the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the position of the reel on which the stop operation should be performed. There is (for example, “1” indicates that the reel to be stopped is the left reel M51, and “2” indicates that the reel to be stopped is the middle reel M52). The right digit “3” corresponds to the push order “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”) displayed on the effect display device S40 as in the previous configuration. Is. With this configuration, the push order navigation is displayed in the order of “23” → “13” → “33”, and the stop button is operated according to the push order. At the timing, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next reel should be stopped is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the display of the push order navigation (“33” in this example) corresponding to the final stop operation disappears, and the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 ends.

<Effect>
In this way, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set to a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → non-press third stop button → winning determination → winning) For example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. Thus, it is possible to avoid the situation where two display devices must be viewed at the same time, and the player's game burden that the player can visually confirm the end of the push order navigation at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the risk.

  In addition, the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button by the interruption processing on the main control board M side is turned on when the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 ends (the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40) ends. If it is specified that the game will be off (release the stop button), the player will also stop if the player holds down the final stop button (the 3rd stop button) with an expectation on the outcome of the game. It can be configured so that the push order navigation does not end until the button is turned off. Here, if the push navigation is erased immediately after the stop button is turned on from off, the expectation that the game result may not be advantageous to the player is reduced. Since there is a possibility that the event will be lost, it is not that the result of the game will not be advantageous to the player by configuring the push order navigation not to end until the stop button is turned from on to off. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of an event that reduces the expectation of the heel.

<Configuration 4>
Next, the configuration 4 in FIG. 107 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to the AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, In the situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). By pressing the stop button, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on by the interruption process on the main control board M side → the sub-control from the main control board M side A command related to detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the substrate S side → the sub control substrate S side receives the command → display of the push order disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) on the effect display device S40 (display start) At the same time, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 ends. In this game, a predetermined push-order replay game is won, and it is most advantageous to the player by stopping operation in the order of “middle → left → right” (RT state with a high replay win probability) Can be maintained) (for example, when “re-game-D2”, which is a three-push push-order re-game where the first stop in the middle is the most profitable, is won).

  Thereafter, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect is finished while the right stop button is being pressed (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is finished). After that, when the right stop button is released (it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off by the interruption process on the main control board M side), the symbol combination related to replaying Is displayed, the automatic bet is executed and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit (when the automatic bet is executed, for example, the 1-bet lamp D211 → the 2-bet lamp D212 → the 3-bet lamp D213 in this order. Will light up).

<Configuration 5>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 108 will be described. The instruction game is executed when the state related to the AT is in the AT state (the game state in which the push order navigation is executed when the push order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, In the situation where the push order navigation related to the 3 stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation related to the game is displayed on the push order display device D270, the right stop button is operated as the third stop. (Pressed). When the stop button is pressed, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on from the off state by the interrupt process on the main control board M side. A command related to detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the substrate S side → the sub control substrate S side receives the command → a push order navigation disappearance effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start) ) In this game, a predetermined push-order replay game is won, and it is most advantageous to the player by stopping operation in the order of “middle → left → right” (RT state with a high replay win probability) Can be maintained) (for example, when “re-game-D2”, which is a three-push push-order re-game where the first stop in the middle is the most profitable, is won).

  Thereafter, the display of the push order navigation disappearance effect is finished while the right stop button is being pressed (the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is finished). After that, when the right stop button is released (detection that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off by the interruption process on the main control board M side is detected from on to off), the symbol combination related to replaying Since the automatic bet is executed, the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 1-bet lamp D211 is lit, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 is terminated.

  Thus, for example, in the case of having the configuration 1 in FIG. 104 and the configuration 5 in FIG. 108, the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is distinguished from the push order bell combination or the push order replay combination. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that enables even a player who is not attached to be able to determine which small role has won a prize, depending on the end timing of push order navigation.

  As described above, the push order navigation end timing in the case of the push order bell as the push order or the push order re-playing game has been described. In the effect display device S40, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is described as an example only when “the third stop button is pressed”, but is not limited thereto. As a period for the game to end, if the third stop button operation (pressing) → the third stop button non-pressing → winning determination → payout completion based on winning is determined, the timing to end the push order navigation is arbitrarily determined Is possible. Further, in the push order display device D270, as the timing when the push order navigation ends, the period in which the push order navigation ends is different depending on whether the winning combination is a push order bell or a push order re-playing game combination. ing. As an example of the case where the winning combination is a push order re-playing game combination, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is “when one bet lamp is lit”, and the push order is displayed by arbitrarily setting the lighting timing of the one bet lamp D211. The end timing of the push order navigation of the device D270 changes greatly. As an example, if the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is at the start of the next game, “third stop button operation (pressing) → third” which is the end period of the pressing order navigation when the winning combination is the pressing order bell Stop button non-pressing → winning determination → payout completion based on winning ”,“ third stop button operation (pressing) → third stop button non-pressing → winning determination → payout completion based on winning → 1 bet lamp If the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is not pressed, the third stop button operation (pressing) → the third stop button is not pressed → when the 1-bet lamp is lit → winning “Determination → Payout Completion Based on Winning” ”and the winning combination is included in the end period of the push order navigation when the push order bell.

Similarly to the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends is also based on the third stop button operation (pressed) → the third stop button not pressed → winning determination → winning In the period of payout completion, an example of the order in which the push order navigation with the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the sound, and the reel window frame lamp D310 ends will be described.
(1) Push order display device → effect display device → audio → reel window frame lamp (2) Push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice (3) Push order display device → voice → effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) push order display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (5) push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → sound (6) push order display device → reel window Frame lamp → Voice → Production display device (7) Production display device → Push order display device → Voice → Reel window frame lamp (8) Production display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Voice (9) Production display device → voice → push order display device → reel window frame lamp (10) effect display device → voice → reel window frame lamp → push order display device (11) effect display device → reel window frame lamp → push order display device → voice (12 ) Production display device → Window frame lamp → voice → push order display device (13) voice → push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (14) voice → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (15) Voice → Production display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp (16) Voice → Production display device → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device (17) Voice → Reel window frame lamp → Push order display device → Production display Device (18) voice → reel window frame lamp → effect display device → push order display device (19) reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device → voice (20) reel window frame lamp → push order display device → Audio → Production display device (21) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Push order display device → Voice (22) Reel window frame lamp → Production display device → Voice → Push order display device (23) Reel window frame lamp → Audio Push order display device → Production display device (24) Reel window frame lamp → Voice → Production display device → Push order display device In this way, the third stop button operation (press) → No third stop button pressed → Winning determination → Winning In the payout completion period based on, it is possible to appropriately configure the timing at which the push order navigation ends.

Moreover, as one of the production means controlled by the sub control board S, control is performed by the sub control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43). An example of the order in which the push order navigation of the configuration in which the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 to be added is added will be described. As the processing up to the end of the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from the on state. → Main control board M Transmits a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S in the timer interrupt process → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button Turns off (starts turning off). In addition, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button has been turned off from the on state. The main control board M performs the first stop on the side of the sub control board S in the timer interrupt process. A command related to the operation of the button is transmitted → the sub control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided in the first stop button is turned off (starts to turn off) and provided in the second stop button. The stop button lamp S60 is turned on (lighting starts).
(25) Push order display device → effect display device → audio → reel window frame lamp → stop button (the third stop button lamp goes off)
(26) Push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp → voice → stop button (the third stop button lamp goes off)
It is possible to configure as follows. The end timing of the push order navigation by the stop button D40 is the same as the reel window frame lamp D310 that executes the push order navigation by turning on / off the lamp, the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40, voice, reel It may be before or after the window frame lamp D310. In addition, when the third stop button is operated, the light may be turned off when the third stop button is pressed, or may be turned off when the third stop button is not pressed.

As described above, in this example, one game progresses based on <<< configuration related to the start of display of push order navigation >>> and <<< configuration related to the end of display of push order navigation >>>. . Specifically describing an example of the flow of one game from when the push order navigation is displayed (display start) until the push order navigation ends,
1. Push-push navigation display (display start)
Start lever operation → push order navigation display (display start) (push order display device D270) → push order navigation display (display start) (effect display device S40)
2. From first stop button operation to second stop button operation 2-1. Production display device S40
Display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of first stop button (display start) → End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of first stop button → Change of display mode of second reel push order navigation → Display (display start) of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of second stop button (display mode changed) → End of display of push order disappearance effect corresponding to operation of second stop button → third reel Changing display mode of push order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270
The push order display device D270 is lit.
3. Third stop button operation to end of push order navigation display Third stop button operation → push order display device extinguished → display of push order navigation disappearance effect corresponding to third stop button operation (display start) → third stop button End of the display of the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the operation In this way, the flow of one game proceeds. In addition, the example described above is only an example. The display (start of display) of the push order navigation may be configured to include the sound output from the reel window frame lamp D310 and the speaker S20, the timing of the display (display start) of the push order navigation, and the push order. The order in which the navigation is displayed (display start) is not limited to this. In addition, 2. In the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation, in the effect display device S40, the display of the push order disappearing effect corresponding to each stop button (display start) and the change of the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel are performed. The order to do is not limited to this. 3. In the third stop button operation to the end of the push order navigation display, the order of the push order navigation display end of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, and the timing at which the push order navigation ends is further detailed. It may be defined (can be further classified by pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

  By configuring as in the present example, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different from each other. It is possible to avoid the situation where the display devices must be viewed at the same time, and the player can reduce the player's gaming burden of being able to visually confirm the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (pressing) → third stop button non-pressing → winning determination → payout completion based on winning) For example, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the push displayed on the effect display device S40. By changing the navigation end timing, it is possible to avoid the situation in which two display devices must be viewed at the same time, and the player can end the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce a player's gaming burden of being visible.

<Display mode when pressing order is incorrect>
Here, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, an example of the configuration of the display form of the push order navigation when the game is executed in a push order (or different operation timing) different from the push order navigation is described in detail. Describe. Here, a case where a game in which the push order bell is won and the correct answer push order is “left → middle → right” is executed is illustrated.

Under the condition that “123” is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and “= 1” is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button is used as the first stop operation. (The correct push order corresponds to the left stop button) is operated, and it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is turned on from the off state as the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → main control A command related to the detection of the first stop button is transmitted from the substrate M side to the sub-control substrate S side → the sub-control substrate S side receives the command → the sub-control substrate S side displays all “123” on the effect display device S40 Execute the process to erase.
You may comprise as mentioned above. As described above, when a stop button that is not in the correct push order is operated in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, all reels (or stop buttons) on the sub-control board S side are operated. On the other hand, the main control board M is configured to maintain the display of the push order navigation. Note that the push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order navigation by the push order display device D270) is for the third stop operation (for detecting the operation of the third stop button as an interrupt process on the main control board M side). It is configured to be erased when it is detected that the sensor has been turned off from on.

<< Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >>
Next, a configuration related to reel stop control and display control of push order navigation (effect display device S40) will be described. It should be noted that in the game, the player has won a predetermined push order bell, and the stop operation in the order of “middle → left → right” is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, This is an example of “winning-A3”.

<Configuration 1>
First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, an instruction game related to the push order bell is executed in the AT state, and “213” is displayed as push order navigation on the effect display device S40. The middle stop button is pressed at the timing when the replay symbol No. 11 in the middle part of the middle reel is positioned, and the display corresponding to the pushing order navigation “1” of the middle reel changes to the pushing order navigation disappearing effect. The middle reel stop button remains pressed. Further, the middle reel is controlled so as to stop the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 11 payouts, which is the maximum number to be acquired, by performing the operation of stopping the middle reel which is the correct pushing order. In this example, the 15th bell stops at the middle stage (effective line) of the middle reel. That is, when the middle stop button is operated at this timing, a slip of the maximum number of frames (4 frames in this example) is generated from the 11th replay A, and the 15th bell is stopped and displayed on the winning line. Control is performed.

  Here, the operation control of the stepping motor from when the stop operation is performed until the reel stops will be described with reference to FIG. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the state shifts from the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. 35 <reel rotation speed image> to the reel deceleration standby state (5). In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation was performed and the position of the symbol constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game is calculated, and for a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms) By determining that the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the conditional device won in the game can be stopped and displayed on the winning line, the symbol combination related to the conditional device won in the game is configured. The rotation is continued so that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, control is performed so that the symbol constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game transitions to the reel deceleration state of (6) and transitions to the reel stop state of (7) at the timing when the symbol combination reaches the winning line. To do.

  Then, as described in the upper right part of FIG. 109, in the effect display device S40, the middle reel push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (the display ends), and the middle reel stops and displays the 15th bell on the winning line. Therefore, the slip control is continued. The middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left row of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next. The display mode that changes at this time may be any mode as long as the player can recognize the stop button that should be stopped (such as changing the number greatly, adding movement to the number, or flashing the number). ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues the slip control to stop and display the 15th bell on the winning line. The middle reel stop button is being pressed. Note that the timing for changing to the display mode that highlights the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next may be before the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (display end), or in the push order. It may be after the navigation disappearance effect is erased (display end), or at the same time as the push order navigation disappearance effect is erased (display end).

  Thereafter, after the middle stop button is pressed for a predetermined time, the 15th bell of the middle reel is stopped and displayed on the winning line. The predetermined time here is a time during which the maximum slip control of the middle reel is performed (for example, for 190 ms). As described above, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation, the stop operation is performed before the reel on which the stop operation has been performed is stopped and displayed (before the next stop button operation becomes effective). The push order navigation corresponding to the reel that has been performed is erased, and the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next can be changed.

  Here, as an example that can be implemented in this example, the case where the stop operation is performed at the position where the slip of the maximum number of frames occurs has been described, but for example, the symbols constituting the push forward can be stopped with 0 frames When the stop operation is performed at the position, the timing for changing to the display mode in which the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next is highlighted is after the reel is stopped and displayed. Even in the case of 0 frames, the display mode in which the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next is highlighted before the next stop button operation becomes effective. It is configured to change. With this configuration, even in the case of 0 frames, the stop button is operated after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, and the player erroneously performs the stop operation. Can be prevented. In addition, it is preferable that the timing for changing to the display mode for highlighting the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next is earlier, and the timing is as early as possible even in the case of 0 frames. Is preferred.

  Further, in this example, the push order bell has been described as an example, but the present invention can be applied not only to the push order bell but also to all condition devices that generate push order navigation. Further, lighting by the reel window frame lamp D310 or sound output from the speaker S20 may be used as effect means for notifying the pressing order. For example, when the push order navigation using the sound output from the reel window frame lamp D310 or the speaker S20 is included, the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel is changed in the effect display device S40. (1) If the reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel is turned on, and if it is a voice, the dialogue corresponding to the next reel is output as a voice. It is possible to configure.

  Further, in this example, as a configuration relating to << reel control and push order navigation >>, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 has been described as an example as an effect means for executing the push order navigation. For example, it may be configured to include a push order navigation by a stop button lamp S60 provided inside a reel window frame lamp D310, sound, stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). Good. Push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off the reel window frame lamp. Voice push order navigation is “left”, “right”, and “middle” from the speaker S20. And the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) is the left stop button corresponding to the reel. This is executed by turning on (flashing) and turning off D41.

For example, the reel window frame lamp D310, sound, stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) are added to the configuration related to << reel control and push order navigation configuration >> in this example. )
(1) Reel window frame lamp D310
(1-1) The lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is performed is turned off (1-2) The lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (2) Sound (2-1) Next Output of sound corresponding to the reel to be stopped (3) Stop button D40
(3-1) Turn off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed (3-2) Turn on the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation should be performed next (4) Effect display device S40
(4-1) Display the push order disappearance effect corresponding to the reel where the stop operation is performed (display end)
(4-2) It is possible to define a configuration related to the push order navigation for each effect unit as described above in the display mode in which the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next is highlighted. The order of executing these configurations (1-1) to (4-2) may be determined in any way. For example, the order of execution for each effect means may be determined (as an example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button → effect display device), or the order of execution for each reel may be determined. Alternatively, as an example, the processing is performed in the order of processing related to the reel on which the stop operation is performed → processing related to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next, or a combination of these.

  In addition, in this example, << the configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >> is described with reference to FIG. 109, and in FIG. 109, the case where the first stop operation is performed is described as an example. The configuration to which this example is applicable is not limited only to the first stop operation. For example, the present invention can be applied even when the second stop operation is performed or when the third stop operation is performed. At the time of the third stop operation, the process corresponding to the reel to be stopped next (for example, change to “display mode for highlighting push order navigation” in the effect display device S40, reel window frame lamp) The process of “lighting of the lamp corresponding to the reel to be stopped next” in D310 is not executed.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even when the stop button is operated in accordance with the push order navigation and the reel corresponding to the stop button executes stop control accompanied by the slip of the maximum number of frames, the effect display device S40 End of the push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button (from the start to the end of the disappearance effect display), and change in the display mode of the push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button to be stopped next (start of highlighting) Can be executed before the next stop button operation becomes effective, so that the player can be prevented from operating the stop button by mistake before recognizing the stop button to be stopped next. .

<<<<< Third Embodiment Medal Addition Processing by Insertion Sensor >>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of processing for adding game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 as credits will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medals, and a predetermined passage condition (the game medals that pass through satisfy the standard, If it is determined that there is no error, the game medal flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without causing an error. Further, a first insertion sensor D20s and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided further behind the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and a game medal that has been received satisfying the dimensional standard replaces the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. When passing, when it is determined that it has been inserted normally, the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal, and credit addition can be performed. When the game medal passes, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the signal (information on the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, the first insertion sensor D20s Information on time from turning on to turning off, information on timing at which the second making sensor D20s is turned on, information on time from turning on the second making sensor D20s to turning off). The main control board M is supplied. Here, the timing at which credit addition can be performed can be determined according to the on / off status of each of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<< Third Embodiment Timing Chart for Game Medal Detection by Insertion Sensor >>>
FIG. 110 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage of a game medal (OFF → ON) at the timing 1 in the figure. Subsequently, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage of the game medal (OFF → ON) at the timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings and the like are supplied to the main control board M as the signals described above. Subsequently, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting the game medal (ON → OFF) at the timing 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the game medal until the game medal detection is finished is calculated by the main control board M, and A is within a predetermined range (in the third embodiment, If 4 ms ≦ A <183 ms), it is determined that the passing of the game medal is normally detected. Further, a time B from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal until the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and B is within a predetermined range (2 ms ≦ B < 115 ms), it is determined that the passing of the game medal is normally detected. Thereafter, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s finishes the detection of the game medal (ON → OFF) at timing 4 in the figure. A time C from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal until the second insertion sensor D20s ends the detection is calculated by the main control board M, and C is within a predetermined range (4 ms ≦ C <183 ms). If so, it is determined that the passing of a game medal is normally detected. In this way, at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off, it is determined whether the game medal normally passes through the medal selector DS, and further the first insertion sensor. A gaming medal inserted at any timing when D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off is detected as a bet and a credit is added.

<<< Example of medal addition processing by third embodiment insertion sensor >>>
<< Configuration 1 >>
Next, in the third embodiment, an example of the timing at which the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal and credit addition is performed will be described in detail. 111 to 112 are flowcharts reflecting the process at the credit addition timing in the third embodiment in the game progress control process according to the subroutine of step 1200. FIG. 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the insertion process is normally executed for the inserted game medal. In the flowchart of FIG. 111, the description of the same content as in FIG. 17 is omitted (from step 1220 to step 1225 and after step 1232). First, in FIG. 111, in step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226-1 (fourth), in step 1226-2 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s is on and the second input sensor D30s is off. (The image diagram of the upper middle part of FIG. 113) At the timing when the game medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s, the first insertion sensor D20s is turned from OFF to ON. If YES in step 1226-2 (fourth), in step 1226-2 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are on. Determination is performed (image diagram in the upper right part of FIG. 113) The second insertion sensor D30s is turned from OFF to ON at the timing when the game medal reaches the second insertion sensor D30s. If YES in step 1226-2 (fourth), in step 1226- 6 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first closing sensor D20s is off and the second closing sensor D30s is on. Determination is performed (image diagram according to the lower left in FIG. 113) The first insertion sensor D20s is turned from ON to OFF at the timing when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first insertion sensor D20s. If Yes in step 1226-6 (fourth), in step 1226-8 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that one normal game medal has been inserted, and the credit addition process is performed. Done. Further, in step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is off (image diagram according to middle and lower stages in FIG. 113) When the medal exceeds the detection range of the second insertion sensor D30s, the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from on to off). In the case of Yes in step 1226-9 (fourth), it is determined that the insertion of one normal game medal has been completed, and for example, the operation of the start lever D50 is enabled when the number of bets satisfies a specified number The process proceeds to step 1232.

<Effect 1>
In the third embodiment, an example in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on has been described. Conventionally, credit addition processing is executed at the timing when “the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is off”. However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but an error occurs at this timing. If the CPU C 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is executed. A game medal enters the gaming machine even though the credit addition process is not executed in time. It is possible to prevent that the resulting Nde a (swallowing).

<Effect 2>
Further, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s remains off and only the first insertion sensor D20s is on, the position is closer to the medal insertion slot 170 than the second insertion sensor D30s. It is possible to prevent a go-to action (for example, clemantoto) or the like by the first input sensor D20s provided in the above, and it is possible to provide an illegally strong gaming machine, and to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<< Third Embodiment Subroutine Caused by Input Sensor Error >>>
In addition, in the case of No in step 1226-2 (fourth), step 1226-6 (fourth), and step 1226-9 (fourth), step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth) In step 1226-10 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined medal insertion error occurrence condition is satisfied. The medal insertion error here includes, for example, an insertion medal backflow error, an insertion number error, an insertion medal retention error, and the on / off status (including time) of sensors such as the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor. Based on the above, it is determined whether any error has occurred (the occurrence condition varies depending on the type of error). These errors are detected based on, for example, on / off detection of the first closing sensor D20s and the second closing sensor D30s in FIG. If any of step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth), and step 1226-10 (fourth) is Yes, the medal insertion error process is executed in step 1226-5 (fourth). Is done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart relating to a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, in step 1226-2 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is ON, and in step 1226-2 (fourth), an error detection command (to the sub side). And a command relating to the fact that an error has been detected) (for example, in the register area), and the flow proceeds to Step 1226-24 (fourth). In addition, in 1226-213 (4th), it is comprised so that the information regarding the error (error which has generate | occur | produced now) corresponding to the error flag which is set to ON may be transmitted to the sub-control board side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). It is not necessary to execute the information setting process. Error processing will be executed according to the type of error that occurred, but the error detection command may execute set processing only when any error occurs from the state where no error has occurred. Even if the type of error changes from the state where the first error (for example, inserted medal staying error) has occurred to the second error (for example, payout medal staying error), the set process is executed. Good. In step 1226-2 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently occurring error has been canceled. If it is determined that the error has been released, the currently generated error flag is turned off in step 1226-2, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of error detection based on the detection of game medals by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s has been described, but in error detection, for example, a medal insertion slot D170 in the medal selector DS. It is also possible to detect an error based on the detection of the game medal by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s provided in the vicinity. Hereinafter, an example of error detection based on the detection of the game medal by the insertion reception sensor D10s will be described. .

<<< Third Embodiment Error Detection Based on Input Monitoring Counter >>>
<< Configuration 2 >>
An insertion acceptance sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which a game medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 passes. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly on the basis of dimensions, and accepting only game medals conforming to the standard dimensions. The selected medal (or other foreign matter) is returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that a suitable game medal has passed, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s changes from OFF to ON, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M. When the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is turned on, the main control board M performs an addition process from 0 to 1 in a counter that counts the passage of game medals (hereinafter referred to as an insertion monitoring counter). Then, the main control board M monitors the insertion at a timing when the game medal flows down the path in the medal selector DS, for example, when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned off from on (corresponding to timing 4 in FIG. 110). The counter performs a subtraction process such as 1 → 0. At this time, for example, if any problem occurs regarding the insertion of the game medal in the period from 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, the game medal counting process of the insertion monitoring counter is not normally performed. . For example, when the second insertion sensor D30s does not turn from on to off, the subtraction process of the insertion monitoring counter is not performed, and the insertion monitoring counter continues to be added, the inserted medal staying error can be detected. Further, when a situation occurs in which the second input sensor D30s is turned off from on before the input acceptance sensor D10s and the input monitoring counter becomes negative because the input monitoring counter is subtracted first. An inserted medal backflow error can be detected.

<Effect>
In this way, by configuring so that error determination can be performed based on the detection of game medals in the three sensors of the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, the game medal can be inserted. Various errors can be reliably detected, and an illegally strong gaming machine can be provided. As a result, a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

<<< Third Embodiment Output of medal insertion sound >>>
In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound that is output after the inserted game medal is detected as a bet medal will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example in which the credit addition process is executed when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on has been described. However, the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion is performed. An error may occur in a state where the sensor D30s is turned on (for example, a inserted medal staying error due to an abnormally long time for the second throwing sensor D30s). In the third embodiment, since the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, for example, an error may occur after the credit addition process is executed. The In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound that is output after the credit addition process and the error sound that is output from the speaker S20 upon error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s will be described.

<< Configuration 3 >>
First, at timing A, the medal insertion sound is output before the error sound output from the speaker S20 upon error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. More specifically, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, when 115 ms which is the upper limit value of B is subtracted from 183 ms which is the upper limit value of the period C, 68 ms is obtained. That is, during this period, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M “sets medal insertion acceptance → command for medal insertion acceptance → transmits command to sub control board side → sets error detection command (when there is an error)” By executing the process as described above, it is possible to output the medal insertion sound before the error sound output from the speaker S20 by detecting the error in the second insertion sensor D30s.

<< Configuration 4 >>
As a modified example of the timing A, the timing of the credit addition process may be varied. That is, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M processes “Set command related to medal insertion acceptance → Execute credit addition process → Send command to sub-control board side → Set error detection command (if there is an error)” May be performed.

<Effect>
With this configuration, the medal insertion is accepted at the timing when “the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on”. This processing is executed, and a command relating to medal insertion acceptance is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side by the timer interrupt process thereafter, and a medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. . On the other hand, in the case where the state of “the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on” continues and the insertion medal staying error occurs, the medal insertion sound is already output and then the insertion medal is output. In order to determine that a retention error has occurred (because the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined period of time), the player outputs an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error. The medal insertion sound can be confirmed before, and it is possible to prevent anxiety that the game medal has not been normally inserted and has been lost due to the insertion medal retention error.

<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, at timing B, the medal insertion sound is configured to be output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 upon error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. Although it is determined that there is a time of at least 67 ms from when the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected at the second insertion sensor D30s, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M intentionally operates during this period. The command related to medal insertion acceptance is not transmitted to the sub-control board side. After that, an error detection command based on error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s is set, and then a command related to medal insertion acceptance is transmitted to the sub-control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes “Credit addition process → detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → transmits an error detection command to the sub control board side → sets a command related to medal insertion acceptance → sub control By configuring the processing such as “Send a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the substrate side”, the medal insertion sound is later than the error sound output from the speaker S20 upon error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It becomes possible to output. At this time, it is preferable that the timing related to the medal insertion acceptance is transmitted at the time of timer interruption, which is different from that when the error detection command is transmitted.

<< Configuration 6 >>
As a modified example of the timing B, the timing of the credit addition process may be varied. In other words, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M detects “error flag detection → sets error detection command → transmits error detection command to the sub control board side → sets command related to medal insertion acceptance → executes credit addition process → sub control A process of “sending a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the substrate side” may be performed.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, at the timing when “the first throwing sensor D20s is on and the second throwing sensor D30s is on → the first throwing sensor D20s is off and the second throwing sensor D30s is on”, the throwing medal first It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or more), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Is output and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. Thereafter, after processing relating to medal insertion acceptance is executed, a command relating to medal insertion acceptance is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and a medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. It becomes. When a state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, an inserted medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. In order to determine that the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer, the player determines that the error related to the insertion medal retention error before the medal insertion sound is output. The sound can be confirmed, and the player can quickly detect that the game medal is not normally inserted.

<< Configuration 7 >>
Next, as timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 by the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, and is output after the error is released. Although it is determined that there is a time of at least 67 ms from when the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected at the second insertion sensor D30s, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M intentionally operates during this period. The command related to medal insertion acceptance is not transmitted to the sub-control board side in the same way as the second timing, but after the CPUC 100 of the main control board M further turns off the insertion error flag in step 1226-215. In addition, a command relating to medal insertion acceptance is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board side. In other words, the CPU 100 of the main control board M performs “add credit processing → detect error flag → set error detection command → send error detection command to sub-control board side → ... (error canceling process during this time) -> → Set error undetected command → Send error non-detected command to sub-control board side → Set command related to medal insertion acceptance → Send command related to medal insertion acceptance to sub-control board side It is possible to output the medal insertion sound after canceling the error by configuring so as to execute.

<< Configuration 8 >>
As a modified example of the timing C, the timing of credit addition processing may be varied. In other words, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M detects that “error flag is detected → error detection command is set → error detection command is transmitted to the sub control board side → ... (error canceling process during this time) →→ no error detected Set command → Send error not detected command to sub-control board side → Set command related to medal insertion acceptance → Execute credit addition process → Send command related to medal insertion acceptance to sub-control board side Also good.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, at the timing when “the first throwing sensor D20s is on and the second throwing sensor D30s is on → the first throwing sensor D20s is off and the second throwing sensor D30s is on”, the throwing medal first It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or more), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Is output and an error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is output. After the error is resolved, an error not detected command is transmitted to the sub side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal staying error is terminated. After the processing related to medal insertion acceptance is executed, a command related to medal insertion acceptance is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and a medal insertion sound is output on the sub control board S side. It becomes. When a state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, an inserted medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. In order to terminate the output of the error sound after the error has been further resolved, the player has determined that the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or more. Since the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error can be confirmed before the medal insertion sound is output, and the medal insertion sound can be confirmed after the error is resolved, the player can normally It is possible to recognize that a game medal is inserted.

<<< Third Embodiment Medal Error Detection by Shoot Sensor >>>
Next, as a third embodiment, error detection using the chute sensor D40s will be described in detail. FIG. 114 shows a medal flow path member (referred to as a chute body in the third embodiment) after passing through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in the path of the game medal in the medal selector DS. FIG. In FIG. 114, a chute sensor D40s is provided below the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s is a normal medal throwing like the first throwing sensor D20s and the second throwing sensor D30s. In particular, the third embodiment is configured to detect an error (for example, inserted medal retention error, inserted medal backflow error, etc.) after the credit addition process has already been executed. ing.

  The error detection by the chute sensor D40s will be described in detail. For example, let us consider a case where a game medal stays further downstream of the chute sensor D40s in the chute body communicating with the hopper H40. The width of the path of the game medals in the chute body is approximately the width of one game medal, and when one game medal stays in the path of the game medals in the chute body, the game medals passing through the path thereafter one after another It stays, and it becomes the state of the inserted medal retention error. In the third embodiment, the position corresponding to three game medals from the position where the game medals stayed is the position detected by the shoot sensor D40s, but the position where the shoot sensor D40s is provided is not limited to this.

  Similarly to the detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, the detection of the game medal by the shoot sensor D40s is detected by the shoot sensor D40s and the signal (shoot sensor D40s). Is turned on, information on the time from when the chute sensor D40s is turned on until it is turned off) is supplied to the main control board M. On the main control board M, game medals are normally inserted based on information related to the signal detected by the chute sensor D40s and further information related to the signals detected by the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s. Is determined. Specifically, the main control board M has a period from the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s starts detecting the game medal to the timing when the chute sensor D40s starts detecting the game medal, A predetermined period (the time to be detected by the shoot sensor D40s, hereinafter also referred to as a theoretical period) is compared. For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s. Is compared with the theoretical period, and if the difference between the periods exceeds a range where it is not detected as an error, an error (shoot sensor medal in the third embodiment) is detected. A retention error) will be detected. The timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s detects the game medal, the timing at which the second insertion sensor D30s starts detecting the game medal, or the timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting the game medal, the second insertion sensor One of the timings at which D30s finishes detecting the game medal may be set as the theoretical period start timing.

<< Third Embodiment Timing Chart for Game Medal Detection by Shoot Sensor >>
FIG. 115 is a timing chart when the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the chute sensor D40s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects the passage of a game medal (OFF → ON) at the timing 1 in the figure. Subsequently, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s detects the passage of the game medal (OFF → ON) at the timing 2 in the figure. Time information related to these timings and the like are supplied to the main control board M as the signals described above. Thereafter, it is assumed that the shoot sensor D40s detects the passage of the game medal (OFF → ON) at the timing 3 in the figure. A period D from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects a game medal until the shoot sensor D40s starts detection, and a period from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal to when the shoot sensor D40s starts detection E is calculated by the main control board M, and using these periods as theoretical periods, it is determined whether or not the game medal based on the detection of the shoot sensor D40s normally passes through the shoot body. In addition, an error that may occur after it is determined that the game medal has normally passed through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s can be detected by providing the chute sensor D40s.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, some kind of error (shoot sensor medal retention error) related to the passage of game medals near the shoot sensor D40s is detected, and further the player is notified that an error has occurred. Is possible. In addition, the normal passing of the game medal by the chute sensor D40s is determined based on the information related to the timing at which detection of the game medal by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s is started. The passage of the game medal is not detected by the sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, but when the passage of the game medal is detected by the chute sensor D40s, that is, it is possible to reliably detect an error relating to the insertion medal backflow. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud, and thus a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<<<< 4th Embodiment Medal Return Member >>>>
Next, as a fourth embodiment, an example of a mechanism of a medal return member D340 through which a game medal passes when a game medal is paid out to the medal tray D230 or returned to the medal tray D230 will be described. .

  First, FIGS. 116 to 119 for explaining in detail the medal return member D340 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as seen from the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 (described later) is provided. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving port D341 (described later), and flowing down toward the medal tray D230. FIG. 119 depicts the trajectory of game medals within the side view of FIG. 117.

<<<< Front view of the medal return member according to the fourth embodiment >>
FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340 in the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, a game medal that has not been added to a bet or credit by the medal selector DS that performs detection of a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and simple authentication (blocker is in an off state) When the game medal that has reached the blocker is returned to the medal tray D230, the game medal passes through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path) and is paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the second flow path), and finally the game medals are paid out to the medal tray D230.

  The medal return member D340 passes through the first flow path through which the inappropriate game medal detected by the medal selector DS is returned to the medal tray D230, and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. The game medal that passes through the two flow paths passes through the medal return member D340 and merges when it flows down toward the medal tray D230. It is configured.

  The second flow path in the medal return member D340 includes at least a medal receiving port D341 that receives a game medal paid out from the hopper H40, and a medal falling surface D342 on which the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 falls. It is comprised so that it may have. Further, a medal non-falling surface D343 positioned opposite to the medal dropping surface D342, a wall surface provided with a medal receiving port, and a medal dropping surface D342 on which a game medal paid out from the medal paying device H of the hopper H40 falls. And a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 passes through this space.

  The medal receiving port D341 is configured to communicate with the medal payout device H of the hopper H40. Further, since the medal receiving opening D341 is open, it is possible for the game medals paid out from the medal paying device H of the hopper H40 to pass through the medal receiving opening D341 reliably. In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 is referred to as an edge (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer peripheral portion in the shape of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 is referred to as an edge). ). In the regulation of the length and distance related to the medal receiving port D341, any position corresponding to the edge of the medal receiving port D341 is set as a starting point.

  In the fourth embodiment, the medal drop surface D342 is formed in a substantially square shape, and the medal non-fall surface D343 located opposite to the medal drop surface D342 is also formed in a substantially square shape. However, the shapes of the medal dropping surface D342 and the medal non-falling surface D343 are not limited to this.

  In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving hole D341 is provided in a downwardly inclined direction, and a game medal that collides with a collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction of FIG. 116 falls. It is configured to incline substantially in parallel with the medal dropping surface D342. With this configuration, the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and dropped onto the medal drop surface D342 slide down from the medal drop surface D342 due to gravity, and the game medals are reliably guided to the medal tray D230. It becomes possible to do. Note that the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 and the medal dropping surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and the medal receiving port D341 and the medal falling surface D342 may not be inclined. The improper medals detected by the medal selector DS are configured to fall in the direction of the medal tray D230 from above as viewed from the player in a direction perpendicular to the inclination direction of the medal receiving port D341. .

<<< Fourth embodiment Side view of medal return member Trajectory view of game medal flow (perspective view) >>
Next, the dimension definition in the structure of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 as viewed from the direction in which the medal receiving port D341 is provided. First, in the game medal, the thickness and the diameter are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). The thickness a of the game medal is preferably about 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and the diameter b of the game medal is preferably about 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. is there.

Next, after being paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, the distance from the medal dropping surface D342 where the game medal falls to the edge of the medal receiving port D341 is c, and perpendicular to the medal non-falling surface D343. D is the longest distance from the medal non-falling surface D342 to the edge of the medal receiving slot in the direction, and at the edge of the opening of the medal receiving slot D341, at least one direction (for example, In the fourth embodiment, the length of the opening of the medal receiving port D341 having a substantially rectangular shape is e), and the maximum of the medal dropping surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341 is Each length is defined as f. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are provided in the dimensions defined in this way. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions.
c ≧ a Expression (1)
b> d Formula (2)
f ≧ 2b .. Formula (3)
b> e ... Formula (4)
In the fourth embodiment, the game medal can be applied to either 25Φ size or 30Φ size.

  First, by satisfying the expressions (1) and (3), it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other. The distance from the medal drop surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving port 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medal, and the game medal paid out from the medal paying device H is transferred from the medal receiving port D341 to the collision portion. Since there is a sufficient distance until the collision, the game medal falls freely with the weight of the game medal, and the game medal that collided with the collision part falls on the medal drop surface D342 (the game medal is sleeping) Since the game medal to be paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 is out of the region through which the game medals pass, the collision can be prevented.

  Next, by satisfying the expression (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 (regardless of whether the game medal is sleeping or standing), and thereafter The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not collide with the second game medal to be paid out on the hopper H40. It is.

  Next, by satisfying the expression (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the game machine internal direction has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and one piece collided with the collision part. It can be configured to prevent a situation where the game medals of the eye bounce back to the medal reception port D341.

  As shown in the equations (1) to (4), the size of the medal return member D340 is defined so that the game medal can be paid out smoothly from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the game medal can be smoothly played. It becomes possible to perform guidance to the saucer D230. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals that are paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, pass through the medal receiving port D341, and flow down toward the medal tray D230. For example, as an effect of defining the dimensions of the formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game paid out thereafter It is possible to configure so that the medal does not collide and the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 does not block the medal receiving port D341.

  As shown in FIG. 117, in this example, the outer periphery of the medal receiving port D341 on the outside of the medal return member D340 is provided with a protruding edge, but the inner side of the medal return member D340 is provided. A protruding edge may be provided on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it less likely that a situation in which a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H will flow backward to the medal receiving port D341 after colliding with the collision portion.

<<< Fourth Embodiment Game Medal Flow Trajectory (Side View) >>>>
118, the trajectory of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving port D341, and flowing down toward the medal tray D230 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 depicts the trajectory of game medals within the side view of FIG. 117. First, as shown in the upper left diagram, the first game medal is released from the medal receiving port D341. Next, as shown in the upper right diagram, the second game medal is released from the medal receiving port D341 in the same manner as the first game medal, and the first game medal is prepared in the front view direction of FIG. It collides with a collision part (not shown). The interval from when the first game medal is released from the medal receiving hole D341 to when the second game medal is released can be determined by the rotational speed of the disk H50 of the medal payout device H. Although the rotation speed can be arbitrarily determined, as shown in the upper right diagram of the fourth embodiment, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, the second game medal is medal. The timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is as follows: (1) The timing at which the first game medal collides with the collision part ( 2) The timing before (immediately before) the first game medal collides with the collision part, and (3) the timing after the first game medal collides with the collision part. Eye play Medals may adjust the distance together the f (see FIG. 117) to the timing to be paid out from the medal payout device H. As for (2) above, after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H and passes through the medal receiving port D341, the game medal has advanced in the horizontal direction by the diameter of the game medal (above b) ( It is preferable to set the timing after (fired). In addition, the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is such that the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H has passed. The possibility that the second game medal collides with the second game medal can be reduced. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is too long, the game medal payout time interval becomes too long, and the tempo for paying out the game medal is high. It gets worse. Further, since the size (depth) of the inside of the housing of the gaming machine is limited, the f (the maximum length of the medal dropping surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341) is also predetermined. It is difficult to secure more than the distance. For the above reasons, it is most preferable that the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H be the timing immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal after colliding with the collision part. In addition, it is desirable that the game medals to be paid out after the third piece should be configured so that the game medals do not collide with each other. It is preferable to configure so that game medals do not collide with each other. Moreover, in the collision part, in order to improve durability by the collision of the game medal of the medal return member D340, you may comprise so that it may protect with a metal etc., for example.

  Next, as shown in the lower left row, after the first game medal collides with the collision part, it falls on the medal dropping surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads to the collision portion in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other by being configured as in Expression (1). Next, as shown in the lower right row, the first game medal that has dropped on the medal drop surface D342 is inclined in the inclination direction of the medal drop surface D342 by gravity, and falls from the medal drop surface D342 to the medal tray D230. It is induced. The second game medal falls on the medal drop surface D342 in the same manner as the first game medal after colliding with the collision part. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the inclination direction of the medal drop surface D342, the first game medal and the second game medal collide, It is possible to prevent backflow of medals that bounce off the collision part and enter the opening of the medal receiving port D341.

<< Effect 1 >>
The second game medal is released from the medal receiving port D341 toward the collision part, and the first game medal collides with the collision part and then falls on the medal dropping surface D342. At this time, it is configured to satisfy the expressions (1) and (3), in other words, the distance from the medal drop surface D342 to the bottom of the medal receiving port 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medal. In addition, since the game medal paid out from the medal payout device H has a sufficient distance from the medal receiving port D341 to collide with the collision part, the game medal falls freely with the weight of the game medal. When the game medal colliding with the collision part falls on the medal drop surface D342 (a state where the game medal is sleeping), the game medal to be paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 is out of the region through which the game medal passes. Therefore, the collision can be prevented.

<< Effect 2 >>
For example, a gaming machine that can prevent a reverse flow in which a medal that collides with a collision portion and bounces back into the opening portion of the medal receiving port D341 by being configured as in Equation (2) or Equation (4). Can be provided.

<< Effect 3 >>
For example, by being configured as in Expression (3), the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the game machine internal direction has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the collision has occurred 1 It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a situation in which the first gaming medal rebounds to the medal receiving port D341.

<< Effect 4 >>
The first game medal that has dropped on the medal drop surface D342 falls from the medal drop surface D342 and flows down toward the medal tray D230, and the second game medal is shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. As described above, the first game medal is dropped on the medal drop surface D342 at substantially the same position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation where game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 are not paid out to the medal tray D230 due to staying in the vicinity of the medal receiving port D341. A gaming machine can be provided.

<< Effect 5 >>
A game machine that can prevent damage and deterioration of the medal return member D340 is provided because a shock absorbing material is provided at a collision portion where a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H collides with the speed. can do.

<< Effect 6 >>
The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 once collide with the collision part and lose the original momentum of the payout, so that the game medals collide with each other (the game medals returned from the medal selector DS and the hopper H40 A collision with a game medal paid out from the medal payout device H or a collision between game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 occurs, and the flow of the game medal to the non-rhythmic medal tray D230 Can be prevented, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

<<<<< Driving Control of Medal Dispensing Device in Fifth Embodiment >>>>
<<< Fifth embodiment Timing chart of drive control of medal payout device >>>
Next, drive control of the medal payout device H will be described as a fifth embodiment. First, operation control of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a timing chart relating to detection of a hopper motor H80 that is driven when a game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H, and a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s. First, in the hopper motor H80, it is assumed that the hopper drive flag when the hopper motor H80 is driven is in an on state. When game medals are paid out by the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disc H50 around the disc rotation shaft H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are discharged and biased means H70. , And the game medal is paid out by flowing down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240. In the fifth embodiment, the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are detected to be on or off based on, for example, the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70. More specifically, the first payout sensor H10s is turned on at the timing 1 in the figure in a state where the release biasing means H70 is not displaced to the position where the game medal is paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). A signal indicating the state is sent to the main control board M. Then, the main control is performed on a signal indicating that the first biasing sensor H10s is in an OFF state when the discharge biasing means H70 starts to move to a position where the game medal is paid out and the discharge biasing means H70 starts moving from the initial position. Transmit to substrate M. A signal indicating that the second payout sensor H10s is in an on state when the discharge urging means H70 is displaced to a position (referred to as a payout position in the fifth embodiment) at the timing 2 in the figure. Is transmitted to the main control board M. Then, at timing 3 in the figure, the game medal payout is completed, and the release urging means H70 starts to move to the initial position again, so that a signal indicating that the second payout sensor H10s is in the OFF state is main controlled. Transmit to substrate M. Then, at timing 4 in the figure, the discharge urging means H70 is displaced again to the initial position, so that a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H10s is on is transmitted to the main control board M. In the fifth embodiment, for example, the period from timing 1 to timing 2 is a predetermined range A (A <26 ms), and the period from timing 2 to timing 3 is a predetermined range B (9 ms ≦ 9 ms ≦ B <60 ms), and the medal payout device H functions normally by detecting that the period from the timing 3 to the timing 4 is within a predetermined range C (9 ms ≦ C <60). It is determined that a special game medal will be paid out.

<<< fifth embodiment medal payout of medal payout device to stop of medal payout device >>
<< Configuration >>
Next, a series of flow from the medal payout start by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stop of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 121, in the fifth embodiment, medals unnecessary for the configuration of the fifth embodiment are described in order to briefly explain a series of flow from the payout of game medals to the stop of the medal payout device H. The configuration relating to the dispensing device H is eliminated as much as possible. FIG. 121 is a front view of a disk H50 that is rotationally driven when paying out game medals.

  In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disk H50 has a plurality of circular cavities larger in size than the game medals, and the disk H50 is configured to cover the game medals. The game medals are rotated under the disk H50 by the rotation of the disk H50. By moving, the game medal is paid out from the discharge port D240. First, in the upper left diagram, the hopper motor H80 is before driving, and the first payout sensor H10s is on. In the fifth embodiment, this state is set as the initial position in the discharge urging means H70. For the sake of clarity, the initial position before the rotation of the disk H50 (disk H50) is provided on the outer periphery of the disk H50. To do. This initial position (disk H50) is displaced in the rotation direction of the disk H50 each time a game medal is paid out. In the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, and the description will be made from the timing of paying out the fourth game medal.

  121, the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed, and the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, it can be seen that at the initial position (disk H50), the third game medal is rotated by an angle A from the position where the third game medal is paid out. That is, when the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is a constant speed state, the disk H50 rotates by an angle A until the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position. Further, the disk H50 does not rotate until the discharge biasing means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position.

  Next, in the lower left of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed, and the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after paying out the fourth game medal, the release urging means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position. However, during this time, the disk H50 is not rotating, so the fourth game medal. As in the case of paying out, it can be seen that the position is rotated by an angle A from the position where the fourth game medal is paid out.

  Then, as shown in the lower right row, after the fifth game medal is paid out, the driving of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, and the payout of the game medal is completed. The rotation of the disk H50 stops after the hopper motor H80 is turned off, but the initial position (disk H50) is shifted in the rotation direction by an angle B from the position where the fifth game medal is paid out. Stop. As a reason for this configuration, especially when paying out the first game medal, the hopper motor H80 does not immediately enter the constant speed state from the start of driving, but takes a predetermined time until the constant speed state. Cost. In other words, when the game medals for the first sheet (the hopper motor H80 is in an accelerated state to a constant speed state) are paid out, the second and subsequent sheets (the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state) when the discharge biasing means H70 is at the initial position. As compared with the case where the game medals are paid out, the hopper motor H80 is delayed by the amount of acceleration.

  Here, the process from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out will be described in detail. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped is changed to the constant speed state via the acceleration state. Here, the rotational speed in the constant speed state is A (m / t). The acceleration state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from a speed 0 to a constant speed A, and an average rotational speed in a period from the speed 0 to the constant speed state (a period in the acceleration state) is expressed as B (m / t ), B <A. Therefore, the average rotation speed C (m / t) from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is B <C <A.

  Next, the process from when the first game medal is paid out to when the second game medal is paid out will be described in detail. Since the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state when the first game medal is paid out, it is in a constant speed state after the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. Will remain. Therefore, the average rotation speed from when the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out is A.

  As described above, the second game after the first game medal is paid out than the average rotational speed C from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out. Since the average rotation speed A until the medal is paid out is faster, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out, and the first game If the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out is the same distance, the first game from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped. The time it takes for the medal to be paid out is longer than the time it takes for the second game medal to be paid out after the first game medal is paid out. .

  As shown in FIG. 121, in this example, after the last game medal (the fifth game medal in the figure) is paid out as a game medal payout process, the disk H50 is moved to a predetermined angle ( In the fifth embodiment, an angle B) is shifted in the rotation direction to stop (the rotation distance becomes longer). With this configuration, the distance that the disk H50 rotates from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is two after the first game medal is paid out. The distance that the disk H50 rotates before the second game medal is paid out (the distance that the disk H50 rotates after the second game medal is paid out and the third game medal is paid out is the same distance) The time required for the first game medal to be paid out after the hopper motor H80 is stopped is the second game after the first game medal is paid out. It will be possible to approximate (approximate) the time required for the medals to be paid out. It can proceed.

  Incidentally, the width (angle B) of the deviation in the rotation direction when the disk H50 stops after the hopper motor H80 is driven is dependent on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state due to the driving of the hopper motor H80. In this period, by considering the difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 rotating in the constant speed state, the discharge biasing means H70 releases the disk H50 after the hopper motor H80 is driven. It is determined how much the rotation is shifted from the initial position and stopped. The difference between the width of the hopper motor H80 that rotates in the accelerated state and the width of the hopper motor H80 that rotates at the constant speed corresponds to the discharge position of the discharge biasing means H70 from the position corresponding to the initial position of the discharge biasing means H70 of the hopper motor H80. It is preferable that the angle B is sufficiently smaller than the angle A because it is sufficiently smaller than the width to the position. It should be noted that even if the angle B is shifted in the rotation direction, the detection of game medals by the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s is not affected, and the timing chart of FIG. Based on this, a game medal is detected.

<< Effect >>
With this configuration, when a player who receives game medals is paid out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medals can be paid out at substantially constant intervals from the first to the predetermined number. For example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) medal clogging due to collision between game medals does not occur. The game can proceed smoothly.

  Further, after the last game medal has been paid out, the disc H50 is configured to stop at a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) while being shifted in the rotational direction, so that the unauthorized device can be removed from the discharge port D240. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game medal is illegally acquired by intrusion.

<<<< Sixth Embodiment Control when Communication between Main Control Board and Sub-Control Board>
Next, as a sixth embodiment, a process when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible will be described. As a case where communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is impossible here, it is assumed that various commands set from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side cannot be transmitted. Yes. For example, in the game progress control process of FIG. 16, the main control board M transmits various commands related to the game to the sub control board side based on the progress of the game, etc. In addition, as a process related to the subroutine, various commands are periodically sent from the main control board side to the sub control board side with a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, for example, a time of about 2 ms is set). Is configured to send. The sub-control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and execute effects based on the commands. The communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and the sub control board S can receive commands from the main control board M, but the main control board side It is configured not to be able to send a command to. The gaming machine has a program related to execution processing on the main control board M and the sub control board S (a program on the main control board M is called a main program, and a program on the sub control board S is called a sub program). For example, the sub-control board S is configured such that the sub-side program executes the effect triggered by receiving a predetermined command from the main control board M. That is, in a situation where a command cannot be received from the main control board M, the sub control board S cannot execute the process configured in the sub-side program. As a case in which a situation in which the sub control board S cannot receive a command from the main control board M may occur, for example, the contact of the harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S to the member There may be a problem. However, even if communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is impossible, the main-side program of the main control board M that controls the progress of the game can be executed. The game itself related to the main-side program is configured to be executable even when communication with the sub-control board S is disabled. Further, when communication is restored between the main control board M and the sub control board S from the situation where communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled, the progress of the program on the main side is changed. Based on this, a command related to the process after the communication is restored is transmitted from the main control board side to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S receives the command related to the process after the communication received from the main control board M is restored. The process is executed based on In the following, when communication with the sub control board S is disabled while various commands are being executed on the main control board M with reference to FIGS. 122 to 126, the main control board M and the sub control board M An example of processing performed on the control board S will be described as a sixth embodiment.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing when communication between main control board and sub-control board is cut off during execution of processing relating to settlement> When command and channel are one-to-one >>>
FIG. 122 shows the flow of processing in time series as an example of processing in the case where communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible during execution of processing related to settlement. First, it is assumed that the number of games is a predetermined number of games, where the Nth game is the starting point and the process is performed across the N + 1th game. In the sixth embodiment, as a process performed by the main control board M, a command based on the progress of the game is transmitted to the sub control board S, and received from the main control board M as a process performed by the sub control board S. Executing an effect based on the command is one set (in the sixth embodiment, one order). The sub-control board S does not execute effects based on all commands received from the main control board M, and may execute effects based on received commands or may not execute effects. is there. For example, in FIG. 122 to FIG. 126, the sub control board S is an example of performing effects on each command transmitted by the main control board M, but when performing effects based on reception of each command. If there is, there is a case where the production may not be executed. In the situation where one or more credits exist, when the settlement of the credit is executed by operating the settlement button, the sound during settlement corresponding to the settlement of the game medal is output from the speaker S20 from the speaker S20. However, it is assumed that the audio channel that outputs the sound being adjusted is a channel corresponding to only the sound being adjusted. For example, the sub-control board S executes an effect based on a command received from the main control board M. However, particularly when executing a process of outputting sound from the speaker S20, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M. The command is associated with the audio channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sound is output from the speaker S20 from the sound channel corresponding to the received command. The command and the audio channel do not have to have a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, a plurality of commands (for example, a command related to the start of settlement or a plurality of commands related to predetermined error detection) may be associated with one audio channel. With this configuration, it is possible to configure to output audio without increasing the number of channels even when the number of commands related to audio output increases.

<< Configuration 1 >>
FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of payment to the sub-control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs the sound being adjusted from the speaker S20. << Sixth embodiment: Processing when disconnecting communication between main control board and sub-control board during execution of processing relating to settlement> In case of one-to-one command and channel >> Sound for outputting sound during settlement Only commands related to the start of settlement are supported for the channel, and other commands are not supported. Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the sound being adjusted, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where communication is disconnected, the electrical connection between the main control board M and the sub control board S, such as a connection failure of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S, etc. The case where general communication is disconnected is not limited to this. Any case may be used as long as electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound being settled, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the settlement button operation, and the payout of game medals for the number of credits is completed. By determining, the command related to the completion of the settlement is transmitted to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the completion of the settlement from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during the settlement. Execute the process to end.

  As order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the completion of the settlement to the sub control board S. Since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M Cannot be sent to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the completion of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. While the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the settlement button operation and determines that the payout of game medals for the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Although the communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

  After the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the settlement button operation and the payout of game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub control board S has not received the command related to the completion of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to the settlement is finished, and the Nth game Sets the command for the next process.

  In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command relating to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S by determining that the game of the Nth game is started and a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, while the command related to the completion of the settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being adjusted is continued without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process relating to medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the Nth game.

  By determining that the start lever D50 has been operated as order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, while receiving the command related to the completion of the checkout from the main control board M. Since it is not possible to continue the output of the sound being adjusted without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 5, by determining that the rotation of the reel has been started by operating the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command relating to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while receiving a command relating to the end of the settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible to continue the output of the sound being adjusted without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reel rotation start has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reels is completed and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the first reel stop operation (the first reel is a reel that the player first performs a stop operation among a plurality of reels) is received, the main control board M causes the first reel to A command for accepting the stop operation is transmitted to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the settlement of the settlement from the main control board M. Since the command related to the termination cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 7, the main control board M is determined by determining that the stop operation of the second reel (the second reel is a reel that the player performs the stop operation secondly among the plurality of reels) is received. Transmits a command related to acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the second reel stop operation reception based on the reception of the command related to the second reel stop operation reception from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S performs the settlement from the main control board M. Since the command related to the termination cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 8, the main control board M is determined by determining that the stop operation of the third reel (the third reel is a reel in which the player performs the stop operation third among a plurality of reels) has been received. Transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the termination cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. As a command to be set at this time, a stop operation for all reels is performed, and a command related to stop display symbol transmitted immediately after operating a stop button as a display symbol stop is an example. As a command for the sub-control board S to output a sound based on a command from the control board M, a winning combination (for example, a push order bell) for which a game medal is paid out in N games is determined, and a reel stop operation is performed. To send a command (in the sixth embodiment, “command related to winning”), etc. (as a command for the next process of the N game) when the symbol combination related to the condition device won based on It is also possible to configure.

  By determining that all reels have been stopped in order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop display symbol stop to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to stop of the stop display symbol based on the reception of the command related to stop of the stop display symbol, while the command related to the end of the checkout is issued from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being adjusted is continued without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop display symbol stop has ended, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, the situation is such that the sub control board S cannot receive from the main control board M because both communications are temporarily disconnected. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the sub control board S from the main control board M is a command related to the end of the settlement, and in the period from the insertion of the Nth game medal to the stop operation of all reels, The output of the sound being adjusted is continued without finishing the output of the sound being adjusted.

  Next, the processing proceeds to order 10 and order 11 as the N + 1 game. As the order 10, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the settlement to the sub-control board S as in the order 1 in the Nth game. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs the sound being adjusted from the speaker S20. At this time, the sound under adjustment output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 through the same channel as the sound under adjustment output in the Nth game as described above. In other words, the sub control board S transmits the command based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button in the N + 1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S receives the settlement of the N + 1 game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start, the sound output during the checkout is started, while the sound output ends during the checkout related to the Nth game (as the process of the sub-control board S, (Sound output → Receiving a command related to the start of the settlement relating to the N + 1 game → Ending the output of the sound during the settlement relating to the N game → Starting the output of the sound during the settlement relating to the N + 1 game).

  As the order 11, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the settlement button operation and determines that the payout of game medals for the number of credits has been completed. Transmit to the sub control board side. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S executes a process of terminating the output of the sound being adjusted for the N + 1 game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the process with the output of the voice is being performed, the player can Since the output does not end, a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine can be provided.

<Effect 2>
In addition, the game is not stopped as an error, but the game can proceed on the main control board M, so that both of the machines can be disconnected without temporarily interrupting the game machine due to an error. By returning to communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can finish outputting voice while the game is progressing.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between main control board and sub-control board during execution of processing relating to settlement> When command and channel are not one-to-one >>>
<< Configuration 2 >>
Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command based on the start of payment to the sub-control board S. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs the sound being adjusted from the speaker S20. << Sixth Embodiment: Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between main control board and sub control board during execution of processing relating to settlement> When command and channel are not one-to-one >> The channel corresponds not only to a command based on detection of the operation of the settlement button, but also to other commands (here, “error detection command based on detection of door open error flag”). Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the sound being adjusted, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound being settled, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the settlement button operation, and the payout of game medals for the number of credits is completed. By determining, the command related to the completion of the settlement is transmitted to the sub-control board side, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the completion of the settlement from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during the settlement. Execute the process to end.

  As order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the completion of the settlement to the sub control board S. Since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M Cannot be sent to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the completion of the settlement from the main control board M, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. While the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the settlement button operation and determines that the payout of game medals for the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub-control Although the communication with the board S is in a disconnected state, the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

  After the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the settlement button operation and the payout of game medals for the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub control board S has not received the command related to the completion of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the process related to the settlement is finished, and the Nth game Sets the command for the next process.

  In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command relating to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S by determining that the game of the Nth game is started and a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to the medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, while the command related to the completion of the settlement from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being adjusted is continued without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process relating to medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the Nth game.

  By determining that the start lever D50 has been operated as order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, while receiving the command related to the completion of the checkout from the main control board M. Since it is not possible to continue the output of the sound being adjusted without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation has ended, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 5, by determining that the rotation of the reel has been started by operating the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the start of reel rotation based on the reception of the command relating to the start of reel rotation from the main control board M, while receiving a command relating to the end of the settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible to continue the output of the sound being adjusted without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reel rotation start has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 6, it is assumed that the process related to the start of rotation of the reels is completed and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been received, the main control board M transmits a command related to the first reel stop operation reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the settlement of the settlement from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound under examination is continued without finishing the output of the sound under adjustment. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the Nth game.

  By determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been received as the order 7, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the second reel stop operation reception based on the reception of the command related to the second reel stop operation reception from the main control board M, while the sub-control board S performs the settlement from the main control board M. Since the command related to the termination cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  By determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted as the order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the third reel stop operation acceptance to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the termination cannot be received, the output of the sound being settled is continued without terminating the output of the sound being settled. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. As a command to be set at this time, a stop operation for all reels is performed, and a command related to stop display symbol transmitted immediately after operating a stop button as a display symbol stop is an example. As a command for the sub control board S to output a sound based on a command from the control board M, a command related to winning can be transmitted (as a command for the next process of the N game).

  By determining that all reels have been stopped in order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the stop display symbol stop to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the command related to stop of the stop display symbol based on the reception of the command related to stop of the stop display symbol, while the command related to the end of the checkout is issued from the main control board M. Since it cannot be received, the output of the sound being adjusted is continued without terminating the output of the sound being adjusted. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop display symbol stop has ended, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, the situation is such that the sub control board S cannot receive from the main control board M because both communications are temporarily disconnected. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the sub control board S from the main control board M is a command related to the end of the settlement, and in the period from the insertion of the Nth game medal to the stop operation of all reels, The output of the sound being adjusted is continued without finishing the output of the sound being adjusted.

  Next, the processing proceeds to order 10 as the N + 1 game. As the order 10, it is assumed that a predetermined error has occurred. As an error at this time, a door opening error will be described as an example. However, the content of the error is not limited to this, and any error such as a loading error, a dispensing error, a loading reception sensor retention error, etc. Good. When the main control board M determines that a door opening error has occurred particularly because the front door DU is opened, the main control board M transmits an error detection command based on detection of a door opening error flag to the sub control board S. Based on the reception of the error detection command based on the detection of the door opening error flag, the sub control board S performs processing to output a door opening error notification sound from the speaker S20. Here, as described above, the command based on the detection of the settlement button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door opening error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives the error detection command based on the detection of the door opening error flag in the N + 1 game while the output of the sound being settled from the N game is continued, so that The sound output is terminated during the settlement, and the door opening error notification sound is output at the (N + 1) th game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the process with the output of the voice is being performed, the player can Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, when an error occurs, by associating the audio channel output from the speaker S20 with a plurality of commands such as a command related to error detection, an error notification sound is surely output, and an error occurs in the player. To provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reliably notify that an occurrence has occurred, and can return the voice output while the game is progressing by returning both communications. Can do.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing when disconnecting communication between main control board and sub-control board during period when minimum game time has not passed When command and channel are one to one >>>
<< Configuration 3 >>
Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible during a period in which the minimum game time from when the start lever D50 is operated until the reel starts to rotate has not elapsed. A processing flow in the case of failure will be described. First, as the processing order 1, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated. Based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs the sound effect (hereinafter referred to as a weight sound) related to the start lever operation from the speaker S20. << Sixth embodiment: Processing when disconnecting communication between main control board and sub-control board during period when minimum game time has not passed In case of one-to-one command and channel >>, a wait sound is output It is assumed that the audio channel only supports commands related to the start lever operation, and does not support other commands. Then, while the sub control board S is outputting the weight sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where communication is disconnected, the electrical connection between the main control board M and the sub control board S, such as a connection failure of a harness or the like that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S, etc. The case where general communication is disconnected is not limited to this. Any case may be used as long as electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the weight sound, the main control board M is ready to start reel rotation based on the start lever operation (here, the reel rotation start standby state). A command for starting the reel rotation start standby state is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command for starting the reel rotation start standby state. A process for terminating the output of the sound is executed.

  In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M M cannot transmit a command related to the reel rotation start standby state start to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, the output of the wait sound is continued without finishing the output of the wait sound. Note that while the main control board M is executing processing related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state. However, the processing performed by the main control board M that controls the progress of the game is in progress.

  After the main control board M completes the processing related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S has not received a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has completed the process related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. And sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 3, by determining that the rotation of the reel has been started by operating the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reel rotation start based on the reception of the command related to the reel rotation start from the main control board M, while it relates to the reel rotation start standby state start from the main control board M. Since the command cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reel rotation start has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the Nth game.

  In order 4, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of the rotation of the reels is completed, and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been received, the main control board M transmits a command related to the first reel stop operation reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while rotating the reel from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the Nth game.

  By determining that the stop operation of the second reel has been received as order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the second reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the second reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

  By determining that the stop operation of the third reel has been received as the order 6, the main control board M transmits a command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while rotating the reel from the main control board M. Since the command related to the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. As a command to be set at this time, a stop operation for all reels is performed, and a command related to stop display symbol transmitted immediately after operating a stop button as a display symbol stop is an example. As a command for the sub control board S to output a sound based on a command from the control board M, a command related to winning can be transmitted (as a command for the next process of the N game).

  By determining that all reels have been stopped in order 7, the main control board M transmits to the sub-control board S a command related to the stop display symbol stop. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the stop display symbol stop based on the reception of the command related to the stop display symbol stop, while the main control board M issues a command related to the reel rotation start standby state start. Since it cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop display symbol stop has ended, and ends the process related to the Nth game. In the Nth game, the situation is such that the sub control board S cannot receive from the main control board M because both communications are temporarily disconnected. At this time, the command that cannot be received from the sub control board S from the main control board M is a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, from the Nth game medal insertion until the stop operation of all reels is performed. During the period, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound.

  Next, the process proceeds to order 8 and order 9 as the N + 1 game. By determining that the game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 as the order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion on the basis of the reception of the command relating to the medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, while starting the reel rotation of the Nth game from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the start of the standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without terminating the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process relating to medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the N + 1 game.

  In order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a wait sound based on the reception of the command related to the reel rotation start standby state start. At this time, the weight sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 through the same channel as the weight sound output in the Nth game as described above. In other words, the sub control board S transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the N + 1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S receives the reel rotation of the N + 1 game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start standby state start, the output of the wait sound is started while the output of the wait sound related to the N game is ended (as the process of the sub-control board S, the output of the wait sound related to the N game is output) → Receiving command related to start of reel rotation start standby state for N + 1 game → End of output of wait sound for N game → Start of output of wait sound for N + 1 game).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the process with the output of the voice is being performed, the player can Since the output does not end, a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine can be provided.

<Effect 2>
In addition, the game is not stopped as an error, but the game can proceed on the main control board M, so that both of the machines can be disconnected without temporarily interrupting the game machine due to an error. By returning to communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can finish outputting voice while the game is progressing.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between main control board and sub-control board during execution of payout process When command and channel are not one-to-one >>>
<< Configuration 4 >>
Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, the flow of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled in the state where game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40 will be described. First, as a processing order 1, when a winning combination (for example, a push order bell combination) in which a game medal is paid out in the Nth game is won and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is set to the hopper H40. A command relating to the start of paying out medals from is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (hereinafter referred to as medal payout sound) related to the payout of the game medal from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40. <<< Sixth embodiment: Processing when disconnecting communication between main control board and sub-control board during execution of payout process When command and channel are not one-to-one >>>> In this case, the audio channel for outputting the medal payout sound is It is assumed that not only the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40 but also other commands (in this case, “command related to start lever operation”). While the sub control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out for the winning, and the number of game medals is paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the winning. By determining that the game medals have been paid out from the hopper H40, the command is sent to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command related to the medals payout from the hopper H40. A process for terminating the output of the medal payout sound is executed.

  As order 2, a command related to the end of medal payout from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the main control board M is in the hopper H40. The command relating to the end of the medal payout cannot be transmitted to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to the medal payout end from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the sub-control board S continues outputting the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out for the winning, and the judgment of the game medals being paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the winning is completed. Processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

  After the main control board M counts out the number of game medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning, and it is determined that the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out, the main control board M and the sub-control Communication with the substrate S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S has not received a command related to the medal payout end from the main control board M, but the main control board M is paid out from the hopper H40 of the number of game medals to be paid out by the winning. Since it is determined that the Nth game has been processed, the command relating to the (N + 1) th game is set.

  Next, as the N + 1 game, the process proceeds to order 3 and order 4. By determining that a game medal has been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 as order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, while the medal payout of the Nth game from the main control board M is completed. Since the command related to cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without finishing the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process relating to medal insertion acceptance has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the N + 1 game.

  In order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S. The sub control board S outputs a wait sound based on the reception of the command related to the reel rotation start standby state start. Here, as described above, the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40 and the command related to the reel rotation start standby state start are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives the command related to the reel rotation start standby state start in the N + 1 game while the output of the medal payout sound is continued from the N game, so that the medal payout in the N game is received. The output of the sound is terminated, and the output of the weight sound in the N + 1 game is started.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the process with the output of the voice is being performed, the player can Since the output does not end, a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine can be provided.

<Effect 2>
In addition, by associating with a plurality of commands such as commands related to the progress of the game, the user's friendly game that can end the output of the voice while the game is progressing by returning both communications Machine can be provided.

<<< Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between main control board and sub-control board during execution of payout process When command and channel are one to one >>>
<< Configuration 5 >>
Next, FIG. 126 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, from the state in which the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40 to the predetermined period (here, from the start of rotation of the reel (acceleration processing is performed)), the main control board M and the sub control board S A process flow when communication is disabled will be described. First, as a processing order 1, when a winning combination (for example, a push order bell combination) in which a game medal is paid out in the Nth game is won and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M is set to the hopper H40. A command relating to the start of paying out medals from is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40. <<< Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between main control board and sub-control board during execution of payout process When command and channel are one-to-one >>>> The audio channel for outputting the medal payout sound is Only commands related to the medal payout start are supported, and other commands are not supported. While the sub control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out for the winning, and the number of game medals is paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the winning. By determining that the game medal has been paid out from the hopper H40, the sub control board S receives the command related to the game medal from the hopper H40. Thus, the processing for terminating the output of the medal payout sound is executed.

  As order 2, a command related to the end of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M The command relating to the end of the medal payout from the hopper H40 cannot be transmitted to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to the medal payout end from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the sub-control board S continues outputting the medal payout sound without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out for the winning, and the judgment of the game medals being paid out from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the winning is completed. Processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

  Next, the process proceeds from order 3 to order 10 as an N + 1 game. By determining that the game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 as the order 3, the main control board M transmits a command related to the medal insertion acceptance to the sub control board S. The main control board M and the sub control board Since the communication with S is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot transmit a command relating to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, it cannot output a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, but without terminating the output of the medal payout sound. Continue outputting medal payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub control board S is in a state where it cannot receive the command related to the medal payout end from the hopper H40 and the command related to the medal insertion acceptance. Therefore, the state where only the medal payout sound is output continues.

  By determining that the start lever D50 has been operated as order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S, but communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is performed. Is in a disconnected state, the main control board M cannot transmit a command related to the start lever operation to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, the sub-control board S cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation, while the medal payout sound is not finished. Continue to output the payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub control board S performs a command related to completion of the medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to medal insertion acceptance, and a start lever operation. Since the command cannot be received, the state where only the medal payout sound is output continues.

  In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, M cannot transmit a command related to the reel rotation start standby state start to the sub-control board S. At this time, the sub control board S cannot receive a command related to the reel rotation start standby state start from the main control board M, and therefore cannot output a wait sound. On the other hand, the medal payout sound is not finished without finishing the output of the medal payout sound. Continue to output. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in a disconnected state, the sub control board S relates to the command related to the medal payout end from the hopper H40, the command related to the medal insertion acceptance, and the start lever operation. Since the command and the command related to starting the reel rotation start standby state cannot be received, the state where only the medal payout sound is output continues.

  After determining that the main control board M is in the reel rotation start standby state, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S receives from the main control board M a command related to the completion of the medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to the medal insertion acceptance, a command related to the start lever operation, and a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Although not completed, the main control board M determines that it is ready to start the rotation of the reel based on the start lever operation, and sets a command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

  In order 6, by determining that the rotation of the reel has been started by operating the start lever, the main control board M transmits a command for starting the reel rotation to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reel rotation start based on the reception of the command related to the reel rotation start from the main control board M, while the medal payout from the hopper H40 is completed from the main control board M. Since such a command cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without terminating the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process relating to the reel rotation start has been completed, and sets a command relating to the next process of the (N + 1) th game.

  In order 7, it is assumed that the processing related to the start of rotation of the reels is completed, and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the first reel stop operation has been received, the main control board M transmits a command related to the first reel stop operation reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reception of the first reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to acceptance of the first reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N + 1 game.

  By determining in step 8 that the second reel stop operation has been received, the main control board M transmits a command related to the second reel stop operation reception to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the second reel stop operation acceptance based on the reception of the command related to the second reel stop operation acceptance from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the second reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the (N + 1) th game.

  By determining that the third reel stop operation has been received as the order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to the third reel stop operation reception to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect relating to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, while the hopper H40 from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end of medal payout cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to accepting the third reel stop operation has been completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. Note that the next process of the (N + 1) th game is a command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40 for the sake of brevity, but as a command that the main control board M transmits to the sub-control board S during this period, For example, it may be configured to transmit a command related to the stop display symbol stop or a command related to winning.

  As the order 10, when a winning combination by a winning combination (for example, a push order bell combination or the like) in which a game medal is paid out in the N + 1 game is determined and the game medal is paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M receives from the hopper H40. A command related to the start of payout of game medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40. At this time, as described above, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 through the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the Nth game. That is, the sub control board S transmits a command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40 in the N + 1 game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, so that the sub control board S receives the N + 1 game hopper received from the main control board M. On the basis of the command related to the medal payout start from H40, the output of the medal payout sound is started, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game is finished (as the process of the sub control board S, the output related to the Nth game Output of medal payout sound → Receiving command related to start of medal payout from hopper H40 related to N + 1 game → End output of medal payout sound related to N game → Start output of medal payout sound related to N + 1 game Become).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the process with the output of the voice is being performed, the player can Since the output does not end, a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that some kind of problem has occurred in the gaming machine can be provided.

<Effect 2>
In addition, the game is not stopped as an error, but the game can proceed on the main control board M, so that both of the machines can be disconnected without temporarily interrupting the game machine due to an error. By returning to communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can finish outputting voice while the game is progressing.

<< Configuration related to numerical values applicable to this example >>
Here, the configuration related to the internal lottery number applicable to this example will be described in detail below. Note that the following configuration is applicable to all the embodiments in this example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 127, a configuration relating to a numerical value applicable to this example will be described in detail.

<When BB is not working>
The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has 1 type BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and 2 types BB (sometimes referred to as MB). As the combination that the BB operates can be stopped and displayed, it may be referred to as “1 type BB combination”), “1 type BB single” (conditional device that the 1 type BB combination wins alone) and “1 Seed BB + cherry "(a condition device in which a seed BB combination and a cherry are won in duplicate). In addition, as a role relating to the type 2 BB (a symbol combination in which the type 2 BB is activated after being won can be stopped and displayed, and sometimes referred to as a type 2 BB role), “type 2 BB alone” (2 types A condition device that the BB combination wins alone) and “2 types BB + cherry” (a condition device in which the 2 type BB combination and cherries are selected and won).

  In addition, as a winning combination (a combination having a symbol combination in which a game medal is paid out by stopping display), it has four types of combination of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, and the bell with the largest winning number (Winning at 10400/65536) may be referred to as the main small role.

  The “BB inactive” shown at the top of the figure is a table relating to the numbers in the state where the type 1 BB and the type 2 BB are not operating (sometimes referred to as a normal gaming state or the like). “Number of inserted” is the number of inserted when it is assumed that the game is executed with three bets in order to calculate various expected values, which will be described later, and is defined when the type 1 BB is operating and the type 2 BB is operating. Although the number is two, the “number of inputs” is three. Further, the “number of payouts” is the number of game medals to be paid out when the “number of inputs” is set to 3. For example, in the game when the type 1 BB is activated, 15 bets can be paid out with two bets. However, since the “number of inputs” is assumed to be 3, the “number of payouts” is also “15 × 3 ÷ 2 = 22.5”.

  The “number” is a number determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and the denominator is 65536. The “probability” is a probability that the conditional device is determined by an internal lottery.

  The “number of games” is the number of games required for calculating various expected values described later. For “1 type BB only”, “1 type BB + cherry”, “2 types BB only”, and “2 types BB + cherry”, 1 type BB or 2 types BB in the game winning 1 type BB or 2 type BB Since the case where the symbol combination relating to is stopped and displayed is illustrated, the “number of games” is 1. In addition, the “one type BB” is executed after the symbol combination that the one type BB is activated is stopped and displayed after winning “one type BB alone” or “one type BB + cherry” ( The “number of games” is 24 since the case of digesting is illustrated. In addition, “2 types combined” executes 2 types BB after winning the “2 types BB alone” or “2 types BB + cherry” after the symbol combination that the 2 types BB will operate is stopped and displayed ( The “number of games” is 8 since the case of digesting is illustrated.

  The “expected number of inserted values” is an expected value of the number of inserted games per game in consideration of the probability determined by the internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by “number of inserted games × probability × number of games”. The “expected number of payouts” is an expected value of the number of payouts per game considering the probability determined by internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by “number of payouts × probability × number of games”. Yes.

  Note that the configuration in the figure may be applied to the case where the game is played as follows.

<Game method 1>
A game method in which the game is executed with the most profitable game method for the player and is not a push order such as a push order bell. A game is executed in a stop operation mode (stop button operation mode, stop button pressing order, stop button operation timing, etc.) that stops and displays a certain symbol combination (wins). Further, in a game that is won for a push order such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a push order), the stop operation mode that provides the largest payout number is used. And run the game.

<Game method 2>
In a game won by a bell, watermelon, symbol, or cherry that is not a push order such as a push order bell, a stop operation mode (stop button operation mode) that stops (displays a winning combination) a symbol combination with a game medal payout The game is executed in the order of pressing the stop buttons, the stop button operation timing, and the like. In addition, in a game won for a push order such as a push order bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a push order), it is random regardless of whether or not the push order navigation is executed. The game is executed in a proper stop operation mode (stop button pressing order, stop button operation timing is random). Note that “random” means, for example, that all the six types of pressing order are selected at an equal ratio with respect to the pressing order of the stop buttons, and all the 20 frame stop operation timings are selected at an equal ratio regarding the stop timing. It is to be.

  “Inside” is a game after winning one of “1 type BB alone”, “1 type BB + cherry”, “2 type BB alone”, “2 type BB + cherry”, and 1 type BB Or the game that does not stop the symbol combination related to the combination of symbols and bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays in which the two types of BB are activated (in the situation where the winning of the one type BB or the two types BB is carried over) A game that was not won for a small role or replay). In the figure, at 290/65536, a game that was not won in the small role or replay in the situation where the winning of 1 type BB or 2 type BB was carried over was executed, and the “expected number of inputs expected value” was about 0. .0132775146, and the “expected number of payouts” is 0.

<During BB operation>
The “1st type BB in operation” shown in the second level from the top in the figure is a table relating to the numbers in the state where the 1st type BB is operating. During the type 1 BB operation, the prescribed number is two, and it is configured not to win the lose, but to win any of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry. In addition, the “paid-out number” is 15 for all of bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry, making it easier to win (determine) the bell most easily. Moreover, you may comprise so that one or more (all may be sufficient) of the "number" which will win a watermelon, a symbol, and a cherry tree may become the same as "when BB is non-operation". In addition, as described above, in a game in which the type 1 BB is in operation, 15 bets are paid out by betting 2 in all games. The “number of payouts” of “type 1 total” is 22.5.

<During BB operation>
The “2 type BB in operation” shown at the bottom of the figure is a table relating to the numbers in the state where the 2 type BB is operating. During the type 2 BB operation, the prescribed number is two, and when the game is executed in a predetermined stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the order of “left → middle → right”), Only the symbol combination relating to the bell is configured to stop display. Further, the “number of payouts” when the symbol combination relating to the bell is stopped is 15. In addition, as described above, in a game in which the type 2 BB is in operation, 15 bets are paid out by betting 2 in all games. Therefore, the expected number of payouts when the specified number is 3 (“when BB is not in operation) The “number of payouts” of “total of two types” is 22.5.

<BB not working>
Again, “when BB is not operating” will be described in detail. “No replay” means four types of winning roles: bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, and “Replay included” means five types of role: bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry, replay Show. The “winning OUT” in “no replay” is the sum of the expected number of payouts of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, and is about 1.237258911. Also, the “winning and payout rate” for “no replay” is “the sum of the expected number of payouts (winning OUT)” is “the sum of the expected number of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries” It is a value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, a payout rate obtained by adding the winning combination, which is about 222.8%.

  “Winning Out” in “Replay included” is a value obtained by adding up the expected number of payouts for Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, Cherry, and Regame, and is about 1.649246216. Note that even if the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed, the game medal is not actually paid out, but when the game is executed with three bets and the symbol combination related to replay is stopped and displayed, Since three automatic bets are executed, the “number of payouts” related to replay is 3. In addition, the “winning and winning rate” in “including replays” is the sum of “expected number of payouts (winning OUT)” and “expected number of inputs for Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, Cherry, and Regame” It is a value obtained by multiplying the value divided by “value” by 100, that is, a payout rate obtained by adding the winning combination and the replay, and is about 170.5%.

  The “one-type calculated ball rate” is a value obtained by multiplying a value obtained by dividing the expected number of payouts of “one-type total” by the expected number of inputs by 100, and is 750.0%. Further, the “two-type calculated ball rate” is a value obtained by multiplying a value obtained by dividing the expected number of payouts of “two-type total” by the expected number of inputs by 100, and is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values>
Here, when the above-described values are compared, the following relationship is obtained.
(1) “Expected number of payouts” for “total of two types” <“Expected number of payouts” for the sum of “no replay” (winning OUT)
(2) “Expected number of payouts” for “total of two types” <“Expected number of payouts” for the sum of “including replays” (winning OUT)
(3) Expected number of payouts for “total of two types” <“expected number of payouts” for the main small role
(4) “Expected number of inputs” in “Inside” <Expected number of inputs of main role
(5) “Expected number of inputs” in “Inside” <Expected number of inputs in “Re-play”

  In addition, when the Type 2 BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can acquire is less than when the Type 1 BB is activated, and the Type 1 BB is not won during the Type 2 BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will fade. Therefore, as shown in (1) above, by designing so that “expected number of payouts” of “type 2 total” <“expected number of payouts” of “no replay” is in operation, type 2 BB is operating The “expected number of payouts” of the small role can be made higher, and even when the two types of BBs are operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is operating), but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) This makes it easier for the player to feel and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

  In addition, when the Type 2 BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can acquire is less than when the Type 1 BB is activated, and the Type 1 BB is not won during the Type 2 BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will fade. Therefore, as shown in (2) above, by designing so that “expected number of payouts” for “total of two types” <“expected number of payouts” for the total of “including replays”, two types of BB are operating. The “expected number of payouts” of the small role can be made higher, and even when the two types of BBs are operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is operating), but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) This makes it easier for the player to feel and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

  In addition, when the Type 2 BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can acquire is less than when the Type 1 BB is activated, and the Type 1 BB is not won during the Type 2 BB operation. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's expectation for the game will fade. Therefore, as described in (3) above, by designing so that “expected number of payouts” of “total of two types” <“expected number of payouts” of the main small role, the main smaller than during operation of the second type BB The “expected number of payouts” of the winning combination can be increased, and even when the two types of BBs are operating, the BB is not operating (the bonus is operating), but the BB is not operating (the bonus is not operating) This makes it easier for the player to feel and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

  In addition, as a gaming machine having one or a plurality of configurations of (1) to (3) above, during the two-type BB operation, the prescribed number is two, the average payout number per game is two, etc. You may comprise so that the yield rate (2 types calculation ball rate) in 2 type BB operation | movement may be made low. By comprising in that way, the effect in the case of having the structure of (1)-(3) mentioned above will increase more.

  In addition, when a low-skilled player such as a player who is unable to push in “inside” plays a game, the symbol combination of the winning type 1 BB or type 2 BB cannot be stopped and displayed. There is concern that low players will have significant disadvantages. Therefore, as shown in (4) above, by designing so that “internal medium” “expected number of inputs” <main input “expected number of inputs”, even in “inside”, Therefore, even if a player with a low skill level plays a game, it is possible to obtain a gaming machine that is unlikely to cause a disadvantage.

  In addition, when a low-skilled player such as a player who is unable to push in “inside” plays a game, the symbol combination of the winning type 1 BB or type 2 BB cannot be stopped and displayed. There is concern that low players will have significant disadvantages. Therefore, as described in (5) above, by designing so that “expected number of inputs” in “inside” <“expected number of inputs” in “replay”, even in “inside” Therefore, even if a player with a low skill level plays a game, it is possible to obtain a gaming machine that hardly causes a disadvantage.

<Combination of configurations according to this example>
As described above, the gaming machine having the configuration according to the sixth embodiment to the configuration according to the present embodiment has been described. In the configuration from the present example to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to appropriately combine the configurations. Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine that is combined from the configuration according to the present example to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment. Are listed.

<Combination configuration 1>
For example, in the present example, <<< configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <configuration 1> in the third embodiment, << Third Embodiment An example of medal addition processing by an insertion sensor >> A gaming machine configured in combination with the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<>>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the push order navigation recognizes no matter which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. In the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but an error has occurred at this timing, The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is performed. Prevents game medals from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not running It is possible to provide a user friendly gaming machine is possible to.

<Combination configuration 2>
For example, <<< Configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight><Configuration1> and <<<< in the fourth embodiment <A 4th embodiment medal return member>>> It is set as the game machine comprised combining the structure which concerns on >>>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the push order navigation recognizes no matter which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. The depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the direction of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that has collided with the collision portion can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a situation where the medal receiving port D341 bounces back.

<Combination configuration 3>
For example, in the present example, <<< configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <configuration 1> in the fifth embodiment, << «Fifth embodiment Drive control of medal payout device >>>> A gaming machine configured in combination with the configuration according to >>>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the push order navigation recognizes no matter which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. When a player who receives a game medal is paid out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medal can be paid out at the same interval from the first to the predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

<Combination configuration 4>
For example, in the present example, <<< configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, and <configuration 1> in the sixth embodiment <Sixth embodiment: Processing at disconnection of communication between main control board and sub-control board during execution of processing relating to settlement> In case of one-to-one command and channel >> Configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> A gaming machine constructed by combining

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the push order navigation recognizes no matter which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during the execution of the process accompanied by the output of the voice, the player can Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 5>
For example, the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor of the third embodiment >> in the third embodiment, and <<<< 4th in the fourth embodiment Embodiment A gaming machine configured in combination with a configuration related to a medal return member >>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but an error has occurred at this timing. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process It is possible to prevent the gaming medal from entering (swallowing) the game medal even though it is not executed. The first game medal that has a sufficient distance and collides with the collision part is the medal receiving hole D341. It is possible to provide a game machine and it is possible to prevent a situation arises that bounces off a.

<Combination configuration 6>
For example, a configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor of the third embodiment >> in the third embodiment, and <<<< 5th in the fifth embodiment Embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the drive control of the medal payout device with the configuration according to >>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but an error has occurred at this timing. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process It is possible to prevent game medals from entering (swallowing) the game medals even though the game medals are not executed, and when a player who receives the game medals is paid out a predetermined number of game medals Game medals can be paid out at the same interval from the first to a predetermined number of It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give a sense of discomfort to.

<Combination structure 7>
For example, a configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<<< Example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor of the third embodiment >> in the third embodiment, and <<< Sixth Embodiment in the sixth embodiment> Configuration Processing combined with processing related to disconnection between main control board and sub-control board during execution of processing relating to settlement When command and channel are on a one-to-one basis, the configuration related to << configuration 1 >> It is assumed that the gaming machine is.

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but an error has occurred at this timing. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process It is possible to prevent game medals from getting into the gaming machine (swallowing) even though the process is not executed, and while executing the process accompanied by the output of sound, the main control board M When the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player does not end the voice output. That Te does not occur is some kind of problem it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing.

<Combination configuration 8>
For example, in the fourth embodiment, <<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> and the fifth embodiment, <<<< 5th embodiment drive control of medal payout device >> A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration according to >>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the game machine internal direction has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collided with the collision part However, when a player who receives a game medal pays out a predetermined number of game medals, the same interval from the first to the predetermined number can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can receive a payout of game medals and does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

<Combination structure 9>
For example, in the fourth embodiment, the configuration according to <<<< fourth embodiment medal return member >>>> and the sixth embodiment, << the sixth embodiment, during the execution of the process related to the settlement Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the control board and the sub-control board When the command and the channel are one-to-one, the gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >>>>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 in the game machine internal direction has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collided with the collision part However, it is possible to prevent the situation where the medal receiving port D341 rebounds, and the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while the process accompanied by the output of the voice is being executed. In this case, since the player does not finish outputting the voice, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination structure 10>
For example, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration according to <<<< drive control of the medal payout device of the fifth embodiment >>>> Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between main control board and sub-control board in the case of a one-to-one command and channel >> A game machine configured by combining the configurations according to << Configuration 1 >>

<Effect>
With this configuration, for example, when a player who receives a payout of game medals is paid out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medal can be paid out at the same interval from the first to the predetermined number. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while executing the process accompanied by the voice output without giving the player a sense of incongruity, the player Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination structure 11>
For example, in the present example, <<< configuration related to display start of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <configuration 1> in the third embodiment, <<<Example of medal addition process by third embodiment insertion sensor >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> and <<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine configured in combination with such a configuration.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the push order navigation recognizes no matter which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. In the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but an error has occurred at this timing, The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is performed. Prevents game medals from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not running However, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collided with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving port D341. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent the situation of being lost.

<Combination structure 12>
For example, in the present example, <<< configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <configuration 1> in the third embodiment, <<<Example of medal addition process by third embodiment insertion sensor >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> and <<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment It is assumed that the gaming machine is configured by combining this configuration with the configuration according to <<<< 5th embodiment medal payout device drive control >>>> in the fifth embodiment.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the push order navigation recognizes no matter which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. In the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but an error has occurred at this timing, The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is performed. Prevents game medals from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not running However, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the gaming medal, and the first gaming medal that collided with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving port D341. When a player receiving a game medal is paid out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medal is paid out at the same interval from the first to the predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

<Combination structure 13>
For example, in the present example, <<< configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <configuration 1> in the third embodiment, <<<Example of medal addition processing by third embodiment insertion sensor >>> The configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> and <<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment The configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the configuration according to <<<< the fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control >>>>, and the process according to the sixth embodiment, the adjustment according to the sixth embodiment. Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub-control board during execution of a game machine configured by combining the command and the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of the channel >> To do.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the push order navigation recognizes no matter which display device the player sees because the timing of starting the push order navigation on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is delayed. In the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not been performed yet, but an error has occurred at this timing, The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is performed. Prevents game medals from entering the game machine (swallowing) even though it is not running However, the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collided with the collision portion bounces back to the medal receiving port D341. When a player receiving a game medal is paid out a predetermined number of game medals, the game medal is paid out at the same interval from the first to the predetermined number. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while executing the process accompanied by the output of the sound without giving the player a sense of incongruity, the player Since the audio output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of recognizing that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination structure 14>
For example, in this example, <<< configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <configuration 3> in the third embodiment, << Third Embodiment An example of medal addition processing by an insertion sensor >> A gaming machine configured in combination with the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> of <<>>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant For example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on (this In this example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is turned on), and it is difficult for the player to recognize the push order navigation. The first insertion sensor D20s off and the second insertion sensor D30s on In this state, the credit addition process has not been performed yet, but if an error occurs at this timing, the C of the main control board M The UC 100 determines that an error has occurred, the execution process of a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medal to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100) is not in time, and the credit addition process is not executed. Nevertheless, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent the gaming medal from entering (swallowing) the gaming machine.

<Combination structure 15>
For example, in the present example, <<< configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <configuration 3> in the fourth embodiment, and <<<< A 4th embodiment medal return member >> It is considered as a gaming machine constituted combining the composition concerning >>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant For example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation lights up the lamp (this In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is turned on), and it is difficult for the player to recognize the pushing navigation, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is a gaming medal. The first game medal that has collided with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving port D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine which makes it possible to prevent the situation say.

<Combination configuration 16>
For example, in the present example, <<< Configuration relating to start of display of push order navigation >>><Execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <Configuration 3> in the fifth embodiment, and << «Fifth embodiment Drive control of medal payout device >>>> A gaming machine configured in combination with the configuration according to >>>.

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant For example, even in a gaming machine not equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation is turned on (this In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is turned on), and it is difficult for the player to recognize the push order navigation, and the player who receives the payout of the game medal has a predetermined number of game medals. When a game is paid out, game medals can be paid out at the same interval from the first card to a predetermined number, giving the player a sense of incongruity There it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Combination structure 17>
For example, in the present example, <<< configuration related to start of display of push order navigation >>><execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight>, <configuration 3> in the sixth embodiment, <<<Sixth embodiment: Processing at disconnection of communication between main control board and sub-control board during execution of processing relating to settlement> In case of one-to-one command and channel >> Configuration according to << Configuration 1 >> A gaming machine constructed by combining

<Effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is set to a predetermined period (start lever operation → period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant For example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation lights up the lamp (this In the example, the reel window frame lamp D310 is turned on), etc., and it is difficult for the player to recognize the push order navigation, and while performing processing accompanied by voice output, When the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the player does not finish outputting the voice, so there is some problem in the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine to be able to recognize that Flip is not.

<Combination structure 18>
For example, in the present example, the configuration related to << the configuration related to the display end of the push order navigation >>, and the <<<< example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >> in the third embodiment >> A gaming machine is configured by combining with the configuration according to <Configuration 1>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, two display devices can be obtained by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. Can be avoided at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden of the player to be able to visually confirm the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. In the state where the insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred. , Predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, a game medal is set to the discharge port D240 by turning off the blocker D100 and using the blocker D100. A user-friendly gaming machine that can prevent game medals from entering (swallowing) a game medal even though the execution process is not in time and the credit addition process is not performed. Can be provided.

<Combination structure 19>
For example, in this example, the configuration according to << the configuration related to the display end of the push order navigation >> and the configuration related to the <<<< fourth embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured in combination.

<Effect>
With this configuration, two display devices can be obtained by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. Can be avoided at the same time, the player can reduce the player's gaming burden that the end of the push order navigation can be visually confirmed on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs, the medal drop A situation in which the depth of the surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that has collided with the collision part bounces back to the medal receiving port D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to prevent such a situation.

<Combination structure 20>
For example, in this example, the configuration according to << the configuration related to the display end of the push order navigation >>, and the <<<< the fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control >>>> in the fifth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration.

<Effect>
With this configuration, two display devices can be obtained by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. Can be avoided, and the player can visually check the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. When a player who receives a payout of a predetermined number of game medals is paid out, it is possible to receive a payout of game medals at the same interval from the first to the predetermined number, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable A gaming machine can be provided.

<Combination structure 21>
For example, in the present example, the configuration related to << the configuration related to the display end of the push order navigation >>, and the main control board and the sub-board in the sixth embodiment during the execution of the process related to << the sixth embodiment settlement Processing at the time of disconnecting communication with the control board When a command and a channel are one-to-one >> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, two display devices can be obtained by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 different from the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40. Can be avoided at the same time, the player can reduce the player's gaming burden that the end of the push order navigation can be visually confirmed on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected while the process with the output is being performed, the player does not finish outputting the voice. A user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize that no problem has occurred can be provided.

<Combination structure 22>
For example, in the present example, << the configuration related to the reel control and push order navigation >>, and the <<<< example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor >> in the third embodiment >> The gaming machine is configured by combining the configuration according to <Configuration 1>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be stopped next is being pressed due to the stop operation of the reel Since it becomes clear, it is difficult for a player's unintentional disadvantage to occur, such as the maximum number of acquisitions cannot be obtained due to a push order mistake or the like. Although the addition process is not performed, if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and a predetermined medal insertion error process (for example, the blocker D100 is turned off by the blocker D100). (E.g., paying out game medals to the discharge port D240) is not in time, and credit addition processing is not executed. Razz, game medals can provide a user friendly gaming machine which can prevent a may enter the game machine (swallowing).

<Combination structure 23>
For example, in this example, a configuration according to << a configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >> and a configuration related to <<<< 4th embodiment medal return member >>>> in the fourth embodiment. A gaming machine configured in combination.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be stopped next is being pressed due to the stop operation of the reel Since it becomes clear, it is difficult for the player's unintentional disadvantages such as the maximum number of winnings to be obtained due to a push order mistake or the like, and the depth of the medal falling surface D342 toward the inside of the gaming machine is relative to the diameter of the game medal. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that has a sufficient distance and can prevent a situation in which the first game medal that collides with the collision unit bounces back to the medal receiving port D341. .

<Combination structure 24>
For example, in this example, a configuration related to << a configuration related to reel control and push order navigation >>, and a <<< 5th embodiment, medal payout device drive control >>>> in the fifth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining with the configuration.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be stopped next is being pressed due to the stop operation of the reel Because it becomes clear, it is difficult for the player's unintentional disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number acquired due to a push order mistake etc., and when a player who receives a game medal is paid out a predetermined number of game medals Since game medals can be paid out at the same interval from the first to a predetermined number, a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give the player a sense of incongruity can be provided.

<Combination configuration 25>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to << the configuration related to the reel control and the push order navigation >>, and the main control board and the sub-control during the execution of the processing related to the << the sixth embodiment settlement in the sixth embodiment. Processing at the time of disconnecting communication with the control board When a command and a channel are one-to-one >> A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration according to << Configuration 1 >>>>.

<Effect>
With this configuration, even if the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation and the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be stopped next is being pressed due to the stop operation of the reel Since it becomes clear, it is unlikely that the player's unintentional disadvantages, such as being unable to obtain the maximum number of acquisitions due to a mistake in the pressing order, etc., and while executing processing accompanied by voice output, When the communication with the sub-control board S is cut off, the player does not end the voice output, so that it is possible to recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine. Machine can be provided.

  The example of the gaming machine combined from the configuration according to the present example to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment has been described above, but these are examples, and the configuration according to the sixth embodiment is appropriately changed from the configuration according to the present example. Can be combined.

(Summary)
Note that the following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A strip-shaped reel tape (for example, reel strip MO) wound around the outer periphery of a reel base (for example, reel frame MW);
In the reel tape, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
As a kind of the design, it has at least a first design (for example, a white seven design) and a second design (for example, a bell design),
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol,
The second design is arranged on at least one of both end portions in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first design is not arranged on each end portion in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. ,
In the gaming machine, the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than an outer periphery of a surface of the reel base portion around which the reel tape is wound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be opened and closed;
In a rotating type gaming machine having a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A base (for example, base BU) on which the reel unit is installed;
A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal portion and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
A part of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking part (for example, a screw BS),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the slope portion is positioned vertically below the locking component located closest to the side on which the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be opened and closed;
In a rotating type gaming machine having a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside the gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A base (for example, base BU) on which the reel unit is installed;
A main tank member (for example, hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal portion and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed in the vicinity of the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking part (for example, a screw BS),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is positioned vertically below the locking part located closest to the side on which the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying the effect;
An operation member (for example, sub input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect,
After the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is finally stopped among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by performing a final stop switch operation that is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when a first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, an effect display unit) , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) is operated after finishing one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The gaming machine is configured such that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5)
A plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying the effect;
An operation member (for example, sub input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect,
After the plurality of reels are rotated by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is finally stopped among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by performing a final stop switch operation that is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reels, and stopping all of the plurality of reels.
When the final stop switch operation is performed, when a first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, an effect display unit) , Standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (for example, the sub input button SB) is operated after finishing one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is displayed with the predetermined image being displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. If a specific operation member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the elapse of time, the predetermined image remains displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. 2 Even if the predetermined time has elapsed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly added before the first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Even if the operation is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit Is composed of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, a bet is made before the first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. The game is configured such that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit even if the first predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A setting switch (for example, a setting) that is electrically connected to the main game unit and is operated to shift to a setting change mode (for example, a setting change mode) in which a setting value related to the advantage for the player can be changed. Key switch),
The main game unit is configured to be capable of executing an interrupt process that is a process executed every predetermined time,
In a situation where power is cut off in a predetermined gaming state that is not in the setting change mode, and the power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the setting changing mode is entered. In the case where a power interruption occurs after the setting switch is turned off and power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine, it is configured to shift to the setting change mode,
In a situation where power is cut off in a predetermined gaming state that is not in the setting change mode, and the power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the setting switch is turned on, and the power supply to the gaming machine is started. It is configured not to shift to the setting change mode when power is turned off before the predetermined time elapses and power is started to be supplied to the gaming machine after the setting switch is turned off. It is a featured gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) provided corresponding to each of the reels and operated by the player when stopping the rotation of the reels;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number of ranges;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that performs control related to the output of the performance,
The main game department
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery;
Reel control means for controlling stop of the reel so as to correspond to a result lottery result by the role lottery means when the stop switch is operated,
A storage number increase process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means;
A payout process for paying out game media;
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, it is configured so that a game medium can be given to the player,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and a specific number of game media are given, the storage number increasing process is executed. And is configured to execute the withdrawal process,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, the storage number increase process is executed and the payout process is not executed.
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. When the game medium is granted, the payout process is executed after the storage number increasing process is executed,
The main game department
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium grant information is configured to be transmitted to the secondary game unit,
The subsidiary game department
Based on the reception of the game medium grant information, it is configured to be able to output a game medium grant sound, which is a production sound related to the grant of the game medium, from a speaker,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, when the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the specific number of game media is provided, the game medium provision information On the basis of the reception of a predetermined game medium giving sound (for example, a game medium giving sound output when a credit is increased by 1, a game medium giving sound output when paying out one game medal) Output is possible,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the specific number of game media is given. In this case, based on the reception of the game medium grant information, the predetermined game medium grant sound can be output,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the predetermined number minus the specific number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, If the game medium is given, the predetermined game medium grant sound can be output based on the fact that the game medium grant information has been received,
During the execution of the storage number increasing process, the time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means becomes A (A is a natural number) until it becomes A + 1, and N (N is a natural number, 2 ≦ N ) M (M is a natural number, 1 + 1 M ≦ (N−1)) M + 1 from the start of the payout process for the game medium during execution of the payout process for paying out game media The gaming machine is characterized in that the time value until the start of execution of the payout process for the eye game medium is different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production;
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be lit when performing the production,
A setting value display section (for example, a setting display LED) capable of displaying the setting value;
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (for example, element 6 in FIG. 77),
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77),
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (for example, element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (for example, element 4 in FIG. 77),
The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (for example, element 2 in FIG. 77) and a light-off time (for example, element 3 in FIG. 77).
It has a plurality of the lighting colors, has a plurality of lighting times, has a plurality of turn-off times,
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be performed when a predetermined abnormality is present, a second lighting pattern that can be performed when a setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit, and a setting value display that is not during a predetermined abnormality And at least a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed in the part,
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode,
The gaming machine is configured such that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern do not include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9)
A storage means capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number of ranges (for example, in this example, game medals can be stored electrically as credits in gaming machines);
A switch operated when betting game media stored in the storage means, and a bet switch capable of betting a plurality of game media (for example, a max bet button);
A predetermined lamp (for example, a 3-bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a specified number, which is the maximum number of bets per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been bet;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective;
A role determining means capable of determining the winning role,
As the winning role determined by the role determining means, it is configured to be able to determine the re-playing role,
In the predetermined gaming state, the re-game player is not won in the game executed immediately before, and the sum of the game media stored in the storage means and the number of bets is not less than the specified number, And in the situation where the number of bets is less than the prescribed number, the specific lamp is configured to light up,
In the situation where the specific lamp is lit, when the number of bets reaches the specified number, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10)
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub game part (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the production,
The time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the main game unit program seems to be longer than the time from when the power is cut off until the power supply to the gaming machine ends. Configured,
The time from the start of supplying power to the gaming machine to the start of the main game unit program is longer than the time from the start of supplying power to the gaming machine to the start of the secondary game unit program The gaming machine is configured as described above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Then, even when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. The gaming machine is configured so as not to give a player a gaming value corresponding to the combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
In a game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Then, even if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter and the power-off process based on the detection of power-off being executed, The gaming machine is configured not to give a player a gaming value corresponding to the combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. After the specific symbol combination is displayed after being stopped at the timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. Even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. Have

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the specific symbol combination is displayed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even after the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of whether or not

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the lottery state, at least the first lottery state and the first lottery state have at least a second lottery state having a different probability of determining a specific result,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation after that, it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The symbol combinations other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop is performed and the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation thereafter. The gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel, and a predetermined lamp that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result (for example, a replay lamp D290),
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the specific symbol combination is displayed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to be lit.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. Even though the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. This is a gaming machine characterized in that the lamp is turned on.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel, and a predetermined lamp that can be turned on based on the determination of a specific result (for example, a replay lamp D290),
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively. After the specific symbol combination is displayed at a specific timing as the final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is configured to be lit.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even when a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, although the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined lamp is lit after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8)
N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53);
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
In a game executed in a specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the player's N-1st reel, and a symbol corresponding to a specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined performance sound (for example, a tenp sound) from the speaker,
In a game executed in the specific game state, a predetermined rotation for the (N-1) th reel is performed even though the player has stopped at the specific timing as the stop operation for the (N-1) th reel. A gaming machine configured to be able to output a predetermined effect sound from a speaker even after a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel due to a defect. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when a game value stored in the storage means is betted and can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined gaming state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbol is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that, the specific symbol combination is displayed so that the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. Configured,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined gaming state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. Although the corresponding symbols are stopped, and the player is stopped at the specified timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the specified is caused by a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is configured such that even when a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed, notification that the specific lamp is valid is not made.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when a game value stored in the storage means is betted and can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined gaming state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbol is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that, the specific symbol combination is displayed so that the notification that the specific lamp is valid is not given. Configured,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbol is stopped, and the power-off process based on the detection of power-off is executed despite the fact that the player is stopped at the specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured not to notify that the specific lamp is valid after the power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when a game value stored in the storage means is betted and can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a notification that the specific lamp is effective is given. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, respectively, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Regardless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, a notification that the specific lamp is valid is provided. This is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A storage means (for example, a credit number display device D200) capable of electrically storing game values within a predetermined number of ranges;
A bet switch (for example, a max bet button) that is operated when a game value stored in the storage means is betted and can bet a plurality of game values;
A specific lamp (for example, a max bet lamp) capable of notifying that the operation of the bet switch is effective;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the predetermined symbol combination. Corresponding symbols are stopped respectively, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, a notification that the specific lamp is effective is given. In the game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped, respectively, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Regardless, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, a notification that the specific lamp is valid is issued after power is restored. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even though the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined combination is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The game value corresponding to the symbol combination is configured to be given to the player,
It is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (for example, freezing at the end of the bonus) when the special game state end condition is satisfied,
It is a special game state, a game that is newly executed in a situation that satisfies the end condition of the special game state by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are respectively stopped on the reels, and are stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is configured to be executed.
It is a special game state, a game that is newly executed in a situation that satisfies the end condition of the special game state by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine to play.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special gaming state advantageous to the player,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
It is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (for example, freezing at the end of the bonus) when the special game state end condition is satisfied,
It is a special game state, a game that is newly executed in a situation that satisfies the end condition of the special game state by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are respectively stopped on the reels, and are stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is configured to be executed.
It is a special game state, a game that is newly executed in a situation that satisfies the end condition of the special game state by giving the player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination, and the internal lottery means In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by the above, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, and the player is stopped at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Nevertheless, even when a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power-off process based on the detection of the power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. This is a gaming machine characterized by this.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. It is configured as
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Then, after the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is configured not to give a player a gaming value corresponding to the above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. It is configured as
In a game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the reels, respectively. Then, after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the stop operation being performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the subsequent player and the power-off process based on the detection of power-off being executed, The gaming machine is configured so as not to give a player a gaming value corresponding to the combination.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation corresponds to the specific symbol combination. After the symbols have been stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the subsequent player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. Configured to be executed,
In a game in which the predetermined game state is set and a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel. Then, after the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is input This is a gaming machine configured so that the next game cannot be executed regardless of what has been done.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the player's final stop operation corresponds to the specific symbol combination. After the symbols have been stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the subsequent player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the next game is played regardless of the game value being input. Configured to be executed,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even after the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value is displayed even after a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is configured such that the next game can be executed regardless of whether or not is inserted.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a gaming state, it has at least a special game transferable state advantageous to the player,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
From when a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means until the specific symbol combination is stopped, it is configured to be able to enter the special game transition state,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. In addition, after the special symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the player after that and the special symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a game that is not in a special game transferable state and the lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means has a predetermined result different from the specific result, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. After each stop, the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. The gaming machine is configured not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player. In addition, after the specific symbol combination is displayed as a final stop operation of the subsequent player and the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. Even though the stop operation is performed at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a gaming machine characterized by being.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the lottery state, at least the first lottery state and the first lottery state have at least a second lottery state having a different probability of determining a specific result,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
Each game that is executed in the first lottery state and that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game for which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are respectively stopped on the reels, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the second symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to be able to enter the lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has the specific symbol combination. The symbols corresponding to are stopped, and the player is stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation, and the symbols other than the specific symbol combination due to the predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. After the combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured not to enter the second combination lottery state.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
Freeze can be executed to delay the progress of the game,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. After the specific symbol combination is displayed after being stopped at the timing, a predetermined freeze (for example, a freeze at the start of a special game) can be executed.
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each reel, and a specific stop operation for the player after that is specified. Even if the operation is stopped at the timing, even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the power-off process based on the detection of power-off, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored This is a gaming machine that is configured as described above.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively, After the specific symbol combination is displayed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the reels, respectively, Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the power-off process being executed based on the detection of power-off even though the stop operation was performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, The gaming machine is configured such that the next game can be executed regardless of the game value being input after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the lottery state, at least the first lottery state and the first lottery state have at least a second lottery state having a different probability of determining a specific result,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. It is stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed at a specific timing as the player's final stop operation after that, it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The symbols other than the specific symbol combination are executed because the power-off process based on the detection of power-off is executed even though the player is stopped and the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter. Even if a combination is displayed, the gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4)
N reels (N is a natural number of 3 or more) provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53);
A speaker (for example, speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power off is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power off processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means.
In a game that is in a predetermined gaming state and for which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel that is stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation by the player corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination. Are stopped at a predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game that is in the predetermined game state and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the reels, and the player's subsequent game Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed as a result of the power-off processing based on the detection of power-off being executed even though the final stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing, the power supply It is configured to give a player a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination after returning,
In a game executed in a specific gaming state, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a stop operation for the player's N-1st reel, and a symbol corresponding to a specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined performance sound (for example, a tenp sound) from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific game state, the power-off process based on the detection of power-off despite the stop operation at the specific timing as the stop operation for the N-1th reel of the player As a result of the operation, even when a symbol other than the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination is stopped on each stopped reel, the predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. Is a gaming machine characterized by

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5)
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
Internal lottery means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel,
As the lottery state, at least the first lottery state and the first lottery state have at least a second lottery state having a different probability of determining a specific result,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game for which a specific result has been determined by the internal lottery means.
Each game that is executed in the first lottery state and that has been stopped by a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player in the game for which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means The symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combinations are respectively stopped on the reels, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by being stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player thereafter, the second symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to be able to enter the lottery state,
In the game executed in the case of the first lottery state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel has a symbol corresponding to the specific symbol combination. The symbol combinations other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation even though the stop is performed and the player is stopped at a specific timing as the final stop operation thereafter. The gaming machine is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

P Cylinder type game machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input acceptance sensor D20s First input sensor, D30s Second input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Checkout button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decoration lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal insertion slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit number display device, D210 insertion number display lamp D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Release port, D250 Special game state display device D260 Key hole, D270 Discharge number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member D341 Medal receiving port D342 Medal falling surface D343 Medal non-falling surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting / reset button C Main control chip, M50 Reel M51 Left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Game interval minimum timer S Sub control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Revolving backlight S40 Production display device, SC Sub control chip E Power board, E10 Power switch H medal payout device, H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disc, H50a disc rotation shaft H60 game medal outlet, H70 discharge urging means H80 hopper motor S50 bet buttoner , S60 Stop button lamp K Revolving board, K10 Revolving motor K20 Revolving sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button KHc Highly secured fault counter, YKc-1 Advantageous section remaining game number counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU base part, H62 discharge guide part, H64 inclined surface HS medal auxiliary tank, BS screw, DE full detection electrode M55 first end part, M57 second end part, M58 overlapped part, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band

Claims (1)

Multiple reels,
A start switch,
Multiple stop switches,
An instruction display unit capable of displaying information;
An internal lottery means for carrying out an internal lottery based on the operation of the start switch;
Game progress standby means for waiting for the start of rotation of the plurality of reels even when the start switch is operated under a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet until a predetermined minimum game time has passed,
A main control board for controlling the progress of the game;
An information display section capable of displaying information;
A sub-control board that controls the output of information to the information display unit,
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch, an instruction game that displays information that can identify the advantageous operation mode on an instruction display unit,
A first section in which the instruction game is not executed;
A second section that can execute the instruction game, and in the instruction game, an operation mode suggestion image that suggests an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be displayed on the information display unit,
In the game in which the specific combination is determined by the internal lottery means in the second section, the instruction game can be executed.
In the designated game in which the start switch is operated and the specific combination is determined after the predetermined minimum game time has elapsed and the specified number of game media have been betted in the second section. It is configured to start displaying the operation mode suggestion image on the information display unit after starting to display information that can identify the advantageous operation mode on the instruction display unit,
In the instruction game in which the start switch is operated and the specific combination is determined in a situation where the specified number of game media are bet before the predetermined minimum game time elapses in the second section, After starting to display the operation mode suggestion image on the information display unit, the instruction display unit is configured to start displaying information that can identify the advantageous operation mode,
When the final stop operation of the stop switch in the instruction game in which the specific combination is determined is performed in the second section, the display of the information that can specify the advantageous operation mode on the instruction display unit is ended. Then, the gaming machine is configured to end the display of the operation mode suggestion image in the information display unit.

Images